Use
er Guid
de
Elttek Contro
C
oller Web Interrface
Web
b Interfa
ace
Powe
er System
m Controlllers
Doc. No. 37003
35.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Safe
ety an
nd En
nviron
nmenttal Pre
ecauttions
IMPORT
TANT: Read
d user insttructions before
b
operrating equipment!
The follo
owing docu
uments are
e available online at e
eltek.share
efile.com.
Co
ontroller Us
ser Guides
Sm
martpack2 Ma
aster Controlller:
Doc #35
50020.013
Sm
martpack S Co
ontroller:
Doc #35
50030.013
Compack Contrroller:
Doc #35
50011.013
Otther Contro
oller/Monitor Guides
I/O
O Monitor2 Ins
stallation Guide:
Doc #35
51509.033
Read and observe
o
alll safety sttatements and requirrements be
elow beforre
performing any insta
allation or operation work on p
power equipment.
Failure to
t comply with the safety
s
sta
atements a
and require
ements co
ontained in this
docume
ent may res
sult in injurry and/or equipment
e
damage, a
and it may void the user’s
authoritty to opera
ate the equ
uipment.
Full product manu
uals are av
vailable onlline at: elttek.sharefi
file.com
WARNING: HAZARDO
OUS VOLTA
AGE AND E
ENERGY LEV
VELS CAN PRODUCE
S
AN
ND BURNS. Only auth
horized, qua
alified, and
d trained
SERIOUS SHOCKS
personn
nel should attempt
a
to
o work on power
p
equipment. Th
he equipme
ent is to be
e
connectted to supp
ply mains by
b a qualifie
ed persona
al in accord
dance with
h local and
national codes (e.g
g. NEC, CEC
C, etc). Reffer to data
asheets forr full product
cations.
specific
WARNING: Changes or modifica
ations to the system
m not expre
essly appro
oved
by the parrty respons
sible for the complian
nce could v
void the user's authorrity
to operate
e the syste
em.
CAUTION:: Refer to the
t battery
y manufac turer's doc
cumentatio
on for
recommen
nded batte
ery settings
s. It is the user's resp
ponsibility to enter
proper battery
b
parrameters.
Observe
e local and
d national electrical,
e
environme
e
ental, and w
workplace
e codes.
NOTICE: Alarm con
ntacts are rated for a maximum
m voltage o
of 60 V, SEL
LV (Safety
Extra Lo
ow Voltage
e) and a ma
aximum con
ntinuous c urrent of 0
0.5A.
2
DISCLAIMER
Information in this doc
cument is be
elieved to be accurate as of the date o
of publication
n and is subje
ect to
change without
w
notice. This document and the information
n contained herein do not represent e
either
a committment or any guarantee on
o the part off Eltek regard
ability, fitness, or compattibility
ding the relia
of the pro
oducts and procedures
p
de
escribed.
While eve
ery reasonab
ble effort is made
m
to ensu
ure the accu
uracy and com
mpleteness of this docum
ment,
Eltek ass
sumes no re
esponsibility or liability for
f any dam
mages that may be dire
ectly or indirrectly
attributed
d to the use of the inform
mation contaiined within o
or to any erro
ors or omissio
ons.
No part of
o this docum
ment may be reproduced
r
or
o transmitte
ed in any form
m or by any m
means—electtronic
or mecha
anical, includ
ding photocopying and recording—ffor any purp
pose withou
ut the expre
essed
consent of
o Eltek.
Copyrigh
ht © 2014 Eltek
2925 E Plano Pkw
wy
Plano
o, TX 7507
74
USA
Phone: +1
1 (469) 330
0-9100
Fax: +1 (469)
(
330-9
9101
Techn
nical Suppo
ort
+1 (80
00) 435-48
872
techsuppo
ort.us@elte
ek.com
www
w.eltek.com
m
Doc. No
o. 370035.013
Issue
e 1, April 2014
Publish
hed 4/25/20
014
3
Table of Contents
Comprehensive Overview ...................................................................................... 9
1. Guide Overview .................................................................................................. 10
Eltek Controllers with Web Interface ............................................................................. 11
Web Interface Features ..................................................................................................... 12
Functions Available Only Through the Web Interface................................................ 12
Controller Login and Access Levels ................................................................................ 13
Requirements ....................................................................................................................... 15
Hardware ....................................................................................................................................................... 16
Software ........................................................................................................................................................ 16
Recommended ............................................................................................................................................. 17
Optional .......................................................................................................................................................... 17
Direct Connection with the Controller ........................................................................... 17
2. Web Interface Overview .................................................................................... 24
Alarm Icons and Monitors .................................................................................................. 25
Alarm Monitor Variables and Brackets .......................................................................... 25
Category Buttons ................................................................................................................ 26
3. Home .................................................................................................................. 28
System Overview Window................................................................................................. 28
System Status and Operational Mode ................................................................................................... 29
Power System Components, Controller Nodes, and Inputs .............................................................. 31
System History Window..................................................................................................... 80
System Monitors Window.................................................................................................. 81
4. System Configuration ........................................................................................ 82
Power System ...................................................................................................................... 83
Power system ............................................................................................................................................... 83
Mains ............................................................................................................................................................... 91
Generator....................................................................................................................................................... 93
Rectifiers........................................................................................................................................................ 98
[Solar Charger] .......................................................................................................................................... 102
4
[Wind] ........................................................................................................................................................... 103
[Fuel Cell] .................................................................................................................................................... 104
[DcDc Converter] ...................................................................................................................................... 104
Load.............................................................................................................................................................. 105
Battery ........................................................................................................................................................ 107
Control System ......................................................................................................................................... 122
Device Settings ..................................................................................................................138
Time Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 138
Network Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 139
SNMP Settings........................................................................................................................................... 144
User Accounts ........................................................................................................................................... 158
5. Alarm Configuration ........................................................................................ 162
Alarm Monitors Edit Windows ........................................................................................163
General Alarm Monitor Window (not LVD) .......................................................................................... 164
Edit Window for LVBD .............................................................................................................................. 172
Edit Window for LVLD............................................................................................................................... 173
Alarm Configuration Menus ............................................................................................174
Power System ........................................................................................................................................... 174
Eltek CAN Nodes................................................................................................................207
AC Mains Monitor ...................................................................................................................................... 208
Battery Monitor ......................................................................................................................................... 210
Load Monitor .............................................................................................................................................. 211
Flexi Monitor............................................................................................................................................... 216
I/O Monitor Alarm Monitors .................................................................................................................... 220
I/O Monitor Output Relays ...................................................................................................................... 224
6. Logs .................................................................................................................. 225
Event Log .............................................................................................................................225
Data Log ...............................................................................................................................226
Energy Log ..........................................................................................................................228
Accumulated.............................................................................................................................................. 231
Hourly .......................................................................................................................................................... 231
Daily.............................................................................................................................................................. 232
Weekly ......................................................................................................................................................... 233
5
Generator Log.....................................................................................................................234
Battery Cycles....................................................................................................................235
Battery Tests .....................................................................................................................236
Change Log .........................................................................................................................239
Save Logs to File ................................................................................................................240
Accounts Log......................................................................................................................242
7. Commands ....................................................................................................... 244
System .................................................................................................................................244
Battery .................................................................................................................................246
Output Test.........................................................................................................................247
Virtual Inputs ......................................................................................................................249
Software Upgrade .............................................................................................................249
Load/Save Config ..............................................................................................................251
Load Config File ......................................................................................................................................... 251
Save Config File ......................................................................................................................................... 252
8. Statistics .......................................................................................................... 255
Statistics .............................................................................................................................255
Browse SD Card ......................................................................................................................................... 255
9. Help .................................................................................................................. 257
10.
Logout ......................................................................................................... 258
Procedures ......................................................................................................... 259
1. Procedures Overview ....................................................................................... 260
2. Setup ................................................................................................................ 261
Setting Float (Reference) Voltage ................................................................................261
Setting Rectifier Current Limit .......................................................................................262
Battery Configuration ......................................................................................................263
Number of Banks ...................................................................................................................................... 264
Capacity and Number of Battery Strings ........................................................................................... 264
Battery Table ............................................................................................................................................. 265
Setting Battery Charging Current Limit .......................................................................267
6
Battery Discharge Testing ..............................................................................................268
Battery Temperature Compensation ...........................................................................272
Temperature Probe Setup ..............................................................................................276
Controllers .................................................................................................................................................. 276
Flexi Monitors ............................................................................................................................................ 280
Setting Alarms ...................................................................................................................282
Input Alarms ............................................................................................................................................... 283
Output Alarm Relays ................................................................................................................................ 288
Alarm Setpoints ........................................................................................................................................ 289
Setting Alarm Battery Voltage Alarm (Example) .............................................................................. 289
Setting Nag Alarms .................................................................................................................................. 293
Setting Site Information ..................................................................................................295
Setting Generator Activation .........................................................................................297
Setting SNMP Communication .......................................................................................300
SNMP Web-Based Configuration ........................................................................................................... 301
SNMP Implementation ............................................................................................................................. 302
Load Monitor and Flexi Monitor Setup .........................................................................304
Load Monitor .............................................................................................................................................. 304
Flexi Monitor............................................................................................................................................... 310
Logical Groups (Boolean Algebra) .................................................................................315
Email (SMTP) Setup ...........................................................................................................318
3. Operation ......................................................................................................... 322
Using the Commands Buttons .......................................................................................322
System ........................................................................................................................................................ 322
Battery ........................................................................................................................................................ 323
Output Test ................................................................................................................................................ 324
Virtual Inputs ............................................................................................................................................. 325
Alarm Relay Test ...............................................................................................................334
Manual Battery Discharge Test .....................................................................................334
Downloading Logs .............................................................................................................335
Downloading Statistics ....................................................................................................339
7
Downloading and Uploading Configuration Files .......................................................340
Download Configuration Files ................................................................................................................ 340
Upload Configuration Files ..................................................................................................................... 344
4. Administration ................................................................................................. 346
Administering User Accounts ........................................................................................346
Change Controller Name .................................................................................................347
Find and Change the IP Address ....................................................................................348
Find the IP Address................................................................................................................................... 348
Change the IP Address ............................................................................................................................ 351
Trademark and Copyright Notices........................................................................ 353
Glossary................................................................................................................. 354
Acronyms .............................................................................................................. 359
Index ...................................................................................................................... 360
8
Comprehensive Overview
9
10
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
1. Guide Overview
This guide provides information and instructions for the Web Interface featured on
the following Eltek controllers:
•
Smartpack2
•
Smartpack S
•
Compack
Eltek controllers are designed for use with Eltek dc power systems only.
The topics covered in this guide include how to establish communication between
an Eltek controller and a computer, comprehensive descriptions of each page and
field of the web interface, and how to apply parameter settings through the web
interface.
NOTE: Screenshots for the web interface are taken from the Smartpack2 controller
(unless otherwise noted).
NOTE: For the Smartpack2 and Smartpack S controllers, setup and operational
functions can be performed through either the web interface or display panel. The
Compack controller does not have a display panel and therefore requires the use of
a computer and an Ethernet connection for the web interface in order to adjust
parameters.
Table 1.1 – Controller Documentation
Controller Unit
Document(s)
Eltek Controllers
Description of System Functionality – Smartpack2 Smartpack
Compack (350020.073)
(general documentation)
Configuration Guide – Smartpack2, Smartpack S, Compack
Controllers (370013.063)
Smartpack2
Navigation and Menu Tree – Smartpack2 Controller
(370017.033)
User’s Guide – Smartpack2 Basic Controller (350021.013)
User’s Guide – Smartpack2 Basic Industrial Controller
(350025.013)
User’s Guide – Smartpack2 Master Controller (350020.013)
Smartpack S
User Guide – Smartpack S Controller (350030.013)
Compack
User’s guide – Compack Monitoring and Control Unit
(350011.013)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Guide Ove
erview
11
Controlller Unit
Document((s)
CAN No
odes
Installation
n Guide – Batttery Monitor CAN Bus Node
(351507.03
33)
Installation
n Guide – IO M
Monitor2 CAN
N Node (3515
509.033)
Installation
n Guide – IO M
Monitor, CAN Nodes T1&T3 (351503.033)
Installation
n Guide – Load
d Monitor, CA
AN Bus Node
e (351506.033)
REVISIO
ON NOTE: This
T
guide was
w written
n using Sm
martpack2 c
controller s
software
revision
n 2.3. Menus and optio
ons may va
ary as laterr software revisions a
are release
ed.
Eltek
k Conttrollers
s with Web
W In
nterfac
ce
The follo
owing table lists the available Eltek
E
contr ollers thatt feature th
he web
interfac
ce.
Table 1..2 – Eltek Controllers witth Web Interfface
Image
Con
ntroller
Descripttion
Sm
martpack2
Master
The prim
mary interface
e and data ag
ggregation u
unit
for the S
Smartpack2 c
controller sys
stem; it conttains
the displlay interface, Ethernet po
ort (for web
interface
e), and SD card slot. The M
Master unit is
s
connecte
ed to Smartp
pack2 Basic o
or Smartpack
k2
Basic Ind
dustrial contrrollers and a variety of CA
AN
Nodes.
Smartpa
ack2 controlle
ers are integ
grated into largeand med
dium-sized Elttek power sy
ystems.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Sm
martpack S
Smartpa
ack S is prima
arily used witth Eltek Flatp
pack
S power systems. It c
contains a dis
splay interfa
ace
and Ethe
ernet port, ass well as alarrm input and
output t erminals.
Com
mpack
The sma
allest Eltek co
ontroller, use
ed primarily w
with
Micropac
ck power sysstems. It has no display
interface
e, so the web
b interface m
must be used to
configur e controller p
parameters. It does conta
ain
alarm inp
put and outp
put terminals.
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
12
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Web Interface Features
The Eltek Controller Web Interface features the following advantages:
•
Platform independence: The web interface operates in common computer
operating system platforms (like Windows®, Mac®, UNIX, etc.) that support
standard web browsers capable of running JavaScript.
NOTE: The web interface is fully tested using the latest versions of
Microsoft® Internet Explorer® and Mozilla® Firefox®. Limited tests are also
performed with Google Chrome™, Apple Safari®, and Opera™; but there is no
guarantee that full functionality is supported with these browsers.
•
No software installation required: Communication with the web interface is
facilitated by standard HTTP.
•
Field upgrades: Controller firmware can be upgraded over the network.
•
Simultaneous sessions: Multiple login sessions are supported, which can be
utilized for cooperative troubleshooting efforts, training purposes, or other
collaborative, multi-user sessions.
•
Security: Several group access levels are provided, restricting unauthorized
attempts to alter system settings.
•
Protected Operating Firmware: The operating firmware is executed from
RAM, so there is no file system to corrupt or damage. The controller’s RAM is
not accessible externally, which provides excellent security against malicious
attacks. In the event that the RAM is corrupted, a controller reboot loads a
fresh copy of the operating code.
•
Embedded SNMP Agent: Standard SNMP traps are provided upon
occurrences of alarm conditions; GET and SET operations are supported to
retrieve data and perform remote operations on the power plant. The MIB
files are provided with the controller’s firmware.
Functions Available Only Through the Web
Interface
The following functions are not available through the controller displays of the
Smartpack2 and Smartpack S controllers (the Compack controller does not have a
display); they can only be set and/or adjusted through the web interface:
•
DC Plant Information: Information regarding the dc system and installation
site details, including site name and location, power system model, and
installation and service dates.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Guide Overview
13
System Conf. > Power System > Power System > System Info
•
SNMP Configuration: Simple Network Management Protocol settings for
communication with a Network Management System (NMS) that uses SNMP
v1, v2c, or v3.
System Conf. > Device Settings > SNMP Settings
Controller Login and Access Levels
The controller web interface can be accessed through a network (e.g., a LAN),
through the Internet, or through direct Ethernet connection with a computer.
Figure 1.1 – Web Interface Login Page
•
LOGIN – link for a normal connection
•
Switch to SSL – link for a Secure Sockets Layer connection
Click on the Switch to SSL link if encrypted, secure communication is
required between the computer and controller.
NOTE: Due to strict security settings, some web browsers and local networks
may prohibit SSL connections that are missing valid certificates. If access is
blocked by the web browser, it may be possible to use an alternate web
browser that permits a temporary exception for each session. For example,
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
14
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Mozilla Firefox currently allows users to add a temporary exception when a
valid certificate is missing.
Table 1.3 – User Access Levels
#
User Name
Default
Password
Access Level
Notes
1
admin
admin
3 – admin
Administrator access, read-write
2
control
control
2 – control
Control (service) access, read-write
3
status
status
1 – status
Status (view) access, read-only
4
(configurable)
(configurable)
3 – admin or
2 – control or
1 – status
User defined
…
(configurable)
(configurable)
3 – admin or
2 – control or
1 – status
User defined
10
(configurable)
(configurable)
3 – admin or
2 – control or
1 – status
User defined
For security reasons, it is advisable to log in with the admin account and change the
default passwords. The maximum number of simultaneous logins for each user can
be changed, and additional user account types can be configured through the User
Accounts configuration page (System Conf. > Device Settings > User Accounts).
Up to ten different user accounts can be configured and assigned one of the three
access level options.
NOTE: Simultaneous login using one account is supported, but more logins reduce
bandwidth and slow down controller response.
Access levels define user permissions. There are three principal access levels:
•
Admin: Read-Write access. Administrator credentials allow changes to be
made to all system parameters and must be entered when logging in to the
web interface. The default credentials are:
User name: admin
Password: admin
NOTE: It is not advisable to make this access level widely available as critical
changes can be made, especially to user accounts and SNMP configuration.
The control access level is recommended for regular maintenance purposes.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Guide Ove
erview
•
15
Control:
C
Read-Write ac
ccess. Con
ntrol creden
ntials allow
w changes to be made to
most
m
system parametters but ex
xcludes som
me setting
gs and commands, such
as SNMP co
onfiguration
n, user acc
counts, and
d the “Delette Event Lo
og” comma
and.
The
T defaultt credentials are:
User
U
name: control
Password:
P
control
c
NOTE:
N
It is advisable to
t make th
his access llevel availa
able for reg
gular
maintenanc
m
ce, as it pre
events changes from being mad
de to critica
al features
s like
user accoun
nts and SN
NMP configu
uration.
•
Status:
S
Rea
ad-only acc
cess. Statu
us credentia
als permit viewing pa
arameter
settings butt prevent making
m
and
d saving ch
hanges. The default c
credentials
s are:
User
U
name: status
Password:
P
status
s
e-sensitive
NOTE:
N
User names and passwords are case
e.
When
W
logge
ed in, the ac
ccess level can be fo
ound in the bottom rig
ght corner of
th
he web interface pag
ges.
Figu
ure 1.2 – Acc
cess Level Ind
dicators (botttom right of web page)
CAUTIO
ON: For sec
curity reaso
ons, do nott leave you
ur compute
er unattend
ded after
logging in. When logging outt, make surre to close all browse
er windows
s that were
e
e web interface sessio
on.
opened during the
Requ
uireme
ents
NOTE: Adjusting
A
settings on the Compa
ack contro
oller require
es the use of a compu
uter
and an Ethernet
E
co
onnection. The Smarttpack2 and
d Smartpac
ck S contro
ollers can b
be
configured using either
e
the display
d
pan
nel or a con
nnection to
o a computter.
Make su
ure the Use
er Guides for the conttroller and power sysstem are on
n hand. If n
not,
please visit
v
the Elttek ShareF
File site (htttp://eltek.sharefile.c
com/) and d
download tthe
relevantt documen
nts.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
16
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Hardware
•
Computer with network card/adapter (Ethernet port, Ethernet port adapter,
or wireless card)
•
If working through a local or wide area network (LAN or WAN), the controller’s
Ethernet port must be connected to the network with an Ethernet cable
For a direct connection between a computer and an Eltek controller:
•
Computer with Ethernet port or Ethernet port adapter
•
Ethernet cable (either cross-over or straight-through)
Software
The following software is required to use the Web Interface:
•
One of the following web browsers:
o Internet Explorer® 9 or later
o Mozilla Firefox® 12 or later
NOTE: Internet Explorer 9 is not available for Windows XP. If the computer is
running Windows XP, then Mozilla Firefox 12 or later should be downloaded
and used to ensure full functionality of the web interface.
The web interface is fully tested using the latest versions of Microsoft®
Internet Explorer® and Mozilla® Firefox®. Limited tests are also performed
with Google Chrome™, Apple Safari®, and Opera™; but there is no guarantee
that full functionality is supported with these browsers.
•
The latest version of Oracle Java™ installed on the computer and enabled in
the web browser
•
IMPORTANT: The following Eltek applications/interfaces require the specified
communication ports to be available (i.e., not blocked by the local network
administration or IT group):
o Eltek Network Utility:
UPD port 20034
TCP port 80
o Web Interface:
TCP port 80
TCP port 443
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Guide Overview
17
Recommended
The following is recommended:
•
Eltek Network Utility (ENU): an Eltek program that locates Eltek controllers
located on a network and facilitates software updates.
NOTE: This utility is required for the procedure in the “Direct Connection with
the Controller” section, as it provides the easiest way to determine the IP
address of an Eltek controller.
o Requires Microsoft® Windows XP and later (e.g., Vista, 7, 8).
o This utility can be downloaded from the Internet at
http://msm.eltek.com/enu.
Optional
It may be advantageous in some cases to install the Eltek PowerSuite program on
the computer to be used. For example, if the computer is running Windows XP and it
is not possible to install one of the required web browsers, then PowerSuite is the
most convenient way to access and configure the controller through a computer.
•
PowerSuite
o Requires Microsoft® Windows XP and later (e.g., Vista, 7, 8).
o UDP port 4002 must be available
o PowerSuite is on the CD provided with the controller. It can also be
downloaded from Eltek's FTP site (ftp://ftp.eltek.com); please contact
Eltek for the current credentials.
NOTE: PowerSuite is not covered in this guide. If necessary, please
consult the documentation provided on the CD as well as the online help
file at http://onlinedocs.eltek.com/wip4/mywip/powersuite; please
contact Eltek for the current credentials.
Direct Connection with the Controller
Direct connection between the Eltek controller and a computer using an Ethernet
cable is the most reliable method for establishing a communication connection.
For controllers with a display (Smartpack2, Smartpack S), the controller’s IP address
can be found at the following location in the display menu:
Main Menu > Sys.Config. > PowerSystem > General System Config. >
Agent IP Address (four lines, one line per octet)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
18
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
SIMPLE METHOD: If the Eltek controlle
er’s IP addre
ess is know
wn, then th
he compute
er
can be connected
c
to the con
ntroller (via
a Ethernet cable) and
d the contro
oller IP add
dress
typed in
nto an Interrnet brows
ser address
s bar on the
e compute
er. This is th
he simplest
connecttion metho
od. If, howe
ever, the Web Interfac
ce login page does no
ot appear in
n
the brow
wser, then use the fo
ollowing pro
ocedure w ith the Elte
ek Network
k Utility (EN
NU)
to troub
bleshoot.
NOTE: This
T
proced
dure require
es installattion of the Eltek Netw
work Utility
y (ENU)
program
m in order to
t determin
ne the Eltek controlle
er’s IP addre
ess and to change it if
necessa
ary.
To establish a dire
ect connection with an
a Eltek con
ntroller:
1. Connect
C
an Ethernet cable
c
(eithe
er cross-ov
ver or straight-throug
gh) to the
controller and computter Etherne
et ports.
Fig
gure 1.3 – Co
ontroller Ethe
ernet Ports
2. Launch the Eltek Netw
work Utility
y (ENU) on tthe compu
uter.
Fig
gure 1.4 – Elttek Network Utility Icon
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Guide Ove
erview
19
3. After
A
the EN
NU program
m opens, cllick on the search button (magn
nifying glas
ss
ic
con) in the upper left corner to find
f
the co
ontroller. W
Wait for the window to
o
populate.
p
Figurre 1.5 – Eltek
k Network Uttility Window
w
4. Click
C
on the
e controllerr line to sellect it.
NOTE:
N
By de
efault, Elte
ek controlle
ers are ship
pped with a static IP a
address off
192.168.10
0.20.
5. Click
C
on the
e Web Interrface butto
on.
6. Does
D
the Lo
ogin page appear
a
in th
he web bro
owser? (See the follow
wing figure
e.)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
20
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Fig
gure 1.6 – We
eb Interface Login Page
Iff YES, then skip to ste
ep 20.
Iff NO, then the
t controller's IP add
dress mustt be changed to be clloser to the
e IP
address of the
t compu
uter. Contin
nue to the n
next step.
7. On
O the computer, laun
nch a Comm
mand Prom
mpt window
w. This can
n be done in
n
one of two ways:
w
Click
C
the Sttart button
n, choose Run,
R
type cm
md in the ttext field, a
and click th
he
OK
O button.
Click
C
the Sttart button
n, choose All
A Program
ms, select A
Accessorie
es, and then
n
select Command Prom
mpt.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Guide Ove
erview
21
Fig
gure 1.7 – Com
mmand Prom
mpt Window
8. At
A the comm
mand prom
mpt, type ip
pconfig and
d press [EN
NTER]. A se
eries of line
es
appears listting all of the TCP/IP identities o
of the com
mputer.
9. Find the hea
ading Ethe
ernet adaptter Local A
Area Conne
ection (or s
similar textt); it
may
m be necessary to scroll
s
upwa
ards in the command prompt window. Loc
cate
th
he IPv4 address line and
a write down
d
or co
opy the add
dress. It consists of fo
our
sets of num
mbers (or, octets)
o
separated by tthree perio
ods (in the form x.x.x
x.x).
This
T
address is needed
d in step 15.
10. Type
T
exit att the prompt to close
e the Comm
mand Prom
mpt window
w.
11. In
n the ENU program,
p
se
elect the controller
c
a
and click on
n the IP Config… buttton.
The
T Ip confiiguration window
w
app
pears.
12. Click
C
on the
e Clear IP button.
13. Make
M
sure the
t check box
b under DHCP
D
is NO
OT checked (empty).
14. Click
C
in the field underr IP Addres
ss until the box is high
hlighted an
nd a cursorr
appears.
15. Type
T
an add
dress that is close to the IP add
dress of the
e computer. The firstt
th
hree numb
bers (or octtets) should
d be exacttly the sam
me to ensurre that both
h
th
he computter and con
ntroller are on the sam
me networrk; the last number
(o
octet) shou
uld be diffe
erent by a few
f
digits.
FOR
F
EXAMP
PLE: If the computer’s
c
s IPv4 addrress is 192.168.1.30,, then use the
fiirst three numbers
n
(1
192.168.1) for the controller’s a
address. Fo
or the last
number, pic
ck somethin
ng close to
o the comp
puter's lastt address n
number, like
e 35.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
22
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
The
T resultin
ng IP address for the controller
c
iin this exam
mple will be
192.168.1.3
35.
NOTE:
N
If an invalid add
dress is enttered, the b
box showss a red outlline. Omit
le
eading zero
oes.
16. Click
C
the Su
ubmit butto
on. There may
m be a “c
click” from the contro
oller as it
re
eboots to apply
a
the new
n
IP addrress. Allow
w 30 second
ds for the c
controller tto
fiinish the re
eboot cycle
e.
17. Click
C
the Clo
ose button
n of the Ip configurat
c
tion window
w.
Fig
gure 1.8 – Ip Configuratio
on Window
18. After
A
the co
ontroller re
eboots, retu
urn to the main windo
ow of the E
ENU progra
am
and click the search button again. The con
ntroller app
pears in the
e list with tthe
new IP addrress.
19. Select
S
the controller
c
and
a click th
he Web Inte
erface buttton. The lo
ogin page
appears (as
s shown in Step
S
6).
20. Click
C
the LO
OGIN link.
NOTE:
N
If a secured
s
co
onnection is
s required, use the Sw
witch to SS
SL link insttead.
21. At
A the prom
mpt, type in
n the usern
name and p
password. T
The defaullts are:
Username:
U
admin
a
Password:
P
admin
a
NOTE:
N
The username
u
and
a passw
word are case-sensitiv
ve. If these
e credentials
do not work
k, then they
y have bee
en changed
d on site. C
Consult site
e personne
el
he current credentialls.
and/or site documenttation for th
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Guide Overview
23
Controller connection is now established. Make sure to logout from the controller
when you are finished.
NOTE: If the controller is to be connected to a local area network (LAN) after
configuration is complete, contact the local network administrator to determine if a
static IP address is to be assigned or if the IP address will be assigned dynamically
(DHCP). Use the "Ip configuration" window to set the controller IP configuration
according to the instructions from the network administrator. Refer to steps 11– 17
again if necessary.
RECOMMENDATION: If connecting the controller to a LAN after setup, make sure to
check connectivity through the network!
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
24
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
2. Web
W In
nterfa
ace Ov
vervie
ew
Upon su
uccessful lo
ogin, the home scree
en appears in the web
b browser. Along the top
of the page
p
are the category
y buttons, controller model nam
me, and the
e software and
revision
n numbers. In the botttom right corner
c
is th
he access le
evel. (See tthe following
figure.) These top and bottom informattion bars are presentt at all time
es in the we
eb
ce. The hom
me screen is
i discusse
ed in the se
ection “Hom
me”.
interfac
Figure 2.1 – Top an
nd Bottom Infformation Ba
ars
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Web Interrface Overvie
ew
25
Alarm
m Icons and Monito
M
ors
Alarm ic
cons appea
ar througho
out the web interface
e, indicating the statu
us of alarm
m
monitorrs. In every
y place whe
ere alarm ic
cons appea
ar (includin
ng the Even
nt Status
window
w and individ
dual alarm monitors) they use tthe same ic
cons to indicate statu
us,
as the following
f
ta
able explains:
Table 2.1 – Alarm Icon
n Table
Alarm Ic
con
Definittion
Normall
(no acttive alarms)
Major A
Alarm
Minor A
Alarm
Disable
ed
(alarm monitoring iss not enabled
d for this
parame
eter or input))
Alarm
m Mon
nitor Va
ariable
es and Brackets
Multiple
e alarm monitors with
h the same name can appear in the Web In
nterface fo
or
each Co
ontroller or CAN Node
e device; th
hey are disttinguished from each
h other by
sequenttial numera
als. In this guide, such alarm mo
onitors (witth numeric
c designatio
ons)
are writtten with va
ariables. For example
e:
SP2 Bas
sicInd X
ProgInp
put X.Y
ProgInp
put XX.Y
The X and Y are va
ariables sta
anding in fo
or numeralls. Here is what they
y indicate:
N Node or Controller
C
number
n
ass
signed to d
distinguish multiple devices of tthe
X = CAN
same ty
ype that are connecte
ed to the CAN
C
bus. E
Each param
meter with tthis variable
has the same valu
ue as that assigned
a
th
he CAN Node or Conttroller that it belongs to.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
26
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
X.Y = Inp
put terminal designattion, where
e X is the n
number of tthe CAN No
ode or
Controlller, and Y is
s the inputt terminal on
o the deviice
XX.Y = Input termiinal designation for I/
/O Monitorss, where XX
X is the CA
AN
cation num
mber of the I/O Monito
or, and Y is the input tterminal on
n the devic
ce
identific
NOTE: Alarm
A
mon
nitors betw
ween bracke
ets indicatte that they
y only appe
ear when tthe
associatted device
e or input is
s connected to the sy
ystem. Forr example:
[Solar Charger]
C
– only
o
appea
ars if solar chargers
c
a
are presentt in the sys
stem
[DCDC CurMon
C
X] – only app
pears if a Lo
oad Monito
or is assigned to meas
sure curren
nt
from dc
c-to-dc converters
Cate
egory Button
B
ns
The category butttons are loc
cated at th
he top and left of the
e web interfface.
Fig
gure 2.2 – Ca
ategory Butttons (Icons)
The table below describes th
he pages or
o actions tthat each b
button reprresents.
Table 2.2 – Description of Cate
egory Button
ns
Icon
Catego
ory
Descripttion
Home
This secttion is read-o
only. It is the home page, which contains
the systtem overview
w window and
d status notiffications. Rollling
over and
d clicking the
e various icon
ns and boxes provides mo
ore
detailed system info rmation.
System
m
Configu
uration
NOTE: This section iss password-p
protected and
d should only
y be
used by System Adm
ministrators
Use this section to in
nterrogate th
he system, m
make changes
s, or
reprogra
am the syste m parameters. Administrrators can
program
m basic system
m parameterrs, network c
configuration
n,
system voltages,
v
sysstem calibrattions, genera
ators, rectifie
ers,
solar cha
argers, dc-dc
c converters, batteries, ba
attery test,
battery boost,
b
and ba
attery symm
metry configu
urations.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Web Interrface Overvie
ew
Icon
27
Catego
ory
Descripttion
Alarm Configuration
C
n
NOTE: This section iss password-p
protected and
d should only
y be
used by System Adm
ministrators
Use this section to co
onfigure systtem low-volttage disconnect
(LVD) devices and sy
ystem alarm ttables, create/delete and
d
enable/d
disable alarm
ms and alarm groups, enab
ble/disable
system inputs
i
and ou
utputs, progrram alarms a
and alarm
severity levels for AC
C mains, gene
erator, rectiffiers, solar
chargers
s, dc-dc conv
verters, loadss, batteries, inputs/outpu
uts,
and the control syste
em.
Logs
This secttion is read-o
only. Use thiss section to v
view and save
logs abo
out active ala
arms, system
m events, volttage, loads,
batteries
s, and batterry test resultts. Logs can b
be saved to a
compute
er.
Comma
ands
NOTE: This section iss password-p
protected and
d should only
y be
used by System Adm
ministrators
Use this section to ex
xecute comm
mands to sta
art and stop
specific functions of the power sy
ystem. Comm
mands includ
de
resetting
g alarms, sta
arting/stopping battery te
ests,
starting/
/stopping ba
attery boost, resetting sy
ystem
configuration, and ex
xecuting rela
ay tests; load
ding and savin
ng
configuration files arre also perforrmed in this c
category
Statistics
This secttion is read-o
only. It displays daily and monthly ene
ergy
statistics for the high
hest, lowest,, and average
e values.
Help
This buttton launchess the online h
help file syste
em, which is
passworrd-protected . Please con tact Eltek fo
or current
credentials.
Logoutt
This buttton logs out of the web in
nterface, end
ding the current
session.
The follo
owing secttions descrribe each category
c
in detail.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
28
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
3. Home
H
After su
uccessful lo
ogin, the Home
H
page of the web
b interface
e appears. IIt can also be
accesse
ed at any time by clicking on the
e Home bu
utton in the
e top menu
u of catego
ory
buttons
s.
Figure 3..1 – Home Bu
utton
Figure 3.2 – Home Screen
S
Pane
es and Featurres
Systtem Ov
verview
w Wind
dow
The Sys
stem Overv
view Windo
ow provides
s summary
y and statu
us informattion for crittical
system parameters and com
mponents. The
T panes and buttons in this w
window can
n be
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Home
29
clicked with the mouse for more information. In addition, the square buttons in this
window provide a dynamic status box when rolled over with the mouse cursor.
Figure 3.3 – Status Box on Mouse Roll Over (Example: Battery Status)
NOTE: The Power System Readings area on the far right of the System Overview
Window is not interactive; there are no panes or buttons to click.
NOTE: The parameters listed in the summary windows (which appear when the
component buttons are clicked) represent the status of alarms rather than realtime readings.
NOTE: The alarm monitors in the summary windows are configured in the Alarm
Configuration section and show the current status and measured readings of each
parameter. This means that if the description (or name) of the alarm or parameter is
changed in the Alarm Configuration section, the description also changes in the
summary windows and anywhere else it appears in the web interface.
Along the top of the System Overview window are the Site name (if applied) and
Site Time (far right).
System Status and Operational Mode
Figure 3.4 – Event Status and System Mode
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
30
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
•
Event Status indicates whether there is an alarm condition or not. Possible
status messages are: Normal, Major Alarm, and Minor Alarm
•
System Mode indicates the operational mode of the controllers, especially as
related to batteries. The system modes are: Float (normal operation), Test
(batteries are being tested), Boost (battery voltage is being boosted), and
Critical (conditions may open an LVD).
Clicking on the System Status and Operational Mode pane with the mouse
brings up the Active Alarm Overview window. The following lists appear:
o Active Alarm(s) – If one or more alarms are active, then this section lists
the individual alarms. If the “Active Alarms Groups” list is visible, then it is
necessary to click on the “Active Alarm(s)” header bar to see the active
alarms list.
Figure 3.5 – Active Alarm Overview with an Active Alarm
NOTE: Most lists in the web interface are only visible one at a time. It is
necessary to click on each list’s header bar to view it.
NOTE: If there are no active alarms, then the “Active Alarm(s)” list is
empty.
o Active Alarm Groups –This section lists alarm groups. If the Active
Alarm(s) list is visible, then it is necessary to click on the Active Alarm
Groups header bar to see the active alarms list.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Home
31
Figure 3.6 – Active Alarm Groups List
Power System Components, Controller Nodes, and
Inputs
The major portion of the System Overview Window features a diagram of the
system component, controller nodes, and inputs detected by the control and
monitoring system.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
32
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 3.7 – Example of Power Sy
ystem Overviiew (System
m with Solar In
nput)
The follo
owing table explains each symb
bol that ca
an appear in
n the Syste
em Overvie
ew
diagram
m:
Table 3.1 – Power System Ove rview Symbo
ols
Symbol
Compon
nent
Definition
Mains Sttatus
Status of ac
c input feedss (“mains”)
Generattor Status
Status of ac
c generator
Rectifierr Status
Status of sy
ystem rectifiiers
Solar Sttatus
Status of so
olar output (v
voltage reading only)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Home
Symbol
33
Compon
nent
Definition
Wind Ge
enerator Stattus
Status of w
wind turbine o
output (voltage reading only)
Fuel Cell Status
Status of fu
uel cell outpu
ut (voltage re
eading only)
DC-DC Converter
C
/ Solar
S
Chargerr / Wind Charg
ger / Fuel
Cell Cha
arger Status
Status of dc
c-dc convertters or charge
ers (solar, wind,
and/or fuel cell)
Load Sta
atus
Status of sy
ystem loads
Battery Status
Status of sy
ystem batterries
Control System
Status of co
ontrollers and CAN Nodes
s
Outdoorr Inputs
Status of m
monitoring inp
puts from outtdoor cabine
ets
(principally fans and tem
mperature)
System Inputs
Status of prrogrammable
e monitoring inputs like
alarms and temperature
e
Power System
m Components (AC serv
vice, rec
ctifiers, loads,
batteries)
Alert sy
ymbols app
pear in a corner of the
e button if tthere is an
n alarm or n
notice thatt
affects the compo
onent. This
s is especia
ally useful ffor trouble
eshooting a
alarms.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
34
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 3.8 – Minor Alarm
m Notices
m Notices
Figure 3.9 – Major Alarm
Mains Status
The Maiins Status button sho
ows the sttatus of the
e AC input feed(s).
Mains alarm monittors locatio
on:
Alarm
A
Conff. > Powerr System > Mains
Clicking
g on the Ma
ains button
n brings up the Mains Summary window.
The follo
owing figure shows the
t Mains summary
s
w
window witthout group
ps:
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Home
35
Figure 3.10 – Mains Summary Window (without groups)
•
Mains summary – summary of generator alarm monitors
WITHOUT GROUPS – ALARM MONITORS THAT APPEAR WHEN THERE ARE NO
SMARTPACK2 BASIC INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS PRESENT
o Mains – lists of ac mains group parameters
■ MainsVolt X – voltage reading for the ac input feed
NOTE: The number of MainsVolt monitors is dependent on how many
phases are specified at System Conf. > Power System > Mains >
(Mains Configuration) Number of Phases
■ MainsLow – indicates a low voltage ac mains alarm
■ Number of Phases – The number of ac phases on the incoming ac
mains lines
The following table lists the Mains alarm monitors (without groups):
Table 3.2 – Mains Alarm Monitors (without groups)
Menu
Mains
Sub-Menu
(if applicable)
Alarm Monitor
Units Type
Alarm Type(s)
MainsVolt X
Volts (ac)
Major High
Minor High
Major Low
Minor Low
MainsLow
Yes/No
Major
Minor
Number of Phases
Doc. No. 370035.013
Sum
N/A
Issue 1, April 2014
36
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
WITH GROUPS – ALARM SECTIONS AND MONITORS THAT APPEAR WHEN
ONE OR MORE SMARTPACK2 BASIC INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS ARE
PRESENT AND CONNECTED TO RECTIFIERS
o Mains – lists of ac mains group parameters (Smartpack2 Basic Industrial
controller only)
The following figure shows the Mains monitors page with groups:
Figure 3.11 – Mains Summary Window (with groups)
■ MainsGrpInMajor – Mains Group In Major, which indicates if the mains
group is in Major Alarm status
■ MainsGrpInMinor – Mains Group In Minor, which indicates if the mains
group is in Minor Alarm status
■ Number of Mains Groups – the number of ac mains groups present
(Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controller only)
o Mains Groups – lists of voltage parameter readings per ac mains group
(Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controller only)
The following figure shows the Mains Group monitors page:
Figure 3.12 – Mains Groups List
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Home
37
■ MainsVolt X.Y – Voltage reading for each ac input feed and line.
NOTE: The number of MainsVolt monitors is dependent on how many
phases are specified at System Conf. > Power System > Mains >
(Mains Configuration) Number of Phases
■ MainsLow X – monitor for defining major and minor alarms for low ac
input (mains) voltage (from MainsVolt X.Y)
■ Number of Phases – The number of ac phases on the incoming mains
lines
The following table lists the Mains alarm monitors (with groups):
Table 3.3 - Mains Alarm Monitors (with groups)
Menu
Sub-Menu
(if applicable)
Mains Summary
Alarm Monitor
Units Type
Alarm Type(s)
MainsGrpInMajor
Yes/No
Major
Minor
MainsGrpInMinor
Yes/No
Major
Minor
Mains Groups
Mains Group X
Number of Mains
Groups
Sum
N/A
MainsVolt X.Y
Volts (ac)
Major High
Minor High
Major Low
Minor Low
MainsLow X
Yes/No
Major
Minor
Number of Phases
Doc. No. 370035.013
Sum
N/A
Issue 1, April 2014
38
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Genera
ator Stattus
The Gen
nerator Sta
atus button shows th
he status o
of the gene
erator(s), iff applicable
e.
Generattor alarm monitors
m
loc
cation:
Alarm
A
Conff. > Powerr System > Generato
or
Clicking
g on the Generator bu
utton bring
gs up the Generator S
Summary w
window.
The follo
owing figure shows the
t Genera
ator monito
ors page:
Figu
ure 3.13 – Ge
enerator Alarrm Summary
y
•
Generator
G
summary
s
– summary of generattor alarm m
monitors
o Generattor Status – status off generatorr alarms
■ Gene
eratorFail – monitors ac input w
when the co
ontroller se
ends a
Gene
erator Activ
vation sign
nal; this mo
onitor send
ds an alarm
m if the
Gene
erator Activ
vation sign
nal is ON an
nd there is no ac inpu
ut, indicatin
ng
that the
t genera
ator is not delivering
d
a
ac input po
ower to the
e system.
■ Gene
erator Activ
vation – indicates wh
hether the signal to a
activate the
generator is ON
N or OFF.
o Discharg
ge Status – status off battery diischarge
■ Disch
harge value
e (%) – esttimated battery disch
harge percentage bas
sed
on th
he last mea
asured batttery cycle. A depth-o
of-discharg
ge (DoD)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Home
39
percentage value can be set as one of the conditions to start the
generator.
System Conf. > Power System > Generator > Capacity
o Timer Status – alarm monitors for the generator timer
■ Mains not present – time (in minutes) that should elapse after an ac
mains outage before the generator is signaled by the controller to turn
on.
■ Charge time – time (in minutes) that the generator ran during the last
measured battery cycle
o Tank X – fuel tank parameters (maximum of two tanks)
■ Fuel Status – indicates if the remaining fuel has dropped below a userdefined threshold.
Alarm Conf. > Power System > Generator > FuelRemaining X
NOTE: Fuel Status is configured under the FuelRemaining X alarm
monitor on the Alarm Configuration page. The FuelRemaining X line
of the Generator Status window shows the amount of fuel
measured.
■ FuelRemaining X – real-time measurement of the amount of fuel
remaining in the generator fuel tank (units are user-defined)
The following table lists the Generator alarm monitors:
Table 3.4 – Generator Alarm Monitors
Menu
Alarm Monitor
Units Type
Alarm Type(s)
GeneratorFail
N/A
Configurable
Generator
Activation
ON/OFF
N/A
Discharge Status
Discharge value (%)
Percentage
N/A
Timer Status
Mains not present
(min)
Minutes
N/A
Charge time (min)
Minutes
N/A
Generator
Status
Doc. No. 370035.013
Sub-Menu
(if applicable)
Issue 1, April 2014
40
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Menu
Sub-Menu
S
(if
( applicable
e)
Tank X
Alarm
m Monitor
Units Ty
ype
A
Alarm Type(s
s)
Fuel Status
S
(Liquid V
Volume
Units – U
User
Defined))
M
Major High
M
Minor High
M
Major Low
M
Minor Low
FuelR
Remaining X
(Liquid V
Volume
Units – U
User
Defined))
N
N/A
Rectifiier Status
s
The Rec
ctifier Stattus button shows the
e status of the rectifiers and tottal output
current..
Rectifiers alarm monitors
m
loc
cation:
Alarm
A
Conff. > Powerr System > Rectifierss
Clicking
g on the Rec
ctifier buttton brings up the Rec
ctifier Sum
mmary wind
dow.
The follo
owing figure shows the
t Rectifie
er – Summa
ary page (w
without gro
oups):
Figure 3..14 – Rectifie
er Summary (without gro
oups)
•
Rectifier
R
su
ummary – summary
s
of
o rectifier a
alarm para
ameters
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Home
41
WITHOUT GROUPS – alarm monitors that appear when there are no
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers present
The following figure shows the Rectifier – Inventory page (without groups):
Figure 3.15 – Rectifier Inventory (without groups)
o RectifierCurrent – indicates if the sum of all rectifier output current
exceeds a predetermined current value
o RectifierError – indicates if an alarm is present in a rectifier; if so, then the
number of affected rectifiers is indicated under the Value column
o RectLowMains – indicates if there are any rectifiers experiencing low ac
input
o RectCommError – indicates if there is a communication error (or failure)
with one or more rectifiers; if so, then the number of affected rectifiers is
indicated under the Value column
o Rect.Capacity – indicates whether or not rectifiers are operating within a
specified percentage of their output capacity
o RectCurrShareErr – indicates if rectifiers are deviating beyond a defined
percentage from the mean rectifier output current
o RectifierTemp – indicates if rectifiers are operating below a defined
temperature value
o Rectifiers Installed – indicates how many rectifiers are installed
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
42
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
The following table lists the Rectifier alarm monitors (without groups):
Table 3.5 – Rectifier Alarm Monitors (without groups)
Menu
Sub-Menu
(if applicable)
Alarm Monitor
Units Type
Alarm Type(s)
Rectifier Group
X
Summary
RectifierCurrent
Amps
Major
Minor
RectifierError
Sum
Major
Minor
RectLowMains
Sum
Major
Minor
RectCommErr
Sum
Major
Minor
Rect.Capacity
Percentage
Major
Minor
RectCurrShareErr
Percentage
Major
Minor
Rectifier Temp
Degrees
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Rectifier
Inventory
Rectifiers Installed
Sum
N/A
(List of Rectifiers)
N/A
N/A
WITH GROUPS – alarm sections and monitors that appear when one or more
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers are present and connected to
rectifiers
o Rectifier – list of overall rectifier alarm parameters
The following figure shows the Rectifier monitors page (with groups):
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Home
43
Figure 3.16 – Rectifier Summary (with groups)
■ TotRectCurrent – Total rectifier current, which indicates if the sum of
all rectifier output current exceeds a predetermined current value.
■ RectGrpErr – Rectifier Group Error, which indicates if an alarm is
present in a rectifier group; if so, then the number of affected
rectifiers is indicated under the Value column.
■ RectGroupInMinor – Indicates if a rectifier group has a minor alarm; if
so, then the number of affected rectifiers is indicated under the
“Value” column.
■ RectGrpCommErr – Rectifier Group Communication Error, indicates if
there is a communication error (or failure) within a rectifier group; if so,
then the number of affected rectifiers is indicated under the Value
column.
■ RectCurrShareErr – Rectifier Current Share Error, indicates if rectifiers
are deviating beyond a defined percentage from the mean rectifier
output current.
■ TotRectCapacity – Total Rectifier Capacity, indicates if rectifiers are
operating within a specified percentage of their output capacity.
■ RectifierTemp – Rectifier Temperature, indicates if rectifiers are
operating below a defined temperature value.
■ Rectifier Groups Installed – Indicates the total number of Smartpack2
Basic Industrial controllers with rectifiers connected.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
44
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
■ Total Number of Rectifiers – Indicates the total number of rectifiers
installed in the power system and communicating with the controller.
o Rect.Group X – details for each rectifier group
The following figure shows the Rectifier Group - Summary monitors page
(with groups):
Figure 3.17 – Rectifier Group Summary
■ Summary – list of rectifier parameters for the rectifier group:
□ RectCurrGrp. X – Rectifier Current Group, indicates if the total
rectifier output of the group is below a defined current value.
□ RectErrGrp. X – Rectifier Error Group, indicates if there are any
rectifier alarms in the group.
□ RectComErrGrp. X – Rectifier Communication Error Group, indicates
if there are any rectifiers in the group that have stopped
communicating with the controller.
□ RectTempGrp. X – Rectifier Temperature Group, indicates if
rectifiers are operating below a defined temperature value.
□ CurrShareErr X – Current Share Error, indicates if rectifiers in the
group are deviating beyond a defined percentage from the mean
rectifier output current.
□ RecLoMainsGrp. X – Rectifier Low Mains Group, indicates if there
are any rectifiers experiencing low ac input.
□ Rectifier Installed in Group – Indicates how many rectifiers are in
the rectifier group.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Home
45
■ Rectifier Inventory – inventory list of rectifiers assigned to the
rectifier group.
The following figure shows the Rectifier Group - Inventory monitors
page (with groups):
Figure 3.18 – Rectifier Group Inventory
NOTE: The button “Start Reading Data” must be clicked in order to
populate the list.
The following table lists the Rectifier alarm monitors (with groups):
Table 3.6 - Rectifier Alarm Monitors (with groups)
Menu
Rectifier
Sub-Menu
(if applicable)
Alarm Monitor
Units Type
Alarm Type(s)
TotRectCurrent
Amps
Major
Minor
RectGrpErr
Sum
Major
Minor
RectGroupInMinor
Sum
Major
Minor
RectGrpCommErr
Sum
Major
Minor
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
46
Menu
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Sub-Menu
(if applicable)
Alarm Monitor
Units Type
Alarm Type(s)
TotRectCapacity
Percentage
Major
Minor
RectifierTemp
Degrees
Major High
Minor High
Major Low
Minor Low
Rectifier Group
X
Summary
Rectifier Groups
Installed
Sum
N/A
Total Number of
Rectifiers
Sum
N/A
RectCurrGrp. X
Amps
Major
Minor
RectErrGrp. X
Sum
Major
Minor
RecLoMainsGrp.X
Sum
Major
Minor
RectComErrGrp.X
Sum
Major
Minor
CurrShareErr X
Percentage
Major
Minor
RectTempGrp. X
Degrees
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Rectifier
Inventory
Doc. No. 370035.013
Rectifiers Installed in
Group
Sum
N/A
(List of Rectifiers)
N/A
N/A
Issue 1, April 2014
Home
47
Solar Status
S
The Sola
ar Status button
b
sho
ows the sta
atus of sola
ar array ou
utput, which shows
voltage on mouse rollover on
nly; there is
s no summ
mary window
w for this b
button.
S
statu
us only app
pears if sola
ar chargerss and/or so
olar monito
oring inputs
NOTE: Solar
are conn
nected to the
t power system.
Solar ch
harger alarm
m monitors
s location:
Alarm
A
Conff. > Powerr System > Solar Cha
arger
Clicking
g on the con
nnected Co
onverter button bring
gs up the S
Solar Charg
ger Summa
ary
window
w.
The follo
owing figure shows the
t Solar Charger – Summary m
monitors pa
age:
Figure 3.19 – Solar Charger Sum
mmary Window
•
Solar
S
Charg
ger Status – status off solar chargers
o Summarry – list of solar
s
monittors for sollar chargerr input
■ Solarr Current – indicates if there is a high amo
ount of sola
ar current
■ SolarrChargerErrr – indicate
es if there is an alarm
m on any so
olar charge
er
modu
ule
■ SolarrCommErr – indicates
s if there iss a commun
nication error with on
ne or
more
e solar charrgers
■ Solarr Chargers Installed – total of solar charge
ers installe
ed in the po
ower
syste
em
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
48
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
o Inventorry – lists th
he solar cha
argers and
d informatio
on about e
each modulle
o Solar Cu
urMon X – see
s section
n Load Mon
nitors
o Solar Fle
exMon X – see sectio
on Flexi Mon
nitors
owing table lists the Solar Charrger alarm m
The follo
monitors:
Tablle 3.7 – Solarr Charger Ala
arm Monitorss
Menu
Sub-Menu
S
(iif applicable)
Alarm Monitor
Units T
Type
A
Alarm Type((s)
Solar Ch
harger
Summary
S
SolarC
Current
Amps
Major
Minor
SolarC
ChargerErr
Sum
Major
Minor
SolarC
CommErr
Sum
Major
Minor
In
nventory
Solar Chargers
C
Installed
Sum
N/A
(List off Solar
Charge
ers)
N/A
N/A
Wind Status
S
The Win
nd Status button
b
shows the sta
atus of wind turbine o
output, which shows
voltage on mouse rollover on
nly; there is
s no summ
mary window
w for this b
button.
W
statu
us only app
pears if wind chargerss and/or wiind monito
oring inputs
s are
NOTE: Wind
connectted to the power systtem.
Wind ch
harger alarm
m monitors
s location:
Alarm
A
Conff. > Powerr System > Wind Cha
arger
Clicking
g on the con
nnected Co
onverter button bring
gs up the W
Wind Charg
ger Summa
ary
window
w.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Home
49
The follo
owing figure shows the
t Wind Ch
harger – Su
ummary m
monitors page:
Figure 3.20 – Wind Charger Sum
mmary Windo
ow
•
Wind
W
Charg
ger Status – status off wind charrgers
o Wind Charger – me
enu for win
nd charger monitors
■ Summ
mary – sub
b-menu for wind charg
ger input
□ WindCurrent
W
t – alarm monitor
m
for current fro
om the win
nd chargers
s
□ WindError
W
– alarm mon
nitor for de
etecting the
e number o
of wind
ch
hargers exp
periencing an error
□ WindCommE
W
Error – alarrm monitorr for detectting the nu
umber of w
wind
ch
hargers exp
periencing communic
cation errors
□ Co
onverters Installed – count of tthe numbe
er of wind c
chargers
installed
■ Inven
ntory – lists the wind chargers a
and information abou
ut each mo
odule
o Wind CurMon X – see
s section
n Load Mon
nitors
o Wind Fle
exMon X – see section Flexi Mon
nitors
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
50
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
The follo
owing table lists the Wind Charg
ger alarm m
monitors:
Tablle 3.8 - Wind Charger Ala
arm Monitorss
Menu
Sub-Menu
S
(iif applicable)
Alarm Monitor
Units T
Type
A
Alarm Type((s)
Wind Ch
harger
Summary
S
WindCurrent
Amps
Major
Minor
WindError
Sum
Major
Minor
WindCommError
Sum
Major
Minor
In
nventory
Conve
erters Installe
ed
Sum
N/A
(List)
N/A
N/A
Fuel Ce
ell Status
s
The Fue
el Status button show
ws the stattus of hydrrogen fuel cells outpu
ut, which
shows voltage
v
on mouse rolllover only; there is no
o summary
y window fo
or this buttton.
Fuel cell charger alarm
a
monittors locatio
on:
Alarm
A
Conff. > Powerr System > FuelCell C
Charger
NOTE: Fuel
F
Cell sttatus only appears if fuel cell ch
hargers and
d/or monittoring inputts
are conn
nected to the
t power system.
Clicking
g on the con
nnected Co
onverter button bring
gs up the F
Fuel Cell Charger
Summary window.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Home
51
The follo
owing figure shows the
t Fuel Ce
ell Chargerr – Summarry monitors
s page:
Figure 3.21 – Fuel Ce
ell Charger S
Summary Win
ndow
•
Fuel
F
Cell Ch
harger Sum
mmary – status windo
ow for fuell cell charger alarms
o FuelCelll Charger – menu for fuel cell ch
harger alarm monitors
s
■ Summ
mary – sub
b-menu for fuel cell ch
harger inpu
ut
□ Fu
uelCellCurrrent – alarm
m monitor for current from fuell cell charg
gers
□ Fu
uelCellErro
or – alarm monitor
m
forr detecting
g the numb
ber of fuel c
cell
ch
hargers exp
periencing errors
□ Fu
uelCellCom
mmErr – ala
arm monito
or for detec
cting the n
number of ffuel
ce
ell chargers
s experienc
cing comm
munication e
errors
□ Fu
uelCellCap
pacity – ala
arm monito
or for maxim
mum capac
city of fuell cell
ch
hargers
□ Co
onverters Installed – count of tthe numbe
er of fuel ce
ell chargers
s
installed
■ Inven
ntory – lists the fuel cell
c charge
ers and info
ormation about each
modu
ule
o FuelC Cu
urMon X – see section Load Mon
nitors
o FuelC FlexMon X – see sectio
on Flexi Mo
onitors
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
52
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
The follo
owing table lists the Fuel Cell Charger
C
alarm monitors:
Ta
able 3.9 – Fuel Cell Alarm
m Monitors
Menu
Sub-Menu
S
(iif applicable)
Alarm Monitor
Units T
Type
A
Alarm Type((s)
FuelCelll
Convertter
Summary
S
FuelCe
ellCurrent
Amps
Major
Minor
FuelCe
ellError
Sum
Major
Minor
FuelCe
ellCommErr
Sum
Major
Minor
FuelCe
ellCapacity
Percenttage
Major
Minor
In
nventory
Conve
erters Installe
ed
Sum
N/A
(List)
N/A
N/A
DC-to--DC Conve
erter Sta
atus
The DCD
DC Converter button shows information o
on dc-to-dc
c converterrs.
NOTE: The
T dc-to-d
dc convertter button appears
a
on
n the right side of the
e Power
System
m Overview diagram since dc-to--dc convertters feed loads that are separa
ate
from the
e loads fed
d by rectifie
ers.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Home
53
Figure 3.22 – Location of Dc-to-Dc
D
Con
nverter Stattus Button
Dc-to-dc
c converte
er alarm mo
onitors loca
ation:
Alarm
A
Conff. > Powerr System > DcDc Con
nverter
Clicking
g on the DC
CDC Converrter button
n brings up
p the DCDC
C Converter Summary
y
window
w.
•
DCDC
D
Converter Summary – sta
atus window
w for dc-to
o-dc converter alarms
s
o DcDc Co
onverter – menu
m
for dc-to-dc
d
co
onverter ala
arms
■ Summ
mary – sub
b-menu for dc-to-dc c
converter a
alarm monittors
The following
f
figure show
ws the DCDC
C Converte
er – Summ
mary monito
ors
page:
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
54
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 3.23 – Dc-to-dc Converter Summary Window
□ DcDcCurrent – alarm monitor for current from dc-to-dc converters
□ DcDcError – alarm monitor for detecting the number of dc-to-dc
converters experiencing an error
□ DcDcCommError – alarm monitor for detecting the number dc-to-dc
converters experiencing communication errors
□ DcDcCapacity – alarm monitor for the maximum capacity of the dcto-dc converters
□ DcDcTemp – alarm monitor for high and low temperature
thresholds for the dc-to-dc converters
□ Converters Installed – count of the number of dc-to-dc converters
installed
■ Inventory – lists the dc-to-dc converters and information about each
module
The following figure shows the DCDC Converter – Inventory monitors
page:
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Home
55
Figure 3.24 – Dc-tto-dc Converrter Inventorry
o DCDC Cu
urMon X – see
s section
n Load Mon
nitors
o DCDC FlexMon X – see sectio
on Flexi Mo
onitors
The follo
owing table lists the Dc-to-dc Converter
C
a
alarm monitors:
Table 3..10 – Dc-to-d
dc Converterr Alarm Monittors
Menu
Sub-Menu
S
(iif applicable)
Alarm Monitor
Units T
Type
A
Alarm Type((s)
DcDc Co
onverter
Summary
S
DcDcC
Current
Amps
Major
Minor
DcDcE
Error
Sum
Major
Minor
DcDcC
CommErr
Sum
Major
Minor
DcDcC
Capacity
Percenttage
Major
Minor
DcDcT
Temp
Degree
es
Major
Minor
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
56
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Menu
Sub-Menu
S
(iif applicable)
In
nventory
Alarm Monitor
Units T
Type
A
Alarm Type((s)
Conve
erters Installe
ed
Sum
N/A
(List)
N/A
N/A
Load Status
S
The Loa
ad Status button(s)
b
show the sttatus of loa
ad alarms, load current, fuses
and/or circuit
c
brea
akers, and low-voltag
ge disconne
ects (LVDss).
Load ala
arm monito
ors location
n:
Alarm
A
Conff. > Powerr System > Load
Clicking
g on the Loa
ad Status button
b
brin
ngs up the Load Summary wind
dow.
The follo
owing figure shows the
t Load monitors
m
pag
ge:
Fig
gure 3.25 – Load
L
Summa ry Window
•
Load Summ
mary – statu
us window
w of load ala
arms
o Load – List of load alarm mon
nitors
■ LoadCurrent – Indicates
I
whether
w
loa
ad current is below th
he current
level defined in the Alarm Configurattion.
■ Numb
ber of Load
d Groups – Indicates the numbe
er of dc loa
ad groups
monittored by th
he power system,
s
int ended to represent tthe number of
contrrollers mon
nitoring distinct group
ps (or bayss) of loads. The numb
ber
of loa
ad groups must
m
be se
et manually
y under Sysstem Conffiguration
(Systtem Conf. > Power System
S
> LLoad > Con
nfiguratio
on)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Home
57
■ Fuse Status – In
ndicates th
he status o
of the load fuse(s) and/or circuit
break
ker(s) in the
e dc load group
g
circu it(s)
■ LVLD
D Status – Indicates th
he status o
of a load LV
VD, if one is installed or
active
o LoadGro
oup X – Loa
ad monitor group for E
Eltek contrrollers (one
e group perr
controlle
er)
The follo
owing figurre shows th
he Load Grroup monitors page:
Figure
e 3.26 – Load
d Group Sum
mmary Window
■ LoadCurr grp. X – Load Cu
urrent Grou
up, indicate
es if the tottal load
ent drawn by
b the load
d group is b
below a deffined curre
ent value.
curre
■ LoadCurrentX.Y
Y – Indicate
es if the loa
ad currentt through a specific
monittoring inpu
ut is below a defined c
current vallue.
■ LoadFuse X – In
ndicates wh
hether the
e fuse or cirrcuit break
ker for the lload
group
p is open.
■ Drop diode X.Y – Indicates
s whether a drop diod
de is functioning prop
perly
(drop
pping voltag
ge to the required lev
vel)
o LoadPrim
mary X – se
ee section Load Moniitors
o Load CurMon X – see
s section
n Load Mon
nitors
o Load Fle
exiMon X – see sectio
on Flexi Monitors
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
58
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
The following table lists the Load alarm monitors:
Table 3.11 - Load Alarm Monitors
Menu
Sub-Menu
(if applicable)
Load Summary
Alarm Monitor
Units Type
Alarm Type(s)
LoadCurrent
Amp
Major
Minor
Load Group X
Number of Load
Groups
Sum
N/A
Fuse Status
Yes/No
N/A
LVLD Status
Yes/No
N/A
LoadCurrGrp. X
Amp
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
LoadCurrent X.Y
Amp
Major High
Minor High
Error
LoadFuse X
Yes/No
Configurable
Drop diode X.Y
Yes/No
Minor High
Battery Status
The Battery Status button shows the status of battery alarms, battery voltage,
battery current, and whether current limit and temperature compensation are
enabled or disabled.
Battery alarm monitors location:
Alarm Conf. > Power System > Battery
Clicking on the Battery Status button brings up the Battery Summary window.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Home
59
The following figure shows the Battery monitors page:
Figure 3.27 – Battery Summary Window
•
Battery Summary – status window of battery alarms
o Battery – list of battery monitors
■ BatteryVoltage – Indicates if battery voltage is within acceptable
parameters
■ BatteryCurrent – Indicates if battery current monitored is within
acceptable parameters
■ BatteryTemp – Indicates if battery temperature is within acceptable
parameters
■ BatteryLifeTime – Indicates whether the batteries have exceeded the
maximum number of days (user-defined) for a normal life cycle. The
number of days is dependent on the batteries operating within the
acceptable battery temperature range.
■ LVBD – Indicates the status of the system’s low-voltage battery
disconnect (LVBD) contactor
■ Fuse Status – Indicates the status of battery fuses or circuit breakers
■ Symmetry Status – Indicates the status of battery symmetry inputs,
whether or not there is a significant voltage deviation
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
60
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
■ DeltaStringCurr – Delta String Current, which indicates that a battery
string measurement has deviated from the average of all battery
string measurements by a user-specified percentage.
NOTE: The following parameters estimated using calculations based on
the Battery Table and battery test results.
■ BatteryQuality – Battery Quality, which indicates what percentage of
the battery’s original capacity remains for charging.
■ BatteryTotCap – Battery Total Capacity, indicates whether the
batteries have exceeded total capacity (user-defined, amp-hours).
■ BatteryRemCap – Battery Remaining Capacity, indicates whether the
batteries have exceeded remaining capacity (user-defined, amphours).
■ BatteryUsedCap – Battery Used Capacity, indicates whether the
batteries have exceeded a user-defined amount of charge (amphours).
■ BatteryTimeLeft – Indicates if the estimated time remaining for
battery discharge has dropped below a user-defined threshold
(minutes).
■ Ah Charged – Indicates if the batteries have been charged beyond a
user-defined threshold (amp-hours).
■ Ah Discharged – Indicates if the batteries have discharged below a
user-defined threshold (amp-hours).
■ BadTestResults – Indicates how many battery tests determined that
the batteries are “bad”, where End Voltage is reached before the time
allotted for the Simple Test (a type of battery discharge test)
o BatteryBank X – A battery bank consists of two or more battery strings
connected in parallel, with each string having the voltage required to
support the power system (e.g., 48V or 24V). The number of banks must
be manually set under Battery Configuration (System Conf. > Power
System > Battery > Configuration).
■ Voltage
The following figure shows the Battery Bank – Voltage monitors page:
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Home
61
Figure 3.28 – Battery Bank Voltage Summary
□ BattVolt bank X – Indicates the status of the battery voltage alarm
for the battery bank.
■ Currents
The following figure shows the Battery Bank – Current monitors page:
Figure 3.29 – Battery Bank Currents Summary
□ BattCurrentX.Y – Indicates the status of the battery current inputs
for the battery bank, whether they exceed the user-defined high
and low current parameters.
■ Fuses
The following figure shows the Battery Bank – Fuses monitors page:
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
62
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 3.30 – Battery Bank Fuses Summary
□ BattFuses X – Indicates the status of any fuses or circuit breakers
(open or closed)
■ Temperatures
The following figure shows the Battery Bank – Temperatures monitors
page:
Figure 3.31 – Battery Bank Temperatures Summary
□ BatteryTempX.Y – Indicates the status of battery temperature
inputs for the bank, whether any readings exceed the user-defined
high and low temperature parameters.
■ Symmetry
The following figure shows the Battery Bank – Symmetry monitors
page:
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Home
63
Figure 3.32 – Battery Bank Symmetry Summary
□ SymmVolt X.Y – Indicates if the voltage deviation between the
points monitored is greater than a user-defined limit (volts).
o BattMonStr.X – list of alarm monitors from a Battery Monitor (Eltek CAN
Node) connected to the CAN bus (only appears if connected)
The following figure shows the Battery Monitor monitors page:
Figure 3.33 – Battery Monitor Summary Window
■ BattMonCurr X – Battery Monitor Current, indicates if the battery
shunt being monitored exceeds a predefined limit (amps).
■ BattMonTemp X – Battery Monitor Temperature, indicates if the
Battery Monitor’s internal temperature sensor exceeds predefined
high and low thresholds.
■ BattMonFuse X – Battery Monitor Fuse, indicates if there is an alarm
on a fuse or circuit breaker that is connected to the Battery Monitor
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
64
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
■ BattMonSymX.Y – Battery Monitor Symmetry input, indicates if the
voltage deviation between the points monitored for each symmetry
input is greater than a user-defined limit (volts)
o Batt FlexiMon X – see section Flexi Monitors
The following table lists the Battery alarm monitors:
Table 3.12 – Battery Alarm Monitor Summary
Menu
Sub-Menu
Alarm Monitor
Units Type
Alarm Type(s)
BatteryVoltage
Volts (dc)
Major High
(if applicable)
Battery
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
BatteryCurrent
Amps
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
BatteryTemp
Degrees
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
BatteryLifeTime
Day(s)
Major
Minor
LVBD
N/A
(LVBD)
Fuse Status
N/A
Configurable
Symmetry Status
N/A
Major
Minor
DeltaStringCurr
Percentage
Major
Minor
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Home
Menu
65
Sub-Menu
Alarm Monitor
Units Type
Alarm Type(s)
BatteryQuality
Percentage
Major
(if applicable)
Minor
BatteryTotCap
Amp-hours
Minor Low
Major Low
BatteryRemCap
Amp-hours
Minor Low
Major Low
BatteryUsedCap
Amp-hours
Major
Minor
BatteryTimeLeft
Minutes
Major
Minor
Ah Charged
Ah Discharged
BatteryBank X
Voltage
BattVolt bank X
Amp-hours
Major High
(x 100)
Minor High
Amp-hours
Major High
(x 100)
Minor High
Volts (dc)
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Currents
BattCurrent X.Y
Amps
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Fuses
BattFuses X
N/A
Configurable
Temperatures
BatteryTemp X.Y
Degrees
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
66
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Menu
Sub-Menu
Alarm Monitor
Units Type
Alarm Type(s)
SymmVolt X.Y
Volts (dc)
Major
(if applicable)
Symmetry
Minor
BattMonStr.X
BattMonCurr X
Amps
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
BattMonTemp X
Degrees
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
BattMonFuse X
N/A
Configurable
BattMonSym X.Y
Volts (dc)
Major
Minor
Load Monitors
Load Monitors are Eltek CAN Nodes that are connected to the controller system.
They can be configured for monitoring these specific power components: load,
solar, wind, fuel cell, and dc-to-dc converter input. The Load Monitor as a whole unit
is assigned to one of these input types under System Configuration:
System Conf. > Power System > Control System > Current Monitor
NOTE: Load Monitors are also called Current Monitors in the Web Interface.
Load Monitors are address in this separate section because of their ability to be
used for a variety of applications, and because they always maintain the same
structure for their alarm monitors.
Load Monitors have eight input channels for fuse monitoring and eight channels for
current monitoring. Load Monitors appear in the Summary windows with the
following names (depending on monitoring type):
Load: Load CurMon X (set as Load CurMon) or LoadPrimary X (set as Std
LoadMon)
Solar: Solar CurMon X
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Home
67
Wind: Wind CurMon X
Fuel Cell: FuelC CurMon X
Dc-to-dc: DCDC CurMon X
Load Monitor alarm monitors location:
Alarm Conf. > Power System > [Applicable Device]
NOTE: The alarm monitors of Load Monitor devices appear under the power
component that they are configured for (e.g., load, solar, fuel cell, etc.).
•
[Current Monitor X]
o Fuses
■ Fuse X.Y – Indicates the status of a branch fuse or circuit breaker
(open or closed)
o Currents
■ Current X – Indicates whether the total current read over all inputs of
the monitor is below the defined total current level.
■ Current X.Y – Indicates whether the load branch circuit is below the
defined current levels
o Power
■ TotPower X – Indicates the status of total power read over all inputs
of the monitor (not configurable)
■ Power X.Y – Indicates the status of power calculations for each
programmable input (not configurable)
The following table lists the Load alarm monitors:
Table 3.13 – Load Monitor Alarm Monitors
Monitor Type
Sub-Menu
Alarm Monitor
Unit(s)
Alarm Type(s)
Current Monitor X
Fuses
Fuse X.Y
N/A
Configurable
Currents
Current X.Y
Amp
Major High
Minor High
Power
Doc. No. 370035.013
TotPower X
Watt
N/A
Power X.Y
Watt
N/A
Issue 1, April 2014
68
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Flexi Monitors
Flexi Monitors, like Load Monitors, are Eltek CAN Nodes that can be utilized for a
variety of current monitoring types. They can be configured for monitoring these
specific power components: load, battery, solar, wind, fuel cell, and dc-to-dc
converter input. The Flexi Monitor as a whole unit is assigned to one of these input
types under System Configuration:
System Conf. > Power System > Control System > Current Monitor
Flexi Monitor alarm monitors location:
Alarm Conf. > Power System > [Applicable Device]
NOTE: The alarm monitors of Flexi Monitor devices appear under the power
component that they are configured for (e.g., load, battery, solar, etc.)
Flexi Monitors are address in this separate section because of their ability to be
used for a variety of applications, and because they always maintain the same
structure for their alarm monitors.
Flexi Monitors have 16 input channels for a variety of monitoring inputs (fuse,
current, temperature, etc.). Flexi Monitors appear in the Summary windows with
the following names (depending on monitoring type):
Load: Load FlexMon X
Battery: Batt FlexMon X
Solar: Solar FlexMon X
Wind: Wind FlexMon X
Fuel Cell: FuelC FlexMon X
Dc-to-dc: DCDC FlexMon X
Inputs: Contr FlexMon X (set as Std Fleximon)
•
[Flexi Monitor X]
o Inputs
The following figure shows the Flexi Monitor – Inputs monitors page:
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Home
69
Figure
e 3.34 – Flex
xi Monitor Inp
puts Summarry
■ Curre
ent X – Indiicates whe
ether the to
otal curren
nt read ove
er all inputs
s of
the monitor
m
is below
b
the defined
d
tottal current level
■ ProgIInput X.Y – indicates the statuss of progra
ammable in
nputs, whic
ch
can be
b configurred for a va
ariety of inp
put types, including ffuses, relay
ys,
curre
ent, and tem
mperature
o Power
The follo
owing figurre shows th
he Flexi Mo
onitor – Po
ower monittors page:
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
70
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure
e 3.35 – Flex
xi Monitor Po
ower Summarry
■ TotPower X – In
ndicates whether the
e total pow
wer read ov
ver all inputts of
the monitor
m
is below
b
the defined
d
tottal power le
evel
■ Powe
er X.Y – ind
dicates the
e status of the powerr calculatio
on for each
progrrammable input (not configurab
c
ble)
The follo
owing table lists the Flexi Monittor alarm m
monitors:
Flexi Monittor Alarm Mo
onitors
Monitorr Type
Sub-Menu
S
Alarm Monitor
Unit(s)
A
Alarm Type((s)
Flexi Mo
onitor X
In
nputs
Curren
nt X
Amp
Major High
Minor High
ProgIn
nput X.Y
N/A
C
Configurable
e
(Volt DC
C)
Power
P
Doc. No. 370035.013
TotPow
wer X
Watt
N/A
Powerr X.Y
N/A
N/A
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Home
71
Contrroller No
odes and
d Inputs and Outtputs
Just as with the Po
ower Syste
em Components, alerrt symbols appear in a corner off the
button if
i there is an
a alarm orr notice tha
at affects tthe compo
onent. This is especially
useful for
f troubles
shooting allarms.
Contro
ol System
m
Clicking
g on the Control Syste
em button opens the
e Control u
units summ
mary window,
which lis
sts connec
cted CAN Nodes
N
(controllers, mo
onitors, etc
c.), includin
ng part
numberrs, version number
n
(off the part), serial num
mber, softw
ware numbe
er and vers
sion,
and stattus.
NOTE: Load
L
Monittors are listted as CurrrMonitor X in this sum
mmary win
ndow.
•
Control
C
Units Summary – summ
mary window
w of contro
oller alarms
o Inventorry – list of control
c
and
d monitorin
ng devices connected
d to the
system
owing figurre shows th
he Control Units – Inv
ventory mo
onitors pag
ge:
The follo
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
72
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 3.36
3
– Contro
ol Units Inve
entory Summ
mary
o Top Mon
nitors – top
p-level alarm monitors for contrrollers and monitoring
g
devices
owing figurre shows th
he Control Units – To
op Monitors
s page:
The follo
Figure 3.37
7 – Control Units Monitorss Summary W
Window
NOTE: The
T followin
ng list is no
ot exhausttive, as monitors can be added ffor
new or updated
u
de
evices. Alarm monitors only app
pear when the
ntroller.
associatted device is connectted to the p
primary con
■ AmbiientTemp – the maximum temp
perature de
etected by
y any of the
e
contrroller temp
perature inp
puts (Smarrtpack2 Ba
asic or Sma
artpack2 Ba
asic
Indus
strial)
■ Batt--AmbientT
Temp – difference bettween batttery tempe
erature and
d
the AmbientTe
A
mp value (BatteryTe
(
emp – Amb
bientTemp))
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Home
73
■ User suspended – indicates if a user account has been suspended due
to too many unsuccessful login attempts
■ CU Err.Basic – indicates if there is an error in one or more of the
Smartpack2 Basic or Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers
■ CU Err.BattMon – indicates if there is an error in one or more of the
Battery Monitors
■ CU Err.LoadMon – indicates if there is an error in one or more of the
Load Monitors
■ CtrlUnitError – indicates if there is an error in the primary controller
(Smartpack2 Master, Smartpack S, or Compack)
■ CU Err.IO-Unit – indicates if there is an error in one or more of the I/O
Monitor devices
The following table lists the Controller alarm monitors:
Table 3.14 – Battery Summary Window
Menu
Sub-Menu
Alarm Monitor
Units Type
Alarm Type(s)
AmbientTemp
Degrees
Major High
(if applicable)
Top monitors
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Batt-AmbientTemp
Degrees
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
UserSuspended
Yes/No
Major
CU Err.Basic
Sum
Major
Minor
CU Err.BattMon
Sum
Major
Minor
CU Err.LoadMon
Sum
Major
Minor
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
74
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Menu
Sub-Menu
Alarm Monitor
Units Type
Alarm Type(s)
CtrlUnitError
Sum
Major
(if applicable)
Minor
CU Err.IO-Unit
Sum
Major
Minor
Controller alarm monitors location:
Alarm Conf. > Power System > Control System
System Inputs
Clicking on the Inputs button brings up the list of inputs for each control and
monitoring device connected to the CAN bus.
Inputs alarm monitors location:
Alarm Conf. > Power System > Inputs
•
Inputs Summary – summary window of controller and monitor inputs
o SP2 Master – Master controller of the Smartpack2 controller family;
includes an interactive display and Ethernet port for the web interface.
■ Virtual Input X – Indicates if a virtual input is active.
The following figure shows the Input monitors page:
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Home
75
Figu
ure 3.38 – Inp
put Summary
y Window (w
with Smartpa
ack2 Master)
o SP2 Basic X – Smartpack2 Ba
asic contro
oller of the Smartpack
k2 controlller
family; in
ncludes pro
ogrammable inputs, ttemperature inputs, a
and
earth/grround faultt detection
n.
NOTE: The
T Smartp
pack2 Basic
c and Sma rtpack2 Ba
asic Industrial controlllers
have the
e same inpu
ut alarm monitors.
m
See the SP2
2 BasicInd X list (nextt)
for the alarm
a
monittors.
o SP2 BasicInd X – Smartpack2
2 Basic Indu
ustrial controller of the
Smartpa
ack2 contro
oller family
y; includes programm
mable inputs
s, tempera
ature
inputs, and
a earth/g
ground fau
ult detectio
on.
■ Prog.. Inputs – in
ndicates iff there is an
n alarm on the contro
oller’s alarm
m
inputts. This des
signation is
s for input a
alarm term
minals, with
h the excep
ption
of tem
mperature probes (w
which use th
he same te
erminals). P
Programma
able
inputts can be re
elay input (normally
(
o
open or norrmally closed), diode
matriix, clock inp
put, or volttage.
The following
f
figure show
ws the Sma rtpack2 Ba
asic – Prog
g. Inputs
monittors page:
Figure 3.39
9 – Smartpac
ck2 Basic Pro
ogrammable
e Inputs
■ Temp
p. Inputs – indicates if
i there is a
an alarm on
n the contrroller’s
temp
perature inp
puts. This designatio
d
n is reserved for tem
mperature
probe
es connectted to input terminalss of Eltek c
controllers..
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
76
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
NOTE: The input terminals used for temperature are the same physical
terminals used for the programmable inputs. If the temperature input
(“Temperature X.Y”) is enabled, then the corresponding Programmable
Input (“ProgInput X.Y) is not available; similarly, if the programmable
input is enabled, then the corresponding temperature input is not
available.
The following figure shows the Smartpack2 Basic – Temp. Inputs
monitors page:
Figure 3.40 – Smartpack2 Basic Temperature Inputs
■ Earth Fault – if enabled, indicates an earth or ground fault has been
detected.
The Earth Fault Detection functionality built-in the Smartpack2 Basic
controllers can be used to raise an earth fault alarm, when the
impedance ground-to-positive supply conductor is not the same as the
impedance ground-to-negative supply conductor. This situation will
occur when there is current leakage from the supply conductor (from +
or – or both) to ground.
The following figure shows the Smartpack2 Basic – Earth Fault
monitors page:
Figure 3.41 – Smartpack2 Basic Earth (Ground) Fault Inputs
o I/O unit X – I/O Monitor, an Eltek CAN Node for accommodating additional
programmable inputs.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Home
77
■ Prog.Input – programmable inputs, which indicates if there is an alarm
on the controller’s alarm inputs. This designation is for input alarm
terminals, with the exception of temperature probes (which use the
same terminals). Programmable inputs can be relay input (normally
open or normally closed), diode matrix, clock input, or voltage.
The following figure shows the I/O Unit monitors page:
Figure 3.42 – I/O Unit Alarm Monitors
Outdoor Inputs
Outdoor inputs is a special designation for outdoor cabinet inputs, which are
supported by the I/O Monitor Type 1 and I/O Monitor Type 3.
Location of configuration page(s):
Alarm Conf. > Power System > Inputs > I/O unit X Outdoor Configuration
•
Outdoor Input Summary – summary window of outdoor input monitors
The following figure shows the Outdoor Input monitors page:
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
78
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 3.43 – Outdoor Input Summary Window
o FanSpeed XX.Y – indicates if a cabinet fan is near the high or low
thresholds for operational capacity (as a percentage of rpms and
pulses/revolutions); intended for use with SpeedDev. XX.Y (below).
o OutDoorTemp XX.Y – indicates if a temperature probe in an outdoor
cabinet reports a temperature that exceeds the high or low thresholds;
designed to be used to compare the temperatures inside and outside the
cabinet for TempDev XX.Y (below).
o SpeedDev. XX.Y – indicates if the fan speed monitored is deviating from
the intended fan speed specified by output FanControl Y (alarm output
relay).
Location of Fan Control parameter: System Conf. > Power System >
Control System > Outdoor > Fan Control Y
o TempDev. XX.Y – indicates if the temperature deviation between the
cabinet’s internal and external temperature measurements exceeds userdefined thresholds.
The following table lists the Input alarm monitors:
Table 3.15 – Input Alarm Monitors
Menu
Sub-Menu
Alarm Monitor
Units Type
Alarm Type(s)
Virtual Input X
N/A
Configurable
ProgInput X.Y
N/A
Configurable
(if applicable)
SP2 Master
SP2 BasicInd X
Prog. Inputs
(Volt DC)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Home
Menu
79
Sub-Menu
Alarm Monitor
Units Type
Alarm Type(s)
Temperature X.Y
Degrees
Major High
(if applicable)
Temp. Inputs
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Earth Fault
IO Unit X
EarthFault X
kilo Ohms
Major
ProgInput XX.Y
N/A
Configurable
(Type 2)
IO Unit X
(Volt DC)
Fan speed XX.Y
Percentage
(Type 3)
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
OutDoorTemp XX.Y
Degrees
Configurable
SpeedDev. XX.Y
Percentage
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
TempDev. XX.Y
Degrees
Configurable
System Measurements (voltage, current, batteries)
Real-time measurements or calculations appear on the right side of the System
Overview panel:
Figure 3.44 – System Measurements Panel
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
80
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
•
Battery
B
Volltage – rea
al-time mea
asurementt of the batttery voltag
ge
•
Battery
B
Currrent – real-time mea
asurement or calculattion of batttery curren
nt
•
Load Curren
nt – real-tim
me measurrement or c
calculation
n of the loa
ad current
•
Battery
B
Cha
arge/Capa
acity – estimated cha
arge and ca
apacity of tthe battery
y
banks
b
Systtem His
story Window
W
w
The Sys
stem History window provides a real-time graph of b
battery and
d load
voltages, as well as
a system events.
Fiigure 3.45 – System
S
Histtory Graph
s a Print bu
utton in the
e bottom right cornerr, which prints the Sy
ystem Histo
ory
There is
graph as it appearrs.
ge, LoadCu
urrent, and
d Event datta points c
can be togg
gled on and
d off
The BattteryVoltag
by clicking on the respective
e icons and names in tthe legend
d (below the graph).
Figu
ure 3.46 – Lo
oad Current T
Toggled OFF
Rolling over
o
the da
ata or even
nt points on
n the graph
h with the mouse currsor genera
ates
a brief summary
s
of the pointt.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Home
81
Figure 3.47 – Data Point Highlighted
System Monitors Window
The System Monitors window provides real-time data reported by each controller
and monitor connected to the Smartpack2 controller CAN bus.
Figure 3.48 – Default System Monitors
The default metrics listed are:
•
Battery voltage and current
•
Mains (AC utility) voltage
•
Load Current
•
Total Rectifier Current
•
Battery Temperature
•
Battery Capacity
NOTE: The System Monitors reflect the configurable page of the display (on
Smartpack2 Master and Smartpack S controllers) and can be configured using
PowerSuite.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
82
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
4. System
S
m Con
nfigurration
n
Settings
s pertaining to system
m operatio
on, parametters, and v
various other settings
s are
found in
n the Syste
em Configu
uration secttion.
As of th
he date of this
t
guide, the major submenus
s
are:
•
Power
P
System
o Power System
o Mains
o Generato
or
o Rectifierrs
o Load
o Battery
o Control System
S
•
Device
D
Setttings
o Time Setttings
o Network
k Settings
o SNMP Se
ettings
o User Acc
counts
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
System Configuration
C
n
83
Figure 4.1
1 – Default Menu
M
for Systtem Configuration
In additiion to the major
m
menu
us, the following appear under Power Sys
stem when the
power modules
m
are either present or co
onfigured ffor monitorring:
•
Solar
S
•
Wind
W
•
FuelC (fuel cell)
c
•
DcDc
D
(dc-to
o-dc converrters)
Powe
er Systtem
The Pow
wer System
m section contains
c
co
onfigurable
e paramete
ers for site and system
information (name
e, location, etc.), global preferen
nces (unitss formats, p
polarity
preferen
nce, contactor trigge
ers, etc.), an
nd system voltage se
ettings (ba
ased on
battery parameters).
Powe
er syste
em
The Pow
wer System
m sub-secttion contain
ns parametters relate
ed to power system
compon
nents and global
g
values.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
84
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
System Info
The System Info page is for configuring system and site information. Fields are for
free-form text, unless otherwise indicated.
Figure 4.2 – Power System – System Info Page
NOTE: All fields on this page are optional; none are required. These fields are
provided for discretionary purposes by the end user, customer, operator, or owner;
they are not filled by Eltek.
•
Company – name of the company that owns or operates this power system
•
Site – name for the site or power system
NOTE: This field appears on the Login page as Site. It is different from the
field used on the Eltek Network Utility (ENU) for the Name; the power system
Name is configured as part of the network settings (System Conf. > Device
Settings > Network Settings > TCP/IP > Device Name).
•
Model – model name of the power system
•
Serial Number – serial number of the power system
•
Install Date – date that the power system was installed; date format is
years, months, days; [yyyy-mm-dd]
•
Service Date – date of the most recent service/maintenance; date is years,
months, days; [yyyy-mm-dd]
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
85
•
Responsible – name of person or organization responsible for the latest
service/maintenance performed
•
Message 1 – free-form field for comments on the last service/maintenance
performed
•
Message 2 – free-form field for comments on the last service/maintenance
performed
•
Latitude – latitude of site location; format is degrees (ddd), hours (hh),
minutes (mm.mm, which includes two decimal places), compass direction (c);
[ddd-hh-mm.mm-c]
•
Longitude – longitude of site location; format is degrees (ddd), hours (hh),
minutes (mm.mm, which includes two decimal places), compass direction (c);
[ddd-hh-mm.mm-c]
•
Elevation – elevation of the site, in meters
System Globals
The System Globals page is for configuring parameters that are applied to the
entire system, such as unit formats, polarity preference, and contactor triggers.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
86
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 4.3 – Power System – System Globals Page (Smartpack2 Basic Industrial)
•
System global settings
o System Capacity scale – choose the format for remaining battery
capacity: Ampere-Hours or Percentage
o Temperature scale – choose the format for temperature: Celsius or
Fahrenheit
o System Polarity – choose how system polarity is to be expressed:
Positive or Negative
NOTE: System Polarity is not for defining the system’s polarity, but
rather, for defining how the polarity is expressed throughout the
interface. For example, if the system voltage is negative 48 volts (-48V),
selecting Positive causes the voltage to be displayed without the
negative symbol (48V); selecting Negative causes the voltage to be
displayed with the negative symbol (-48V).
o Current Decimal settings – choose the format for current: Amps or
deciAmps (1/10 of an ampere)
o Store statistics – for Smartpack2 controllers only: enable or disable
saving statistics to the SD card
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
87
o Individual Voltage Control for Battery Groups – enable or disable
individual voltage control for battery groups
o Individual Current Share for Rectifier Groups – enable or disable
individual current control for rectifier groups
o Allow rectifier remote on/off – enable or disable turning rectifiers on or
off remotely (admin login required)
•
Critical premises (Contactor operation) - This section defines alarm
conditions that must be met for the system to report a critical condition,
which indicates that there is low ac current (mains) and/or low battery
current. The choice affects when the low-voltage disconnect (LVD)
contactors may be disconnected; by design, LVDs disconnect in critical
condition and reconnect in normal condition.
o Mains Minor Low – ac mains low current minor alarm is ON
o Battery Current Minor Low – battery low current minor alarm is ON
o Mains Minor Low OR Battery Current Minor Low – either the ac mains low
current minor alarm or the battery low current minor alarm is ON
o Mains Minor Low AND Battery Current Minor Low – both the ac mains low
current minor alarm and the battery low current minor alarm are ON
•
Rectifier and DCDC Group configuration - Defines the power module
represented by each rectifier group ID (Smartpack2 Basic Industrial only)
o Group Id – rectifier group ID number(s); choose either Rectifier (for
rectifier modules) or DCDC (for dc-to-dc converters) for each Group Id
NOTE: Group Id refers to the rectifier group number; the total number is
set at System Conf. > Power System > Rectifiers
System Voltages
The System Voltages page is for configuring critical voltage parameters for system
operation.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
88
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 4.4 – Power System – System Voltages Page
•
Nominal Voltage – nominal system voltage determined by the Reference
voltage (Cell) value and the Number of Battery Cells; not a configurable field
•
Auto-set number of cells based on rectifier output voltage – check this box
to automatically fill the next field—Number of Battery Cells—based on the
rectifier output voltage
•
Number of Battery Cells – enter the number of battery cells in each battery
string; this field is not configurable if the box for Auto-set number of cells
based on rectifier output voltage is checked
•
Reference voltage (Cell) – the charging voltage per battery cell as
recommended by the battery manufacturer; this is the same field as
Reference voltage (Cell) under System Conf. > Power System > Battery
>TempComp.
•
Reference voltage (Total) – the charging voltage for an entire battery string
as recommended by the battery manufacturer
NOTE: Reference voltage (Cell) and Reference voltage (Total) are linked;
changing one field changes the other when a change is saved.
If Reference voltage (Cell) is changed and saved, then Reference voltage
(Total) updates as follows: Reference voltage (Cell) x Number of Battery
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
89
Cells. This field is the same as Reference voltage (Cell) under System Conf.
> Power System > Battery >TempComp.
If Reference voltage (Total) is changed and saved, then Reference voltage
(Cell) updates as follows: Reference voltage (Total) ÷ Number of Battery
Cells.
Table 4.1 – Calculations for Reference voltage (Cell) and Reference voltage (Total)
If this value is changed…
…then this calculation is performed:
Reference voltage (Cell)
Reference voltage (Total) = Reference voltage (Cell) X Number
of Battery Cells
Reference voltage (Total)
Reference voltage (Cell) = Reference voltage (Total) ÷ Number
of Battery Cells
•
Boost voltage – boost charge value per cell; the voltage value must be
higher than float (or Reference) voltage but lower than the over-voltage
shutdown (OVS) value. The total string voltage value in parenthesis (to the
right of the field) updates based on the value entered and saved.
NOTE: Only enter the boost voltage value recommended by the battery
manufacturer. This field is the same as the Boost voltage field of the
System Conf. > Power System > Battery > Boost page.
•
Rectifier standby voltage – a “safety net” voltage that the rectifiers
maintain during a battery discharge test. This is to ensure that power is
maintained if the batteries fail; it also prevents the batteries from being
disconnected. Therefore, this value (in volts per cell) must be higher than the
Battery disconnect voltage. The total string voltage value in parenthesis (to
the right of the field) updates based on the value entered and saved.
•
Rectifier OVS limit – over-voltage shutdown value in volts per cell. The total
string voltage value in parenthesis (to the right of the field) updates based
on the value entered and saved.
NOTE: This field is the same as the Over voltage shutdown (OVS) limit field
of on the page System Conf. > Power System > Rectifiers >
Configuration.
•
Battery disconnect voltage – low battery voltage value (per cell) at which
the low-voltage battery disconnect (LVBD) contactor should open. The total
string voltage value in parenthesis (to the right of the field) updates based
on the value entered and saved.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
90
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
NOTE: This field is the same as the Disconnect voltage [V] field on the
Battery contactor table found on the System Conf. > Power System >
Battery > Configuration page.
•
Battery reconnect voltage – battery voltage value (per cell) at which the
low-voltage battery disconnect (LVBD) contactor should close. The total
string voltage value in parenthesis (to the right of the field) updates based
on the value entered and saved.
NOTE: This field is the same as the Reconnect voltage [V] field on the
Battery contactor table found on the System Conf. > Power System >
Battery > Configuration page.
NOTE: Changing and saving the Battery disconnect voltage without
entering a new value for the Battery reconnect voltage causes the Battery
reconnect voltage to be updated automatically, maintaining the same
voltage difference as before the change.
•
Battery test end voltage (Normal test) – end voltage per cell for the Normal
Test of Battery Test configuration (System Conf. > Power System >
Battery > Test), which is derived from the battery definition table (System
Conf. > Power System > Battery > Configuration > Edit battery table).
Therefore, this is not a configurable field. The total string voltage value is in
parenthesis (to the right of the field).
The following table indicates which fields of the System Voltages page can be set
elsewhere in the Web Interface. Changing the value in one field automatically
changes the value in the identical field.
Table 4.2 – Identical Parameter Fields
System Voltages Field
Identical Field Elsewhere
Path to Identical Field
Reference voltage (Cell)
Reference voltage
System Conf. > Power System
> Battery > TempComp
Boost voltage
Boost voltage
System Conf. > Power System
> Battery > Boost
Rectifier OVS limit
Over voltage shutdown (OVS)
limit
System Conf. > Power System
> Rectifiers > Configuration
Battery disconnect voltage
Disconnect voltage [V]
System Conf. > Power System
> Battery > Configuration
Battery contactor table
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
91
System Voltages Field
Identical Field Elsewhere
Path to Identical Field
Battery reconnect voltage
Reconnect voltage [V]
System Conf. > Power System
> Battery > Configuration
Battery contactor table
Mains
The Mains page is for configuring ac input (mains) parameters.
WITHOUT GROUPS – pages that appear when there are no Smartpack2 Basic
Industrial controllers in the system.
Figure 4.5 – AC Mains Page – Without Groups
•
Number of Phases – enter the number of ac phases per input feed (1-3)
•
Suppress mains alarms when generator is stopped – check the Enable box
to suppress ac mains alarms when the generator is turned off
WITH GROUPS – pages that appear when Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers
are present.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
92
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Summary
The Summary page is for the ac mains groups.
Figure 4.6 – Mains Summary Page – With Groups
•
Number of Groups – the number of mains groups, i.e., the number of
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers that are monitoring Eltek rectifiers
(which report ac mains information)
Mains Group
The Mains Group page shows each ac mains group (one per Smartpack2 Basic or
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controller that is monitoring Eltek rectifiers).
Figure 4.7 – Mains Group Page – With Groups
•
Number of Phases – enter the number of ac phases per input feed (1-3)
•
Suppress mains alarms when generator is stopped – check the Enable box
to suppress ac mains alarms when the generator is turned off
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
C
n
93
Gene
erator
The Gen
nerator sec
ction is for configurin
ng generato
or parametters. Up to
o two ac
generattors can be
e configure
ed.
Generral
The Gen
neral page is for enab
bling or disa
abling gene
erator control and ac
ctivation, as
well as assigning
a
alarm
a
groups and time parametters.
Figure 4.8 – Ge
enerator Gen
neral Page
•
Generator
G
control
c
– enable or disable gene
erator conttrol, where
e the power
system con
ntroller will send ON and
a OFF sig
gnals to the
e generator(s)
•
Long charge
e time – if the genera
ator is used
d to charge
e batteries
s, this field
specifies ho
ow many ho
ours the ge
enerator sh
hould operrate to charge the
batteries;
b
th
his value is
s used whe
en the gene
erator is sttarted by th
he Monthly
y
parameters
p
s or battery
y voltage has
h dropped
d below th
he Battery disconnec
ct
voltage
v
(Sy
ystem Conf. > Powerr System > Power Sy
ystem > S
System
Voltages).
V
m
be ena
abled.
Generatorr control must
•
Stop
S
delay – time dela
ay in minuttes that the
e generato
or should w
wait to shutt off
after ac input is restorred (to con
ntinue charrging a bit llonger than
n required by
re
echarge se
ettings)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
94
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
•
Mains delay – time delay in minutes that the generator should wait to start
after ac input is lost; this helps prevent generator startup when the ac mains
outage is brief
•
Boost during charge – check this box to enable battery boost mode when
the system is on generator
•
Test mode – check this box to enable generator test mode; this changes
hours to minutes to accelerate the time limits to confirm that it works
properly
•
Event, Alarm Group – Assign generator events to alarm output groups.
There are two Events for up to two generators.
Capacity
The Capacity page is for setting generator operation based on battery capacity. All
of the options on this page can be enabled simultaneously.
Figure 4.9 – Generator Capacity Page
•
Capacity controlled Generator start/stop – Check this box to enable
generator operation based on battery capacity
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
95
•
Start Generator on discharge limit – set the battery Depth of Discharge
(DoD) percentage at which the generator should activate
•
Stop Generator on charge limit – set the battery State of Charge (SoC)
percentage at which the generator should deactivate
•
Capacity/Time controlled Generator start/stop – check this box to enable
generator operation based on battery capacity (discharge) to start and time
elapsed to stop
•
Start Generator on discharge limit – set the battery Depth of Discharge
(DoD) percentage at which the generator should activate
•
Stop Generator on time limit – set the number of operational hours that
should elapse until the generator deactivates
•
Current limit controlled Generator stop – check this box to specify a low
current threshold at which the generator should deactivate
•
Stop Generator on current limit – low current level from the generator at
which the generator should deactivate
•
Solar Generator stop – check this box to stop the generator upon solar
charger input
•
Wind Generator stop – check this box to stop the generator upon wind
charger input
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
96
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Daily
The Daily page is for configuring daily generator operation.
Figure 4.10 – Generator Daily Setup Page
•
Daily Generator start – check this box to enable daily generator start/stop
parameters
NOTE: If there are any days during which the generator(s) should not run, do
not assign an alarm group; this prevents the start and stop signals from
being sent during the hours specified for that day.
•
[Sunday – Saturday] – set start and stop times for each day (24-hour format,
HH); assign alarm output group to signal the generator
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
97
Monthly
The Monthly page is for configuring monthly generator operation.
Figure 4.11 – Generator Monthly Setup Page
•
Monthly Generator Start - check this box to enable monthly generator
activation; up to two days can be configured to start the generator
•
Start time – hour start time (24-hour format, HH; do not include minutes).
This is the hour during the days specified below that the generator is started.
The generator runs until reaching the Long charge time value specified (in
hours) on the General page. Set the alarm group to send the start signal to
the generator.
•
Day in month (1.start) – day of the month to turn on the generator (1-31, DD
format)
•
Day in month (2.start) – day of the month to turn on the generator (1-31, DD
format)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
98
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Voltage Setup
The Voltage Setup page is for configuring generator activation upon battery
voltage reaching a low threshold.
Figure 4.12 – Generator Voltage Setup Page
•
Voltage controlled Generator start – check this box to enable generator
activation upon reaching a low battery voltage threshold
•
Start generation on – specify the low battery voltage level at which the
generator is to be turned on
•
Stop generator after – specify the number of hours that the generator
should run; format is 24-hour (HH).
Rectifiers
The Rectifiers section is for configuring rectifier parameters.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
99
Configuration
The Configuration page is for setting general rectifier parameters.
Figure 4.13 - Power System – Rectifiers Configuration Page
•
Number of Rectifiers – field for the total number of rectifiers present in the
power system (for manual numbering only; the controller automatically
counts all Eltek rectifiers)
•
Suppress rectifier fail when mains is gone – check this box to prevent the
Rectifier Alarm from triggering during a loss of ac input (mains)
•
Walk-in time – relative time frame (short or long) that the rectifiers should
take to reach float (or Reference) voltage (beginning at 44.0 Vdc and rising
to 53.5 Vdc). As the writing of this guide, Short time is 5 seconds and Long
time is 60 seconds. This feature is useful when generators are connected.
•
Over voltage shutdown (OVS) limit – output voltage threshold (in volts per
battery cell) at which the rectifiers should shutdown. The total string voltage
value in parenthesis (to the right of the field) updates based on the value
entered and saved.
NOTE: This is the same field as Rectifier OVS limit on the System Conf. >
Power System > Power System > System Voltages page.
•
Current limit – check the box to enable current limit on total rectifier output
•
Current limit value – enter the maximum total rectifier current desired (in
amps)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
100
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
NOTE: Rectifier current limit manages total rectifier output rather than
output per rectifier.
NOTE: Eltek rectifiers use a constant-power architecture, which means that
output voltage is adjusted to maintain the current limit value. To prevent a
system outage, the current limit setting is overridden if system voltage
drops too low.
•
Emergency voltage – enter an emergency voltage value, which is a value
lower than float (or Reference) voltage that the rectifiers should drop to in
the event that an emergency signal is received from an external source
•
Generator dependent delay – check this box to enable rectifier startup delay
when the system is powered by a generator. This feature helps prevent
drawing too much current from the generator when it begins supplying
power.
•
Startup delay time – enter the time in minutes that the rectifiers should wait
after the generator activates before starting up (to avoid overloading the
generator)
•
Silence rectifier alarm – check this box to silence rectifier alarm reporting
through the controller. Rectifiers still alarm normally, but the controller does
not report them. This is useful for areas with unreliable ac service.
•
Redundant rectifiers – Under efficiency management (see the section
“Efficiency”), the controller switches off redundant rectifiers if total load
current is less than 50% of the system’s total rectifier capacity. To change
the load current percentage to a lower value, enter a percentage (lower than
50%) of the total rectifier capacity at which the controller should turn off
redundant rectifiers.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
C
n
101
Efficie
ency
The Effiiciency pag
ge is for co
onfiguring rectifier
r
effficiency ma
anagement.
Figure 4.14 – Power Sys
stem – Rectiffiers Efficien
ncy Page
•
Efficiency
E
manager
m
– select the
e efficiency
y profile to use for the
e system:
Disable
D
(non
ne), Enable
e efficiency
y manager, or Enable ‘HE” prioritty
•
Disable
D
– no
o efficiency
y scheme is employed
•
Enable
E
effic
ciency man
nager – wh
hen selecte
ed, a list off paramete
ers appears
s:
o Power Save
S
Mode – determin
nes if the re
ectifiers ca
an be turne
ed off base
ed
on load demand
d
an
nd total rec
ctifier outp
put potential. If “Redu
undancy” is
s
selected
d, then one
e more recttifier than n
necessary is kept ena
abled to
support the load. If “Non-redundancy” is selected
d, then only
y the numb
ber
sary to sup
pport the lo
oad are ena
abled.
of rectifiers necess
P
Save
e Mode only disables rectifiers if total load
d current is
s
NOTE: Power
less than
n 50% of th
he total rectifier capa
acity.
o “Rectifie
er off” dela
ay – time in
nterval (in minutes) that should
d pass befo
ore
turning off
o a rectifier after tu
urning anotther one on
n during effficiency
management
o Shuffle time
t
– time
e interval (in hours) th
hat should pass befo
ore rotating
g
rectifiers
s. When on
ne rectifierr is turned o
off, anothe
er is turned
d on. Rectifiers
are rotatted sequen
ntially.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
102
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
o Test mo
ode – check
k this box to
t test Rec
ctifier Efficiiency; it ch
hanges hou
urs
to minuttes and min
nutes to se
econds in o
order to acc
celerate th
he operatio
on of
this func
ction to con
nfirm that it works prroperly.
o Battery current ca
ancel limit – battery c
current offfset at which efficien
ncy
management is dis
sabled, turn
ning on all available rectifiers
NOTE: Th
he controlller automa
atically disa
ables efficiiency mana
agement iff
battery discharge
d
is detected
d. In very la
arge powerr systems there is
potentia
al for some inaccuracy
y in battery
y current rreadings du
ue to shuntt
toleranc
ces. Therefore, Batterry current cancel lim
mit provides
s a means to
enter an
n offset to prevent dis
sabling effficiency ma
anagementt due to minor
variation
ns in batterry readings
s.
•
Enable
E
‘HE’ priority – if the powe
er system is equipped
d with Elte
ek’s HighEfficiency (H
HE) module
es and they
y can supp
ply 70% or more of th
he total load
current, the
en this featture turns off
o the non
n-HE rectifiiers.
[Sola
ar Charg
ger]
The Sola
ar Chargerr page is fo
or configuring solar ch
hargers and only appears if sola
ar
chargerrs are insta
alled or a CA
AN Node is
s configure
ed to monittor solar cu
urrent.
Config
guration
n
The Con
nfiguration
n page is fo
or configuring solar ch
harger mod
dules.
Figu
ure 4.15 – Pow
wer System – Solar Page
e
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
System Configuration
C
n
103
•
Number
N
of Solar
S
Charrgers – field
d for the nu
umber of ssolar charger modules
s
in
nstalled
•
Suppress
S
So
olar Charg
ger fail whe
en all inputts are low – check the box to
suppress low input ala
arms from the solar c
chargers
•
Over
O
voltag
ge shutdow
wn (OVS) limit – set a high volta
age value ((volts per c
cell)
at which the
e solar cha
arger(s) sho
ould shut d
down.
[Wind]
nd only appears if wind chargerrs
The Win
nd page is for
f configu
uring wind chargers
c
an
are installed or a CAN
C
Node is configure
ed to moniitor wind cu
urrent.
Confiiguration
The Con
nfiguration
n page is fo
or configuring wind ch
harger mod
dules.
Figu
ure 4.16 – Power System – Wind Page
e
•
Number
N
of Wind
W
Charg
gers – field
d for the nu
umber of w
wind charge
er modules
s
in
nstalled
•
Suppress
S
Wind
W
Charge
er fail whe
en all inputts are low – check the
e box to
suppress low input ala
arms from the wind c
chargers
•
Over
O
voltag
ge shutdow
wn (OVS) limit – set a high volta
age value ((volts per c
cell)
at which the
e wind charger(s) sho
ould shut d
down.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
104
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
[Fuel Cell]
The Fue
el Cell page
e is for con
nfiguring fuel cell charrgers and o
only appea
ars if fuel ce
ell
chargerrs are insta
alled or a CA
AN Node is
s configure
ed to monittor fuel celll current.
Confiiguration
The Con
nfiguration
n page is fo
or configuring fuel ce ll charger m
modules.
Figure 4.17 – Powe
er Systems – Fuel Cell Pa
age
•
Number
N
of FuelCell
F
Ch
hargers – field
f
for the
e number o
of fuel cell charger
modules
m
ins
stalled
•
Suppress
S
Fu
uelCell Cha
arger fail when
w
all inp
puts are lo
ow – check
k the box to
o
suppress low input ala
arms from the fuel ce
ell chargerss
•
Over
O
voltag
ge shutdow
wn (OVS) limit – set a high volta
age value ((volts per c
cell)
at which the
e fuel cell charger(s)
c
should shu
ut down.
[DcD
Dc Conv
verter]
The DcD
Dc Convertter page is for configu
uring dc-to
o-dc converters and o
only appears if
dc-to-dc
c converters are insta
alled or a CAN
C
Node is configure
ed to monitor dc-to-d
dc
convertters.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
System Configuration
105
Configuration
The Configuration page is for configuring dc-to-dc converters (if installed).
Figure 4.18 – Power System – DcDc Converter Page
•
Number of DcDc Converters – field for manually specifying the number dc-todc converters in the system
•
Output voltage – output voltage for the converters
•
Over voltage shutdown (OVS) limit – high voltage limit for the converters
where they shut down
•
Current limit – check this box to enable current limit on the dc-to-dc
converters
•
Current limit value – total current output in amps for all of the dc-to-dc
converters
Load
The Load page is for configuring system load parameters.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
106
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Config
guration
n
The Con
nfiguration
n page is fo
or configuring load group param
meters.
Figure 4.19
9 – Power Sys
stem – Load Configuratio
on Page
(Numbe
er of load con
ntactors set to 1 or greater)
•
Number
N
of load
l
group
ps – set the
e number o
of load grou
ups presen
nt in the en
ntire
power
p
syste
em. This number is determined
d by the num
mber of co
ontroller un
nits
(llike the Sm
martpack2 Basic
B
and Smartpack
S
k2 Basic Ind
dustrial con
ntrollers) th
hat
are monitorring loads.
•
Select
S
load group – with
w the Num
mber of loa
ad groups set, selectt a load gro
oup
to
o configure
e.
NOTE:
N
Settting load grroup conta
actors requ
uires that lo
ow-voltage
e disconnec
ct
(L
LVD) conta
actors be physically in
nstalled in tthe load circuit(s) mo
onitored by
y the
controller unit, and the contacto
ors must be
e connecte
ed to the LV
VD termina
als
of the contrroller.
•
Load Group
p contactorrs – configu
urable list of low-volttage load d
disconnectt
LVLD) conttactors. Th
he Number of load co
ontactors m
must be se
et greater tthan
(L
zero (0) in order
o
for the LVLD row
ws to appear on the ttable.
•
Enable
E
– check this bo
ox to enablle the conttroller’s LVLD termina
al
•
Description
D
n – if necessary, type a descripttion for the
e LVLD term
minal
•
Disconnect
D
t voltage [V
V] – battery
y voltage a
at which th
he load con
ntactor sho
ould
open, disconnecting the load fro
om the systtem
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
System Configuration
107
•
Reconnect voltage [V] – battery voltage at which the load contactor should
close, reconnecting the load to the system
•
Disconnect delay [minutes] – the number of minutes after a loss of ac power
(mains) when the load contactor should be opened to disconnect the load
circuit(s). The Enable box must be checked to enable this feature; otherwise,
the delay based on ac power loss is disabled. This feature is intended for
non-critical or non-priority loads (those that do not need to be supported by
battery back-up).
•
Delay after disconnect [seconds] – the time (in seconds) that should elapse
between signaling the LVLD contactor to open (disconnect) and signaling it
to close (reconnect).
•
Mains independent – check this box to permit the LVLD to close (reconnect)
if the Reconnect voltage is reached, regardless of whether ac power (mains)
has been restored. This is useful if there are power sources other than ac
utility input that can power the system and charge the batteries. Leaving the
box unchecked ensures that the LVLD does not close until ac power is
restored.
•
Number of load contactors – drop-down list to select the number of LVLD
contactor signals available on the controller for the load group specified by
the field Select load group.
NOTE: The number of contactors available in the drop-down list reflects the
number of signal terminals on the controller unit that monitors the specified
load group.
Battery
The Battery section is for configuring parameters for system batteries.
Configuration
The Configuration page is for the general configuration of battery properties,
including number of banks, capacity, and battery table.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
108
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 4.20 – Power System – Battery Page (Battery Table button highlighted)
•
Number of banks – the number of battery banks connected to the power
system.
NOTE: Since only specific controllers are equipped to monitor batteries (like
the Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controller), this number should reflect the
number of those controllers (if the power system is so equipped).
•
Description – free-form field for a description for the batteries (e.g., the type,
battery manufacturer, or the configuration employed)
•
Capacity [per string] – the total capacity (in ampere-hours) per battery string
•
Number of Battery strings – the number of battery strings in each battery
bank
•
Battery install date [yyyy-mm-dd] – the date of battery installation
•
Battery Type – define battery parameters using the battery table (click on
the Edit battery table button).
•
Battery contactor – editable table for the primary controller’s low-voltage
battery disconnect (LVBD) contactor terminal.
o Enable – check this box to enable the controller’s low-voltage battery
disconnect (LVBD) contactor terminal
o Description – if necessary, type a description for the LVBD terminal
o Disconnect voltage [V] – battery voltage at which the battery contactor
should open, disconnecting the batteries from the system
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
C
n
109
NOTE: This is the same
s
field as
a the Batttery discon
nnect volttage field o
on
the Systtem Conf. > Power System
S
>P
Power Sysstem > Sys
stem
Voltage
es page.
o Reconne
ect voltage
e [V] – batttery voltag
ge at which
h the batte
ery contacttor
should close,
c
recon
nnecting th
he batterie
es to the sy
ystem
NOTE: This is the same
s
field as
a the Batttery recon
nnect volta
age field on
n the
ower Systtem > Pow
wer System
m > System
m Voltages
s
System Conf. > Po
page.
o Delay affter discon
nnect [seco
onds] – the
e time (in se
econds) that should
elapse between
b
sig
gnaling the
e LVBD con
ntactor to o
open (disco
onnect) and
signaling
g it to close
e (reconnect).
o Mains independentt – check this
t
box to permit the
e LVBD to c
close
(reconne
ect) if the Reconnect
R
t voltage iss reached, rregardless
s of whethe
er ac
power (m
mains) has been resto
ored. This is useful iff there are power sou
urces
other than ac utilitty input tha
at can pow
wer the systtem and ch
harge the
batteries
s. Leaving the box un
nchecked e
ensures tha
at the LVBD does nott
close un
ntil ac powe
er is restored.
o Tempera
ature depe
endent – ch
heck this b
box to ensu
ure the LVB
BD only clo
oses
(reconne
ects) if the battery te
emperature
e than the high temperature lim
mit
defined in the BattteryTemp alarm
a
moniitor
Alarm Conf.
C
> Batttery > Batttery Alarrm Configu
uration > B
BatteryTem
mp
•
Battery
B
Tab
ble – the Ba
attery Tab
ble contain
ns discharg
ge specifica
ations for tthe
batteries
b
co
onnected to
t the system. It is ac
ccessed by
y clicking o
on the Edit
battery
b
tab
ble button on
o the Con
nfiguration
n page of th
he Battery
y section.
System
S
Conf. > Battery > Conffiguration
n > Edit Ba ttery Tablle
Figure 4.21 – Battery
y Table – Use
e predefined table
o Use Elte
ek predefin
ned battery
y - Check tthe box to u
use the Elttek Standa
ard
battery table,
t
whic
ch is based on averag
ge discharg
ge characte
eristics fro
om a
variety battery
b
ma
anufacturerrs; discharg
ge perform
mance and battery
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
110
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
characte
eristics are
e based on percent va
alues rathe
er than amps. As suc
ch,
this table should only be used
d if the discharge datta for the b
batteries is
s
unknown
n and the use
u of estim
mated valu
ues is acce
eptable. Ch
hecking this
box removes the editable
e
batttery table
e fields. Leave the bo
ox uncheck
ked
to use an existing battery
b
tab
ble or to co
onfigure th
he battery ttable
manually
y.
The
T followin
ng figure sh
hows the configurabl
c
le Battery Table wind
dow;
Figure 4.22
4
– Batterry Table Page
e – Table Dettails
o Templatte Options - Drop-dow
wn list of ba
attery tables that are
e loaded in
n the
controlle
er. As of th
he writing of
o this guid
de, templattes are ava
ailable for tthe
following
g batteries
s: FIAMM SLA 100 and
d Exide/GN
NB Maratho
on®
M12V15
55FT. The <empty
<
tab
ble> option
n can be se
elected to clear the
current battery
b
tab
ble.
■ Load Table - Aftter making
g a selectio
on in the Te
emplate Op
ptions list, click
this button
b
to lo
oad the tab
ble template
o Modify table
t
– the buttons in
n this section are for editing the
e battery ta
able
■ Edit table
t
– clic
ck this buttton to edit the existin
ng table ce
ells. The ta
able
is nott editable until
u
this bu
utton is clic
cked.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
System Configuration
111
■ Add row – click this button to add a row after the row with the black
arrow
■ Delete row – click this button to delete the row with the black arrow
o Table Details – window that shows the full battery discharge table
NOTE: If the table fails to load completely, click the Refresh icon in the lower
right of the Battery table window (circle with arrow).
■ Description – field for typing a description of the batteries or battery
table used
■ End volt – end-of-discharge voltage parameters (voltage per cell):
High and Low
■ High [V/cell] – the highest end-of-discharge voltage specification
provided by the battery manufacturer
■ Low [V/cell] – the lowest end-of-discharge voltage specification
provided by the battery manufacturer
■ # - battery table row number
■ Minutes – the discharge time in minutes
■ Current Ref1 – battery current (in amps) specified by the battery
manufacturer for the High [V/cell] end-of-discharge voltage at the
minutes indicated in the Minutes column
■ Current Ref2 – battery current (in amps) specified by the battery
manufacturer for the Low [V/cell] end-of-discharge voltage at the
minutes indicated in the Minutes column
NOTE: The alarm monitors BatteryQuality and BatteryTotCap use the
data from the Current Ref1 column of the battery table. The alarm
monitors BatteryRemCap and BatteryTimeLeft use the data from the
Current Ref2 column of the battery table.
o File operation – window for uploading and downloading battery tables
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
112
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 4..23 – Battery Table Page
e – File Opera
ation
■ Selec
ct battery table file (.tbl)
(
for up
ploading to
o server – this is the
section for uplo
oading a ba
attery table
e file (with extension .tbl) to the
e
contrroller. Use the Brows
se… button
n to locate the file on the compu
uter.
Use the
t Upload
d file button to upload
d the file to
o the contrroller.
■ Down
nload batte
ery table (.tbl)
(
and ssave to file
e – this is th
he section for
down
nloading th
he battery table
t
from the contro
oller to the
e computerr.
Click the Save to
t file… buttton to sellect the do
ownload loc
cation on the
puter.
comp
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
System Configuration
C
n
113
TempComp
The Tem
mpComp pa
age is for setting
s
batttery tempe
erature compensatio
on.
Figure 4.24 – Battery – Temperature
T
e Configuratiion Page
•
Temperatu
T
re compen
nsation – ch
heck this b
box to enab
ble battery
y temperatture
compensation
•
Minimum
M
co
ompensation voltage
e – minimum
m charging
g voltage p
per battery
y cell
•
Maximum
M
compensat
c
tion voltag
ge – maxim um chargin
ng voltage per batterry
cell
•
Reference
R
voltage
v
– charging
c
vo
oltage per battery ce
ell as recom
mmended b
by
th
he battery manufacturer; this is
s the same
e field as Re
eference v
voltage (Ce
ell)
under Syste
em Conf. > Power Sy
ystem > P
Power Systtem > System Volta
ages
•
Reference
R
temperatu
t
ure – tempe
erature (in degrees Celsius) for the
re
ecommend
ded chargin
ng voltage specified b
by the batttery manuffacture
•
Temperatu
T
re slope – compensation factorr in milliVollts per degree Celsius
s per
battery
b
celll (mV/°C/ce
ell) recomm
mended by
y the battery manufacturer
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
114
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Current Limitt
The Currrent Limit page is for configurin
ng current limits on b
battery cha
arging.
Figurre 4.25 – Batttery – Curren
nt Limit Page
•
Battery
B
currrent limita
ation – che
eck this box
x to enable
e current limits on
battery
b
cha
arging
NOTE:
N
Strin
ng current limitation and
a Rectifiier capacity
y limitation
n can only be
enabled if Battery
B
current limitattion is enabled first.
•
String
S
curre
ent limitattion – check this box tto enable c
current lim
mit on batte
ery
strings; Batttery curren
nt limitatio
on must be enabled first
•
Mains
M
feed current lim
mit – the maximum
m
ch
harge curre
ent (in amp
ps) to perm
mit
fo
or charging
g the batte
eries when the system
m is powerred by ac utility (main
ns)
in
nput
•
Generator
G
feed
f
curren
nt limit – the maximu
um charge current (in
n amps) to
permit
p
for charging
c
th
he batteries
s when the
e system iss powered by a generrator
•
Rectifier
R
ca
apacity limitation – check this b
box to enab
ble battery
y charge
current limitts based on total rectifier capac
city
•
Rectifier
R
ca
apacity limit – the ma
aximum pe rcentage o
of total rec
ctifier capa
acity
to
o use for battery cha
arge curren
nt
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
System Configuration
C
n
115
Symm
metry
The Sym
mmetry page is for co
onfiguring battery sy
ymmetry m
monitoring.
Figure 4.2
26 – Battery
y – Symmetry
y Monitoring Page
NOTE: Battery
B
sym
mmetry mo
onitoring re
equires sym
mmetry inp
puts. In add
dition, each
h
symmettry monitorring input alarm
a
moniitor must c
configured under the correspon
nding
Alarm Configuratio
C
on section..
•
Symmetry
S
monitoring
m
g – check this
t
box to enable batttery symm
metry
monitoring
m
•
Symmetry
S
voltage
v
– select
s
the symmetry voltage th
hat the batttery
monitoring
m
leads shou
uld detect, depending
g on the sy
ymmetry co
onfiguration
employed. For examp
ple, if using 12V batte
ery blocks, select:
12V for bloc
ck configuration in a 48V string
g
24V
2
for mid
d-point and double mid-point con
nfiguration
ns in a 48V
V string
12V for mid
d-point or block
b
config
gurations in
n a 24V strring
•
Symmetry
S
mode
m
– sellect the sy
ymmetry m
mode, which
h indicates when
symmetry measureme
m
ents are ta
aken:
o Continuo
ous – batte
ery symme
etry measu
urements a
are taken c
continuouslly
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
116
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
o Discharg
ge – batterry symmetry measure
ements are
e taken only during
battery discharge
d
•
Discharge
D
delay
d
– time in minute
es to wait a
after a batttery discharge begin
ns
before
b
startting batterry symmetry measure
ements
Boostt
The Boo
ost page is for configuring batte
ery boost ((fast charg
ge).
Figure
e 4.27 – Batttery – Boost S
Settings Pag
ge
NOTE: Boost
B
charrging must be configu
ured accord
ding to the
e battery m
manufacturrer’s
specific
cations. Do
o not boostt charge if the
t battery
y manufac
cturer does
s not
recomm
mend it.
•
Battery
B
boo
ost setting
gs
o Boost vo
oltage – fie
eld for the boost charrge voltage
e per batte
ery cell. Bo
oost
voltage must be higher than float (or Re
eference) v
voltage an
nd lower than
hutdown (O
OVS) value
es, which arre set on the System
m
the overr voltage sh
Conf. > Power Sys
stem > Power Syste
em > Syste
em Voltag
ges page.
NOTE: This
T
is the same
s
field as the Boo
ost voltage
e field on the System
m
Voltages page.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
System Configuration
117
o Current threshold – optional field for setting a minimum charge current. If
the battery charge current drops below the Current threshold, then
battery boost charging is stopped. Check the Enable box to enable this
feature.
o Follow-up voltage – voltage to maintain following the end of a boost
charge before reverting to float (or Reference) voltage; check the Enable
box to enable this feature.
o Follow-up duration – time in minutes to maintain Follow-up voltage (if
enabled) before reverting to float (or Reference) voltage.
o Temperature compensation – check this box to enable temperature
compensation (TempComp) during battery boost charging.
•
Manual boost max duration - specify the maximum duration (in minutes) of a
boost charge that is started manually
NOTE: The command to start and stop battery boost charge manually is
under the Commands section (Commands > Battery)
•
Interval boost – check this box to enable interval (or scheduled) boost
charging.
o Max duration – specify the maximum duration (in minutes) of an interval
(or scheduled) boost charge.
o Next start date [yyyy-mm-dd] – the date for the start of the next
scheduled battery boost charge
o Next start date [hh:mm] – the time for the start of the next scheduled
battery boost charge (24-hour clock format, HH:MM)
o Interval period – the number of days between scheduled battery boost
charges
•
Automatic boost – check this box to enable automatic battery boost
charging based on a battery discharge threshold
o Max duration – specify the maximum duration (in minutes) of an
automatic boost charge.
o Charge factor – percentage of the battery capacity that was discharged
to recharge using boost charging. Once the specified percentage of
battery discharge is boost charged, then Automatic boost charging stops.
The Charge factor can be greater than 100% since the percentage
represents only discharged amp-hours. Range: 60% - 150%
o Discharge threshold – total battery capacity (in amp-hours) discharged by
the batteries before Automatic boost charging starts. Range: 0 – 1000
Ah
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
118
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
NOTE: Entering
E
a zero
z
(0) dis
sables the A
Automatic
c boost feature.
o Voltage Threshold
d – low batttery voltag
ge threshold at which
h Automatic
boost ch
harging sta
arts. Check
k the Enablle box to enable this feature.
Equalize
The Equ
ualize page
e is for configuring ba
attery equa
alize charging (rebala
ancing batttery
cells).
Figure 4.28 – Batte
ery – Equalize
e Settings Pa
age
•
Battery
B
equ
ualize setttings – para
ameters fo
or battery e
equalize ch
harging
o Equalize
e voltage – field for th
he equalize
e charge vo
oltage per battery ce
ell.
Equalize voltage must
m
be higher than flloat (or Refference) vo
oltage and
lower than the ove
er voltage shutdown
s
((OVS) values (System
m Conf. >
Power System
S
> Power
P
Sys
stem > Sysstem Volta
ages)
o Current threshold – optional field for se
etting a minimum cha
arge curren
nt. If
the batttery charge
e current drops below
w the Curre
ent thresho
old, then
battery equalize
e
ch
harging is stopped.
s
C
Check the E
Enable box
x to enable
e this
feature.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
System Configuration
119
o Follow-up voltage – voltage to maintain following the end of an equalize
charge before reverting to float (or Reference) voltage; check the Enable
box to enable this feature.
o Follow-up duration – time in minutes to maintain Follow-up voltage (if
enabled) before reverting to float (or Reference) voltage.
o Temperature compensation – check this box to enable temperature
compensation (TempComp) during battery equalize charging.
•
Manual boost max duration – specify the maximum duration (in minutes) of
an equalize charge that is started manually
NOTE: The command to start and stop battery equalize charge manually is
under the Commands section (Commands > Battery)
•
Interval Equalize – parameters for automated equalize charging
o Interval boost – check this box to enable interval (or scheduled) equalize
charging.
o Max duration – specify the maximum duration (in minutes) of an interval
(or scheduled) equalize charge.
o Next start date [yyyy-mm-dd] – the date for the start of the next
scheduled battery equalize charge
o Next start date [hh:mm] – the time for the start of the next scheduled
battery equalize charge (24-hour clock format, HH:MM)
o Interval period – the number of days between scheduled battery equalize
charges
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
120
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Test
The Tes
st page is for
f configuring batterry discharg
ge testing.
Figure 4.29
4
– Batterry – Test Con
nfiguration P
Page
•
Battery
B
Tes
st Configuration – pa
age for settting param
meters for b
battery tes
sts
o Test typ
pe – select a either a Simplified Test or a N
Normal Test (see
definitions in the Glossary)
G
o End volttage – volta
age per cell at which battery discharge te
esting is to
stop
o Max duration – tim
me in minutes that a d
discharge ttest is to la
ast. Check the
Enable box
b to enab
ble this fea
ature.
o Max disc
charge – maximum
m
ba
attery capacity in am
mp-hours th
hat is to be
e
discharg
ged before stopping a battery discharge te
est. Check
k the Enable
box to enable this feature.
F the Sim
mple Test, iff either Ma
ax duration
n or Max diischarge arre
NOTE: For
reached before End
d voltage, then the ttest is regisstered as ““good”. If E
End
voltage is reached
d first, then
n the battery discharg
ge test is registered a
as
“bad”.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
System Configuration
121
NOTE: Under Normal Test, battery discharge results are evaluated only if
the test is stopped by reaching End voltage. Results are discarded if a
test is terminated due to reaching Max duration or any other reasons
(such as manually stopping the test).
o Guard time – the number of hours that a battery test should be delayed
after a loss of AC input (mains) power. Check the Enable box to enable
this feature. Range: 0 - 1000
•
Interval test – check the Enable box to enable interval (or scheduled) battery
discharge testing.
o Next start date [yyyy-mm-dd] – the date for the start of the next
scheduled battery discharge test
o Next start date [hh:mm] – the time for the start of the next scheduled
battery discharge test (24-hour clock format, HH:MM)
o Interval period – the number of days between scheduled battery
discharge tests
o Alternative interval test schedule – check the Enable box to invert the
Inhibit months schedule, inhibiting tests for the months that are not
checked in the Inhibit months box
o Inhibit months – check the Enable box to enable this feature, which
prevents battery discharge testing for the months that are selected in
the window below it (January – December); in a Windows environment,
hold the Control key of the keyboard to select multiple months. This
feature is useful for areas with hot summer months, where it would be
unwise to intentionally discharge batteries in elevated heat conditions.
•
Automatic test – check the Enable box to enable battery discharge testing
after loss of ac input (mains) power.
NOTE: Data for an automatic test is recorded only if the End voltage is
reached.
•
Discontinuance test – check this box to enable discontinuance testing,
which is used to detect unbalanced battery strings
NOTE: Discontinuance test is an advanced battery feature that is used to
detect defective or failed battery cells in unbalanced battery strings. It
requires at least two battery strings and a separate shunt in each string. The
Discontinuance test is not covered in this document.
o Repeat frequency – the number days between discontinuance tests
o Max duration – maximum duration (in minutes) of each discontinuance
test. Range: 1-10
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
122
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
NOTE: The
T Discontinuance test
t
uses t he Next sttart date [y
yyyy-mm-d
dd]
parametter from the Interval test sectio
on.
NOTE: The
T other battery
b
tes
sts have priority over the Discon
ntinuance ttest.
NOTE: Discontinua
D
ance testin
ng does nott start if to
otal battery
y current is
s
less than
n 5% of the
e battery shunt
s
value
e.
Control Systtem
The Con
ntrol Syste
em page is for configu
uring contrroller units and CAN N
Nodes.
Comm
munication
The Com
mmunication page is for setting
g communication prottocols for c
controllers
s
that sup
pport Mode
em Callbac
ck (like the Smartpac
ck2 Basic In
ndustrial).
Figure 4.30 – Control System
S
– Co mmunication
n Page
NOTE: Eltek
E
contrrollers are configured
d for proprietary communication
n protocols
s.
Please contact
c
Elttek if contrroller comm
munication s require re
econfigura
ation.
•
Choose
C
con
ntrol unit – drop-down
n list of controller units that can be
configured
•
Communica
C
ations portt – drop-down list of c
communica
ations portts on the
controller unit selecte
ed
NOTE:
N
The following
f
parameters
p
s are only c
configurablle with an a
admin login
n.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
System Configuration
•
123
Protocol – communication protocol for the controller; the selection in the
drop-down list depends on the communication ports available on the
controller (e.g., RS485 and RS232)
o pComm – Eltek’s proprietary communication protocol
o Modbus – protocol for communication using the RS485 port of a controller
unit
o Callback – Eltek’s proprietary protocol developed for communication
using the RS232 port of a controller unit with third-party modems
•
Speed (bps) – bit rate of communication (bits per second)
•
Data bits – the number of data bits in each character for the communication
protocol selected
•
Stop bits – number of stop bits at the end of each character in the
communication protocol selected
•
Parity – error-detection bits in the communication protocol selected
•
Address – device address for the Modbus protocol only
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
124
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Modem CallBa
ack
The Mod
dem Callba
ack page is
s for config
guring a controller to dial an extternal or
remote modem.
Figure 4.31
1 – Control Sy
ystem – Mod
dem Callback
k Page (and IInterval Dialu
up Tab)
T Modem
m Callback feature on
nly appearss in the We
eb Interface
e if a contrroller
NOTE: The
that sup
pports mod
dem callback is conne
ected. The
e Smartpac
ck2 Basic In
ndustrial,
Smartpa
ack S, and SmartNode units currrently sup
pport mode
em callback
k. Please se
ee
the user guides fo
or those units to dete
ermine the proper con
nnections a
and equipm
ment
d.
required
•
Modem
M
Calllback setu
up
o Choose control
c
unit– select a controlle
er module; o
only contro
ollers that
support Modem Ca
allback are
e listed
o Enable modem
m
callback– che
eck this box to enable
e the Mode
em Callbac
ck
feature
o Advance
ed– button
n to open a page for m
more advan
nced mode
em setup,
especially if a modem require
es some lev
vel of customization. Admin log
gin
is require
ed. It is nott normally necessary
n
to reconfig
gure any fiields on thiis
page; it is
i intended
d for advan
nced users only! Click
k the Back button to
return to
o the Mode
em CallBac
ck setup pa
age.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
System Configuration
C
n
125
Figurre 4.32 – Mod
dem Callback
k – Advanced
d Setup Page
e (admin only
y)
o Phone number X– numeric fie
eld to ente
er the phon
ne number of a modem
m to
dial
o Interval dialup– ch
heck this bo
ox to enab
ble dialing o
of the phon
ne number at
regular intervals (a
as defined under
u
the IInterval Dialup tab att the botto
om
of the pa
age)
o Data– ch
heck this ra
adio button
n to enable
e data calling (for a data modem
m)
instead of
o SMS me
essaging
o SMS– ch
heck this ra
adio button
n to enable
e SMS messsaging (forr a GSM
modem) instead off data callin
ng
NOTE: Data and SM
MS are muttually exclu
usive optio
ons.
NOTE: SMS is only available iff a GSM mo
odem is enabled unde
er the GSM
M tab
ottom of th
he page.
at the bo
•
In
nterval Dia
alup (tab) – tab to con
nfigure inte
erval dialin
ng as a “hea
artbeat” sig
gnal
to
o the netw
work monito
oring location
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
126
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 4.33 – Modem Callback – Interval Dialup Tab
NOTE: Phone numbers to be used for Interval Dialup must have their Interval
dialup box checked.
o Enable interval dialup– check this box to enable the Interval Dialup
feature
o Start time– enter the start time for the initial Interval Dialup call; the first
field is for the hour (24-hour clock), and the second field is for the minute
o Interval (hours)– enter the number of hours to pass between each
interval dialup. The maximum value is 8760 (one year).
o Site message– free-form field for a message to send with each interval
call. The full interval message also includes the Site Location name and
timestamp.
NOTE: The format for the interval dialup message is as follows:
[Site location]
[Date and time]
[Site message]
•
Alarm Dialup (tab) – tab to configure dialing modem numbers when an alarm
is triggered
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
127
4.34 – Modem Callback – Alarm Dialup Tab
o Enable alarm dialup – check this box to enable the Alarm Dialup feature
o Number of dial attempts – number of times to dial the phone number if
connection fails
o Dial interval (sec) – wait time after dialing a phone number. If there is no
connection established, then the next number is dialed (if applicable)
o Alarm check interval (min) – time to wait before checking for a system
alarm. Longer polling times are recommended to avoid rejecting incoming
calls.
NOTE:Alarm groups must be mapped to the phone channels of the
controller in order to execute the Alarm Dialup feature. The phone
channels are found at the following location:
Alarm Conf. > Power System >Outputs > [Select Unit]
Select the appropriate controller unit to see the phone channels.
•
GSM (tab) – tab for configuring dialing GSM modems, thereby enabling SMS
messaging
4.35 – Modem Callback – GSM Tab
o Enable GSM – check this box to enable the GSM modem feature
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
128
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
NOTE: If the modem has SIM lock enabled, do not enable the GSM feature
until after sending the SIM PIN code (REFERENCE BELOW)
o Sim facilities – box for configuring SIM security for the GSM modem
o SIM pin code – field for the SIM PIN code of the GSM modem
o Send pin code – button to send the SIM PIN code to the modem to enable
communication between the devices
NOTE: If the modem’s SIM card has SIM lock enabled, then the PIN must be
sent before enabling GSM functionality; otherwise the modem may lock,
preventing further communication until the modem is unlocked (which
cannot be done from the controller).
o Enable SIM lock – command to enable or disable the SIM lock feature of
the GSM modem. The PIN code must be sent first in order to change the
SIM lock status.
o Network status – box for indicating the signal strength of the radio link
and status of the network
o Signal strength – indicates the strength of the radio link
o Network status – indicates the network status, including the possible
cause of any communication problems
Outdoor
The Outdoor page is for configuring outdoor cabinet fan monitoring through an I/O
Monitor Type 1 or Type 3. This page only appears when an I/O Monitor Type 1 or
Type 3 is connected.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
C
n
129
4.36 - Control System
ms – Outdoorr Settings Pa
age and Fan C
Configuration Tab
•
Outdoor
O
setttings – se
elect the I/O Monitor (Type 1 or Type 3) to
o configure (I/O
unit X)
•
Fan
F controll X (1 and 2)
2 – fan con
ntrol config
guration pa
anes for up
p to two
connected outdoor
o
ca
abinet fans
s
o Inhibit “S
SpeedDev”” when Rellay X is acttive – chec
ck this box to inhibit tthe
speed de
eviation ala
arm monito
or (SpeedD
Dev) when tthe FanControl X.Y
output relay (outpu
ut relay 5 or
o 6) is actiivated
•
Configurati
C
ion – fan co
onfiguratio
on tab
o Fan conffiguration
■ Temp
perature – column for temperatture valuess for the Lo
ow point an
nd
High point parameters
■ Speed – percen
ntage of the fan’s ope
erational sp
peed for th
he
temp
perature po
oints speciffied
■ Low point
p
– low
w temperatture fan speed setting
■ High point – hig
gh tempera
ature fan speed setting
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
130
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
NOTE: By default, the fan speed for both temperature points is set at
50%. This feature uses the high and low points to create a linear slope
to adjust fan speed as temperatures increase and decrease.
■ Max fan speed – temperature in degrees Celsius at which the fan
should reach maximum speed. Check the Enable box to enable this
feature.
■ Temperature input – select the temperature input to use for this fan’s
speed control parameters
o Calibration – fan calibration tab; this function permits changing the
default voltage-to-speed relationship used to control fan speed. By
default, the low calibration point is configured to zero percent speed (0%)
being zero volts (0V); high calibration point is configured to 100 percent
speed (100%) being ten volts (10V).
In order to convert the fan speed (tachometer) inputs to the correct
percentage speed, the inputs must be configured with the number of
pulses per revolution (ppr) and the maximum fan speed (rpm), using the
Configuration tab of the alarm monitor input.
Figure 4.37 – Fan Control – Calibration Tab
■ Low calibration point (default: 0V = 0%)
□ Speed[%] – field to enter a percentage for speed control; click the
Enable button in order to edit the field. Default is zero (0%).
□ Voltage[V] – field to enter a voltage value for speed control; click
the Apply button to apply the voltage value entered. Default is
zero volts (0V).
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
131
■ High calibration point (default: 10V = 100%)
□ Speed[%] – field to enter a percentage for speed control; click the
Enable button in order to edit the field. Default is 100%.
□ Voltage[V] – field to enter a voltage value for speed control; click
the Apply button to apply the voltage value entered. Default is ten
volts (10V).
o Pressure – internal pressure testing for outdoor cabinets to determine
whether or not fan filters need to be replaced. During the test, the I/O
Monitor increasing fan speed to 100% for ten seconds. If the pressure
sensor detects high pressure, an alarm is triggered.
REQUIREMENTS: A pressure sensor configured to send an alarm signal
above a certain air pressure threshold (in Pascals) is needed; it must be
connected to a programmable input of an I/O Monitor.
Figure 4.38 – Fan Control – Pressure Tab
■ Interval pressure Test – check the Enable box to enable a periodic
pressure test
□ Next start date – enter the date for the next test to start (format
YYYY-MM-DD); or use the calendar button next to the field
□ Next start time – enter the time in (hours and minutes; HH:MM, 24hour clock format) to begin the pressure test
□ Interval period – number of days between each pressure test
o Humidity – humidity reduction control; requires a temperature sensor,
humidity sensor, and heater (on I/O Monitor alarm relay output 1)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
132
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 4.39 – Fan Control – Humidity Tab
■ Humidity Reduction – check the Enable box to enable humidity
reduction control
□ Test mode – check the Enable box to enable test mode, which sets
the hours specified in the Time field to minutes (requires admin
login); this accelerates the normal operation to test the function of
the humidity control
□ Temperature – internal cabinet temperature (in degrees Celsius) at
which humidity control should terminate
□ Time – maximum run time (in hours) of the humidity reduction
control
Current Monitor
The Current Monitor page is for configuring Eltek Load Monitors, which have eight
configurable inputs for current monitoring. This page only appears if Eltek Load
Monitors are connected.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
C
n
133
Figure 4..40 – Currentt Monitor Co
onfiguration P
Page
•
Unit
U
to conffigure – list of Load Monitors
M
de
etected by
y the system controller
(n
not configu
urable)
NOTE:
N
Mon
nitors of the
e same typ
pe can appear on thiss list with d
different un
nit
names. For example, Eltek Load Monitors c
can appearr as CurrMo
onitor X an
nd
Load Monito
or X. The name
n
listed
d in this co
olumn is the
e same as that of the
e
Control
C
Units Summary pane off the Contr ol System button (on
n the Home
e
page).
p
•
Monitor
M
typ
pe – drop-d
down list off current m
monitor types:
o StdLoad
dmon – Standard Load
d Monitor, intended ffor load bra
anch circuitts
where th
he current only needs
s to be monitored and
d not used
d for any
calculatiions (like to
otal load cu
urrent); thiis is useful for fuse an
nd circuit
breaker shunts
A Load Monitor
M
con
nfigured as
s StdLoadm
mon appears as LoadPrimary X at
Alarm Conf.
C
> Pow
wer System
m > Load
NOTE: Load
L
Monito
ors set for StdLoadm
mon (load branch curre
ent)
monitoring must ha
ave the firs
st IDs in th e CAN bus chain.
o Load CurMon – Loa
ad Current Monitor, in
ntended for load shun
nts that ne
eed
to be summed for total
t
load current
c
callculations; this is useful for shunts
ys or other major distrribution po
oints where
e load curre
ent
located in load bay
branches off of a main
m
powerr bus.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
134
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
A Load Monitor configured as Load CurMonappears as LoadCurMon X at
Alarm Conf. > Power System > Load
o Rect CurMon– Rectifier Current Monitor, intended for monitoring shunts
on the output of non-Eltek rectifier bays or ferroresonant rectifiers. Eltek
rectifiers communicate output current directly to the controller and do
not need auxiliary shunts.
A Load Monitor configured as RectCurMon appears as RectCurMon X at
Alarm Conf. >Power System > Rectifiers
o DCDC CurMon – Dc-to-dc converter current monitor, intended for
monitoring current from non-Eltek dc-to-dc converters. Eltek dc-to-dc
converters communicate output current directly to the controller and do
not need auxiliary monitoring.
A Load Monitor configured as DCDC CurMon appears as DCDCCurMon X at
Alarm Conf. >Power System >DcDc Converter
o Solar CurMon – Solar charger current monitor, intended for monitoring
current from non-Eltek solar chargers. Eltek solar chargers communicate
output current directly to the controller and do not need auxiliary
monitoring.
A Load Monitor configured as Solar CurMon appears as Solar CurMon X at
Alarm Conf. >Power System > Solar Charger
o Wind CurMon – Wind charger current monitor
A Load Monitor configured as Wind CurMon appears as Wind CurMon X at
Alarm Conf. >Power System > Wind Charger
o FuelC CurMon – Fuel cell charger current monitor
A Load Monitor configured as FuelCCurMon appears as FuelCCurMon X at
Alarm Conf. >Power System >FuelCell Charger
•
System type – unit classification data (hardcoded)
•
System index – controller data; do not modify
•
Unit index – controller data; do not modify
•
Sub system – controller data; do not modify
•
Unit name – free-form field where the current monitor can be renamed. The
name entered here affects how the monitor appears under the respective
Alarm Configuration section (Alarm Conf. > Load)
•
Control unit index – the unit’s index number relative to all other units on the
CAN bus. The index range for Load Monitors is 49 – 62.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
135
Flexi Monitor
The Flexi Monitor page is for configuring Eltek Flexi Monitors, which have 16
configurable input channels for monitoring a variety of inputs, including current,
voltage, temperature, and relays.
Figure 4.41 – Flexi Monitor Configuration Page
•
Unit to configure – list of Flexi Monitors detected by the system controller
(not configurable)
•
Monitor type – drop-down list of current monitor types:
o StdFleximon – Standard Flexi Monitor, intended for load branch circuits
where the current only needs to be monitored and not used for any
calculations (like total load current); this is useful for fuse and circuit
breaker shunts
A Flexi Monitor configured as StdFleximon appears as ContrFlexMon X at
Alarm Conf. > Power System >Inputs
NOTE: Flexi Monitors set for StdFleximon (load branch current) monitoring
must have the first IDs in the CAN bus chain.
o BatteryFleximon – Battery Flexi Monitor, intended for battery shunts that
are to be summed for total load current calculations
A Flexi Monitor configured as BatteryFleximon appears as BattFlexMon X
at Alarm Conf. > Power System >Battery
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
136
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
o Load Fleximon – Load Flexi Monitor, intended for load shunts that need to
be summed for total load current calculations; this is useful for shunts
located in load bays or other major distribution points where load current
branches off of a main power bus.
A Flexi Monitor configured as LoadFleximon appears as Load FlexMon X
at Alarm Conf. > Power System >Load
o RectFleximon – Rectifier Flexi Monitor, intended for monitoring shunts on
the output of non-Eltek rectifier bays or ferroresonant rectifiers. Eltek
rectifiers communicate output current directly to the controller and do
not need auxiliary shunts.
A Flexi Monitor configured as RectFleximon appears as RectFlexMon X at
Alarm Conf. > Power System >Rectifiers
o DCDC Fleximon – Dc-to-dc converter current monitor, intended for
monitoring current from non-Eltek dc-to-dc converters. Eltek dc-to-dc
converters communicate output current directly to the controller and do
not need auxiliary monitoring.
A Flexi Monitor configured as DCDCFleximon appears as DCDC FlexMon X
at Alarm Conf. > Power System >DcDc Converter
o Solar Fleximon – Solar charger current monitor, intended for monitoring
current from non-Eltek solar chargers. Eltek solar chargers communicate
output current directly to the controller and do not need auxiliary
monitoring.
A Flexi Monitor configured as SolarFleximon appears as Solar FlexMon X
at Alarm Conf. > Power System >Solar Charger
o Wind Fleximon – Wind charger current monitor
A Flexi Monitor configured as Wind Fleximon appears as Wind FlexMon X
at Alarm Conf. > Power System > Wind Charger
o FuelCFleximon – Fuel cell charger current monitor
A Flexi Monitor configured as FuelCFleximon appears as FuelCFlexMon X
at Alarm Conf. > Power System >FuelCell Charger
•
System type – unit classification data (hardcoded)
•
System index – controller data; do not modify
•
Unit index – controller data; do not modify
•
Sub system – controller data; do not modify
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
137
•
Unit name – free-form field where the Flexi Monitor can be renamed. The
name entered here affects how the monitor appears under Alarm Conf. >
Load
•
Control unit index – the unit’s index number relative to all other units on the
CAN bus. The index range for Flexi Monitors is 65 – 78.
Data Log
The Data Log page is for configuring data logging parameters for supported
controller and monitoring units.
Figure 4.42 – Data Log Configuration Page
NOTE: Changing parameters on this page for the primary controller (e.g.,
Smartpack2 Master or Smartpack S) affects how data points are displayed on the
System History graph of the Home page.
•
Select Unit – drop-down list of controller and monitoring units connected to
the system that support data logging
•
Normal log interval – time interval (in minutes) between system data capture
when the controller is in Normal condition (i.e., not in critical condition)
•
Critical log interval – time interval (in minutes) between system data capture
when the controller is in Critical condition (which indicates that there is low
ac current (mains) and/or low battery current)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
138
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
•
Enable average values – check the Enable box to enable averaging, which
provides an average value for each 10 minute interval rather than an
instantaneous reading
•
Enable minor/major On-event triggered – check the Enable box to enable
event-triggered logging, where data is captured when minor and major alarm
events occur
•
Log if any value changes more than – percentage change of any value to
trigger data capture; enter zero (0) to disable this feature
License Keys
The License Keys page is intended for future implementation, where extended or
specialized controller features will be made accessible by license from Eltek; admin
permissions are required to view and modify this page.
Device Settings
The Device Settings section contains configurable parameters for the controller
device itself—particularly time, network, and user account settings.
Time Settings
The Time Settings page is for manually configuring the controller’s date and time
clocks.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
139
Figure 4.43 – Time Settings Configuration Page
•
Time [hh:mm] – current time, 24-hour clock format
•
Date [yyyy-mm-dd] – current date
•
Enable time server connection – Check the Enable box to enable automatic
time updates from a local network server; this box is the same as the Enable
time server connection box on the Timeserver page
NOTE: Further configuration is required under the Timeserver page under
Network Settings (a link is provided on the Time Settings page)
Network Settings
The Network Settings page is for setting controller parameters for use on a
computer network.
NOTE: Network settings require specific information about the network to which
the controller is to be connected. The local network/systems administrator should
be consulted for the required information.
NOTE: Admin login is required to make any changes to Network Settings.
TCP/IP
The TCP/IP page is for configuring the controller’s TCP/IP settings.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
140
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 4.44 – TCP/IP Setup Page (DHCP Enabled)
•
TCP/IP Setup
o DHCP – check the Enable box to enable automatic IP configuration by the
local network (if the network supports DHCP). If not enabled, then IP
settings must be configured manually.
NOTE: By default, Eltek controllers are shipped with a static IP address of
192.168.10.20.
•
Manual settings
NOTE: Manual configuration of the controller’s IP settings must be
appropriate for the network to which it is connected. The local
network/systems administrator should be consulted for correct
configuration.
o Agent IP Address – IPv4 address to assign to the controller
o Network Subnet Mask – field for the subnet mask
o Default Gateway – field for the default gateway (if required)
o DNS Server – field to specify a DNS server
o Device Name – free-form field to name the controller (this name appears
in the Name field of the controller when it appears in the Eltek Network
Utility)
NOTE: This is different from the Site field on the System Info page.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
141
o Force SSL protocol – check the Enable box to force connection through
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol; if left unchecked, SSL connection is
an option on the Login page
CAUTION: Checking the Enable box and saving the change immediately
ends the current session and returns the web interface to the Login page.
NOTE: To fully implement the Force SSL protocol option, it is necessary to
login once using the SSL connection. To do so, click on the Switch to SSL
link, and then log into the web interface by clicking on the SSL Login link.
Only afterward will the Switch to non-SSL link disappear from the SSL
Login page, requiring the use of the SSL Login link.
eMail
The eMail Page is for configuring the controller to send e-mail notifications to up to
two e-mail addresses using a local SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) network
server.
Figure 4.45 – E-mail Configuration Page
•
Mail Server Setup – setup section for SMTP parameters
o SMTP User Name – field for a user name to access the mail server
o SMTP Password – field for a password to access the mail server
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
142
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
NOTE: Alarm messages from the controller do not currently include the
User Name and Password; therefore, if the SMTP server requires
authentication, it may block Alarm messages from being delivered.
o SMTP Server ip-Address – IP address of the SMTP server to be used for email transmission
TIP: Ping the network to find the email server’s IP address.
o Sender e-mail Address – e-mail address for the controller to use as a
sender (can be fictitious)
•
Receiver Mail X (1 & 2)
o Receiver E-mail Address X – e-mail address that are to receive alarm and
interval e-mail messages from the controller
o Receive alarms – check this box to send alarm notices to the receiver email address
o Receive interval mail – check this box to send interval messages to the
receiver e-mail address
•
Alarm E-Mail Settings
NOTE: Alarm messages from the controller do not currently include the
User Name and Password; therefore, if the SMTP server requires
authentication, it may block Alarm messages from being delivered.
o Alarm mail Subject – subject line text for alarm e-mail messages sent by
the controller
o Send Off Alarm – check this box to enable sending a notice when an alarm
turns off (is no longer active)
•
Interval E-Mail Settings
o Interval Subject – subject line text for interval e-mail messages sent by
the controller
o Interval Attachment – name for the data file attached to the interval email address
NOTE: The data file sent as an attachment is a comma-separated values
(CSV) file with semi-colons as delimiters.
o Interval period (min) – time period (in minutes) between interval e-mail
messages
o Interval start time – time of day to begin sending interval e-mail
messages (24-hour format, HH:MM)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
143
Timeserver
The Timeserver page is for setting up a connection to a time server (NTP server).
Figure 4.46 – Timeserver Configuration Page
•
Enable time server connection – Check the Enable box to enable automatic
time updates from a local network server; this box is the same as the Enable
time server connection box on the Time Settings page
•
Clock synchronization Time-of-day – hour of the day to synchronize with the
time server (24-hour clock format, HH)
•
UTC Time zone Offset (+-12h) – time zone setting, using UTC offset (whole
number of hours)
•
NTP Server IP Address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) – IP address of NTP (Network Time
Protocol) server to use
•
Test connection – button to test connectivity with the NTP server; the result
appears to the right of the button
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
144
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Online Help
The Online Help page is provided to update the location of the online help file (from
Eltek).
Figure 4.47 – Online Help Configuration Page
CAUTION: Do not change this field without consulting Eltek first. This field directly
affects the link for the Help button in the top menu bar.
•
Online Help IP Address/URL – field for the location of Eltek’s Online Help File
SNMP Settings
The SNMP Settings page is for configuring the controller for interface with a
network that utilizes Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
NOTE: SNMP settings are for establishing the Eltek controller as an object on an
existing network. Any other details regarding the network, NMS, or SNMP
configuration for the installation site must be obtained from local network/systems
administration (IT) and associated documentation. This includes the SNMP version,
network settings, security protocols, and community strings.
NOTE: Admin login is required to make any changes to SNMP Settings.
Configurations
The Configuration page provides general parameters for use with SNMP.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
145
Figure 4.48 – SNMP Settings Page (SNMP-based configuration)
•
General SNMP Configuration
o Inhibit Traps – This feature is used in conjunction with the Block Outputs
command, which is intended for use during system service to prevent
false alarms from being transmitted. Enabling the Inhibit Traps field when
Block Outputs On is enabled prevents traps from being sent on the
network.
NOTE: The Block Outputs command times out if there is no user activity.
This command is only available through the display panel menu.
Main Menu > Commands > Block Outputs On
o Send Off Traps – Enabling this field sends a trap when an event or alarm
returns to normal status (i.e., when the alarm or notice turns "off").
o Trap Repeat Rate (minutes) – Interval in minutes of how frequently a trap
message should be sent when an event or alarm is in active status. Enter
the number zero ("0") to disable.
o Heartbeat Trap Repeat Rate (minutes) – Interval in minutes of how
frequently a heartbeat trap (signal) should be sent. Enter the number
zero ("0") to disable.
NOTE: Configuration options are available for SNMP v3, SNMP v1, and
SNMP v2c. Configure the appropriate settings for the SNMP version of
the network.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
146
•
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
SNMP
S
v3 Co
onfiguratio
on– configu
uration sec
ction for SN
NMPv3
o Web-bas
sed configu
uration – click
c
this ra
adio button
n to configu
ure SNMP
through the contro
oller’s web interface. This optio
on removes
s the “admiin”
user’s MIB write access.
o SNMP-ba
ased configuration – click this rradio butto
on to permit
configurration throu
ugh an SNM
MP manage
ement app
plication ratther than tthe
controlle
er’s web intterface. Se
electing th
his option resets the S
SNMP v3
configurration and reboots
r
the controlle
er.
CAUTION
N: Selectin
ng SNMP-b
based conffiguration rresets web
b-based
configurration information! Th
his reset ca
annot be re
eversed!
By defau
ult, the con
ntroller is set to SNMP
P-based co
onfiguratio
on, which
means that an SNM
MP manage
ement app
plication willl be used tto configurre
the conttroller's SNMP setting
gs rather th
han the controller's w
web interfa
ace.
Where permissible,, a Web-based config
guration option is available to
MP setting
gs through the web in
nterface.
configurre the conttroller's SNM
When the radio buttton is sele
ected, the ffollowing m
menus appear on the left
menu ba
ar:
USM Use
ers
Vacm Ac
ccess
V1/V2 Community
C
y
Traps
Fig
gure 4.49 – SNMP
S
Setting
gs Page (Web
b-based conffiguration)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
System Configuration
C
n
147
The follo
owing table illustrate
es the orde
er in which each page
e should be
e completed for
each ve
ersion of SN
NMP:
Table 4..3 - Web-Base
ed Configura
ation Page O
Order
o Reset SN
NMP v3 default configurationss – This buttton resets
s the defau
ult
SNMP co
onfiguration. It is esp
pecially use
eful if some
e condition
n has resultted
in the NM
MS being blocked
b
outt of the con
ntroller—iff, for instan
nce, all the
USM use
ers were ac
ccidentally deleted.
CAUTION
N: As with any "Rese
et" configurration com
mmand, all c
customized
d
settings are lost when
w
execu
uted. Addittionally, the
e controlle
er reboots
when this comman
nd is executed.
Fig
gure 4.50 – SNMPv3
S
Rese
et Warning
NOTE: The
T following pages only
o
appea
ar if Web-ba
ased configuration is
s selected
under SNMP v3 Co
onfiguratio
on:
USM Users
U
The USM
M Users pa
age is for se
etting up and
a configu
uring user a
accounts (User-based
d
Security
y Model). By
B default, the first fo
our accoun
nts (1-4) are set for sttandard SN
NMP
v3 users
s. Accountts 5 and 6 are set forr SNMP v2c
c and SNMP
P v1 netwo
orks,
respecttively. All user
u
accoun
nts can be modified.
NOTE: The
T precon
nfigured SN
NMP v3 use
er accountts can be edited, but only the
Authenttication and Privacy protocols
p
and
a passph
hrases can be change
ed for the
accountts. The pre
econfigured
d SNMP v2
2c/v1 acco
ounts can o
only be view
wed, not
edited.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
148
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 4.51 – USM Users Page
•
# - User account number
•
User Name – User name for each account
•
Authentication Protocol – SNMPv3 authentication protocols (MD5, SHA1); a
passphrase field is available in setup
•
Privacy Protocol – SNMPv3 privacy protocols (DES, AES); a passphrase field is
available in setup
•
Security Group – security level for the user. The following levels are
available for the SNMP versions:
Table 4.4 – Security Groups for SNMP Versions
SNMP Version
Security Group
Description
SNMP v3
admin-group
Admin access (level 3)
SNMP v3
readwrite-group
Control access (level 2)
SNMP v3
readonly-group
Status access (level 1)
SNMP v2c
snmpv2c-group
SNMP v2c support only
SNMP v1/v2c
snmpv12c
SNMP v2c and SNMP v1 support
SNMP v1
snmpv1-group
SNMP v1 support only
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
C
n
•
149
Delete
D
– Click the Dele
ete button
n to delete the user account row
w.
CAUTION:
C
The
T preconfigured acc
counts can
n be delete
ed! Deletio
ons of
preconfigur
p
red accoun
nts can only
y be reverssed by rese
etting the S
SNMP v3
default configurations
s, which can be done either by sselecting th
he SNMPbased
b
confiiguration button or cllicking the Reset SNM
MP v3 default
configuratio
ons button
n on the Configuration
n page.
•
Edit
E
– click the
t Edit bu
utton to ed
dit an SNMP
P v3 user a
account row
w (SNMP v
v2c
and SNMP v1
v accountts cannot be
b edited); click the V
View button
n to view and
SNMP
S
v2c or
o SNMP v1
1 user acco
ount; click tthe New bu
utton to crreate a new
w
account (ma
aximum off 10 accoun
nts)
Edit/View SNMP
S
User profile Win
ndows (onlly Authenttication and
d Privacy
protocols
p
an
nd passphrrases for SNMP
S
v3 ca
an be edite
ed)
Figure 4.52
2 – SNMP Acc
counts – Editt and View W
Windows
•
New
N
– Click
k the New button
b
to create
c
a ne
ew user acc
count.
o Select Security
S
Mo
odel – select SNMP ve
ersion v3, v
v2c, or v1; click the
Continue
e… button to proceed
d
NOTE: The
T SNMP version
v
can
nnot be cha
anged onc
ce the Conttinue… buttton
is clicked
d. If the ve
ersion need
ds to be changed, clo
ose the SNM
MP User
profile window
w
witthout savin
ng; then, cliick the New
w button to start ove
er.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
150
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 4.53 – New SNMP User Profile Window
o SNMP v3 User Profile Configuration
■ USM User Name – free-form text field for entering a user name
■ Security Group – security level to assign to the user
The default SNMP v3 user names reflect the three security levels of
Eltek controllers: admin (Administrator), control, and status.
o Authentication and Privacy
■ Security Level – currently, Authentication and Privacy (AuthPriv) is the
only available security level for SNMP v3, so this parameter cannot be
changed.
■ Auth protocol – authentication protocol to use: MD5 or SHA1
■ Auth passphrase – passphrase for authentication (required)
■ Priv protocol – privacy protocol to use: DES or AES
■ Priv passphrase – passphrase for privacy (required)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
C
n
151
Figure 4.54 – SNMPv3 Us
ser Profile Co
onfiguration
n Window
o SNMP v1
1/v2c
■ USM User Name
e – free-form text fie
eld for ente
ering a userr name
■ Security Group – security
y level to asssign to the user
o Commun
nity String
gs – list of Community
C
y Names associated with the us
ser
profile; all
a Commun
nity Names
s configure
ed for the u
user profile
e on the
V1/V2 Community
C
y page app
pear here
■ Comm
munity Name 1 –one Communitty Name can be conffigured durring
the fiirst setup of
o the SNM
MP User pro
ofile. This Communitty Name an
nd
more
e are config
gurable on the V1/V2
2 Communiity page; th
hey cannott be
edite
ed from the
e SNMP Use
er profile w
window aftter first settup.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
152
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 4.55 – SNMPv1/v2c User Profile Configuration Window
Vacm Access
The Vacm Access page is for setting view access administration, where read, write,
and notify permissions are defined for security groups.
Figure 4.56 – Vacm Access Configuration Page
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
153
•
# - security group row number
•
Security Group Name – name of the security group (same as Security Group
in the User Profile Configuration windows of the USM Users page)
•
Security Model – SNMP security model version (3, 2, or 1)
•
Security Level – security level, reflecting the three security levels of Eltek
controllers (1=status, 2=control, 3=admin)
•
Read View – access level for read permissions
•
Write View – access level for write permissions (level 3 security only)
•
Notify View – access level for notifications
•
Edit – click the Edit button to edit the Read View, Write View, and Notify
View columns of the security group row
V1/V2 Community
The V1/V2 Community Page is for configuring SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c community
strings.
Figure 4.57 – V1/V2 Community Configuration Page
•
# - community string number
•
Community Name – name of community string for SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c
authentication; once the initial setup of a community string is complete, only
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
154
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
the Community Name is editable. After configuration, the Community Name
appears on the Community Strings list of the associated User Name.
•
User Name – user name to which the Community Name is assigned; user
names must be set up on the USM Users page before they can be assigned
on the V1/V2 Community page.
•
Trap Format – SNMP trap format, determined by the Security Model selected
during setup of the community string
•
Delete – button for deleting the community string row
•
Edit – click the Edit button to edit the Community Name field (no other fields
are editable after setup); click the New button to add another community
string.
o SNMP Community String – window for configuring a new community
string (SNMP v1/v2C)
■ MP Model – select the appropriate SNMP version for the community
string (either v2c or v1; changes to Security Model on the following
page)
Figure 4.58 – SNMP Security Model Selection Window
■ User Name – select one of the SNMP v2c or SNMP v1 user names
(which come from the USM Users page)
■ Community Name – enter a name for the community string
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
155
Figure 4.59 – SNMP Community String Configuration
Traps
The Traps page is for configuring IP addresses of trap receivers (hosts) for traps
sent by the Eltek controller. By default several rows are set up as examples for
each SNMP version with IP address 127.0.0.1 (localhost). All rows can be deleted
and/or edited.
Figure 4.60 – Traps Configuration Page
•
# - trap receiver number
•
IP Address – target IP address of the trap host to receive trap messages
from the controller
•
Port Number – target port number of the trap receiver
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
156
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
•
SNMP Version – SNMP version of the trap host (v3, v2c, or 1)
•
Trap Community – community string for the trap, which comes from
Community Name strings set on the V1/V2 Community page; this field only
applies to SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c.
•
USM User name – user name from the USM Users page; only applies to SNMP
v3 (since v3 has no community strings).
•
Delete – click the Delete button to delete the trap receiver
•
Edit Row – click the Edit Row button to edit the trap receiver row (only the
SNMP version cannot be edited); click the New Row button to add another
trap receiver.
o SNMP Trap Receiver Configuration – window for creating and editing trap
receivers (hosts)
o SNMP v3
■ Trap profile configuration
□ MP Model – SNMP version (not editable after initial configuration);
during initial configuration, select the appropriate SNMP version
and click the Continue… button.
Figure 4.61 – SNMP Trap Model Selection (SNMPv3)
□ Target IP Address – field for the receiver’s IPv4 address
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
157
□ Target IP Port – field for the receiver’s IP port
■ Select USM User
□ User Name– For SNMP v3 only, select the user name (which comes
from the USM Users page)
Figure 4.62 – SNMP Trap Receiver Configuration (SNMPv3)
o SNMP v1/v2c
■ Trap profile configuration
□ MP Model – SNMP version (not editable after initial configuration);
during initial configuration, select the appropriate SNMP version
and click the Continue… button.
□ Target IP Address – field for the receiver’s IPv4 address
□ Target IP Port – field for the receiver’s IP port
■ Select Community String
□ Community Name – For SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c, select the
community string (which comes from the V1/V2 Community page)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
158
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figu
ure 4.63 – SN
NMP Trap Re
eceiver Config
guration (SN
NMPv1/v2c)
User Accoun
nts
The Use
er Accountts page is for
f adding and
a modify
ying user accounts. T
The main U
User
Accounts page provides info
ormation on
n the curre
ent user an
nd allows changing th
he
password.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
System Configuration
159
Figure 4.64 – User Accounts Configuration Page
NOTE: Admin login is required to make any changes to User Account settings,
except for the current user’s password.
•
User Accounts
o Current User Name – field that identifies the current user (not editable)
o Access Level - field that identifies the current user’s access level (not
editable)
•
Change Password
o Enter current – field for the current password
o Enter new – field for a new password
o Re-enter new – second field for verifying the new password (must be the
same as the Enter new field)
•
Edit Accounts – click the Edit Accounts button to open the Global Account
Settings page
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
160
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 4.65 – Edit Accounts Page (Admin only)
NOTE: This section is only accessible with admin rights.
o Global Account Settings – password settings section
■ Password is required – check this box to require passwords for all
accounts
■ Username and Password must be different – check this box to force
user names and passwords to be different
■ Password must be different from the 5 previous – check this box to
remember the five previous passwords for each user and ensure that
new passwords are different
■ Password minimum length – enter a value for the minimum character
length of passwords
■ Retries before suspension – enter a value for the number of
unsuccessful login attempts before the user account is temporarily
suspended (time determined by the User suspension time field)
■ User suspension time[Min] – enter a value (in minutes) for the time
that a user must wait after account suspension before attempting to
log in again
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
System Configuration
161
o User Account Administration – user account section; up to ten user
accounts can be configured; by default, the first three accounts are
configured (admin, control, status)
■ # - user account number
■ User Name – free-form field for user names
■ Password – password field
■ Access level – access level number:
1 = read-only (status)
2 = read-write (control)
3 = admin (administrator)
■ Max users – field to specify the maximum number of users that can be
logged in simultaneously
■ Idle Timeout [min] – time in minutes after which the controller
automatically logs out an idle user
■ Max Lifetime [days] – field for the maximum lifetime of the user
account; useful for providing temporary access. Enter zero (0) to
disable this function.
■ Delete/Enable – click the Delete button to delete the user account
row; click the Enable button to enable and configure a user account
row
CAUTION: The preconfigured user accounts can be deleted!
o Back – click the Back button to return to the main User Accounts page
o Show Active Sessions – click this button to see the Active Sessions
window, which lists the users that are currently logged in
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
162
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
5. Alarm
A
Configuration
Alarm monitors
m
are configure
ed under th
he Alarm C
Conf. categ
gory.
Alarm monitors
m
me
easure inte
ernal and external
e
inp
put signalss and logica
al states.
When an
n alarm mo
onitor is enabled, it co
ompares th
he parametter measurrement witth
pre-prog
grammed thresholds
t
and raises
s an alarm iin the even
nt a thresh
hold is
exceede
ed. Alarm events are
e stored in the Event Log. If con
nfigured, an
n alarm outtput
group (A
AOG) is acttivated to send
s
an ala
arm signal tto an exterrnal receiver.
There are four typ
pes of alarm
m monitors
s:
•
Analog
A
– me
easured va
alue (like vo
oltage or c urrent)
•
Numeric
N
– sum,
s
count, or calcula
ation (like tthe numberr of ac phases, rectifiiers,
or other pow
wer module
es)
•
Logical – sta
ate of relay
ys, form-C contacts, or logical c
combinatio
ons of alarm
m
states (e.g.,, Boolean algebra)
a
•
LVD – a spe
ecial event--based mon
nitor that o
opens a low
w-voltage d
disconnectt
(L
LVD) conta
actor
NOTE: The
T status of each ala
arm monito
or appearss on the Ho
ome page u
under its
respecttive catego
ory.
NOTE: Alarm
A
page
es and dev
vices appea
aring betwe
een bracke
ets indicate
e that they
y
only app
pear when the associated devic
ce or input is connectted to the s
system. Fo
or
example
e:
•
[S
Solar]– only appears if solar cha
argers are present in the system
m
•
[D
DCDC CurM
Mon X]– only appears
s if a Load M
Monitor is a
assigned to
o measure
current from
m dc-to-dc converters
On each
h alarm con
nfiguration page, alarm monitors are group
ped by con
ntroller,
he major
categorry group, orr CAN Node
e sections.. As of the
e date of th
his guide, th
submen
nus are:
•
Mains
M
•
Generator
G
•
Rectifiers
R
•
[S
Solar]
•
[D
DcDc Converter]
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Alarm Configuration
•
[W
Wind Charg
ger]
•
[F
FuelCell Ch
harger]
•
Load
•
Battery
B
•
In
nputs
•
Outputs
O
•
Control
C
System
163
Figure 5.1
1 – Alarm Con
nfiguration Menu
M
(withou
ut alternativ
ve energy sou
urces)
Alarm
m Mon
nitors Edit
E
Wiindowss
All alarm
m monitors
s share com
mmon conffiguration w
windows.
Figure 5.2 – Alarm Monittor Rows
On each
h configura
ation page, alarm mon
nitors have
e unique rows under ttheir
subsecttion headin
ngs:
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
164
•
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Alarm Monitor Row – alarm monitors are grouped under their respective
categories and devices (where applicable)
o # - row number
o Edit – edit icon; click to open the Edit window to configure the alarm
monitor
o Description – free-form field for the alarm monitor description
o Enable – check this box to enable the alarm monitor
o Status – indicates the status of the alarm monitor: disabled, OK, Minor
alarm, or Major alarm (see Table 2.1 - Alarm Icon Table)
General Alarm Monitor Window (not LVD)
Clicking on the Edit icon of the alarm monitor row brings up the Edit Window, which
is the same for all alarm monitors except those for LVDs (LVBD and LVLD).
Figure 5.3 – Alarm Edit Window Example (MainsVolt X)
General
Appears as the first tab if there are additional pages of configurations (e.g., Scale,
Calibration, and Configuration); otherwise, only the page with its fields appears
(without the General tab or any other tabs)
•
Description | Value | Unit
o Alarm Monitor – check the Enable box to enable this alarm monitor
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
165
o Manual reset – select option (Disabled, All Levels, Major High only) from
the drop-down list to indicate whether the alarm is permitted to be reset
manually—when a Reset Alarms command is executed (button is on the
Commands page)
■ Disabled – the monitor alarm cannot be manually reset (only resets
automatically—when the alarm condition is no longer true)
■ All Levels – the monitor alarm must be manually reset when triggered
by any assigned alarm event
■ Major High only – the monitor alarm must be reset manually when the
alarm is generated by a Major High alarm event. It is reset
automatically if triggered by any other assigned alarm event.
o Hysteresis–buffer on either side of the alarm threshold values (higher and
lower) in the unit of the alarm parameter (e.g., volts or amps). If the alarm
is activated, Hysteresis keeps the alarm active even if the measured
value changes slightly within the buffer range specified. This feature
prevents rapid ON/OFF switching of the alarm if the measured value is
changing rapidly.
o Time delay – drop-down list of time delay options (in seconds and
minutes) before activating and deactivating the alarm if the thresholds
are exceeded.
o Monitor Description – free-form field for a description of the alarm
monitor
•
Event | [Value] | Alarm Group
o Event – the name for the specific event to activate when the alarm is
activated. Events are logged in the Event Log.
NOTE: Pre-configured alarm events cannot be changed; the drop-down
list is grayed out to prevent assigning a different event.
NOTE: The controller has safety mechanisms to prevent activating
improperly configured or potentially critical commands.
o [Value] – threshold value at which an alarm should be raised; this field is
available for Analog (measured) and Numeric (counted) alarm monitors
only; Logical alarm monitors trigger an alarm based on an alarm event
rather than a numeric threshold.
Possible units: Volts, Amps, kOhm, Degrees (Fahrenheit or Celcius), Unit(s)
(for Numeric count)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
166
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
o Alarm Group – controller alarm group assigned to report the alarm. Alarm
groups can be assigned to specific output relays of controllers and
monitors that are so equipped.
The status of all active alarm groups can be found in the Active Alarm
Overview window on the Home Page (click on the Event Status and
System Mode pane).
NOTE: There are at least 20 alarm groups available for each controller,
with the first eight pre-configured, ten for custom configuration (Alarm
Group XX), and two or three alarm groups configured for LVDs (depending
on the number of contactor relay controls available through the
controller). Pre-configured alarm groups differ by system and, in some
cases, by customer requirements.
■ Events:
□ Error – activate an error
□ Minor Alarm – activate a minor alarm
□ Major Alarm – activate a major alarm
□ Major Low – activate a Major Low alarm
□ Minor Low – activate a Minor Low alarm
□ Major High – activate a Major High alarm
□ Minor High – activate a Minor High alarm
□ Event – activate a generic alarm event. This is useful for
inconsequential alarm triggers, like Virtual Inputs.
□ Critical – activate a Critical condition. By default, Critical is a
condition where the power system is on battery power only (i.e.,
primary power sources are offline)
□ Warning – activate an alarm warning. A warning indicates that an
abnormal situation is present; related to a minor alarm
□ Battery Test – activate a battery test
NOTE: The controller has safety mechanisms to prevent activating
improperly configured or potentially critical commands.
□ Boost – activate battery boost
NOTE: The controller has safety mechanisms to prevent activating
improperly configured or potentially critical commands.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
167
□ System Shutdown – trigger a system shutdown
NOTE: The controller has safety mechanisms to prevent activating
improperly configured or potentially critical commands.
□ Reset no of Modules – reset the number of modules (both power
and controller units)
□ Rect Current limit – activate rectifier current limit
□ Batt Current limit – activate battery charge current limit
□ Temp Comp – activating temperature compensation
NOTE: The controller has safety mechanisms to prevent activating
improperly configured or potentially critical commands.
□ Boost Inhibit – inhibit (block) battery boost charging
□ Block Outputs – alarm output relays are blocked for maintenance
purposes; this command is only available through the display panel
□ Generator – activate a generator (if connected)
NOTE: The controller has safety mechanisms to prevent activating
improperly configured or potentially critical commands.
□ Emergency – active Emergency voltage (if configured); the
rectifiers drop to Emergency voltage
□ Test Inhibit – inhibit (block) battery tests
□ Equalize – activate battery equalize charging
NOTE: The controller has safety mechanisms to prevent activating
improperly configured or potentially critical commands.
□ Equalize Inhibit– inhibit (block) battery equalize charging
□ Silence buzzer – activate a buzzer silence command
□ Earthfault Inhibit – inhibit (block) earth (ground) fault detection
□ Inverters Shutdown – activate shutdown of inverters (if applicable)
■ Alarm Groups - Alarm groups are software assignments for grouping
alarms together, which can then be mapped to output alarm channels
of controllers and/or CAN nodes. Alarm groups (including names) and
output mapping are user-definable. Currently, there are 24 alarm
groups available: 18 for output relays and 6 for low-voltage
disconnect (LVD) contactors. Alarm events can be assigned to None
(no alarm group).
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
168
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Config (Configuration)
The Configuration tab is for alarm monitors with programmable inputs (e.g., fuse
monitors, relay monitors, temperature probes).
Figure 5.4 – Configuration Tab Example (Flexi Monitor – ProgInput X.Y)
NOTE: The following list of configuration options is exhaustive; available options
differ by controller and CAN Node.
•
Normally Open – alarm is monitoring a normally-open relay contact
•
Normally Closed – alarm is monitoring a normally-closed relay contact
•
Diode Matrix – alarm is monitoring a diode matrix
•
Clock Input – alarm is receiving a clock signal
•
Voltage – alarm is monitoring a voltage input
•
4-20mA – alarm is monitoring current between 4 and 20 mA
•
Temperature – alarm is monitoring a temperature probe input
•
Current – alarm is monitoring current
•
Fan Speed – alarm is monitoring fan speed
•
Fuse-NO – alarm is monitoring a fuse with a normally-open relay contact
(scaling available)
•
Fuse-NC – alarm is monitoring a fuse with a normally-closed relay contact
(scaling available)
•
Fuse-DM – alarm is monitoring a fuse with a diode matrix (scaling available)
•
Outdoor temp 1 / Outdoor temp 2 – alarm is monitoring a temperature probe
input from an outdoor cabinet
•
Battery temp – alarm is monitoring a temperature probe from batteries
•
Rectifier temp – alarm is monitoring a temperature probe from rectifiers
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
169
Fan Config
The Fan Configuration tab appears for configuring fan speed monitoring in outdoor
cabinet applications.
NOTE: The Fan Config tab is available only for I/O Monitor Type 1, I/O Monitor Type
3, and Flexi Monitor.
Figure 5.5 – Fan Config Tab Example
•
Max fan speed – enter the maximum rotations per minute (rpm) from the fan
specifications
•
Pulses/revolution – enter the maximum pulses per revolution (ppr) from the
fan specifications
NOTE: Both fan parameters are required in order to convert the signal
frequency from the fan speed inputs to accurate speed percentages.
Calibration
Appears when using inputs for current, voltage, or temperature, aiding improved
accuracy of input values if they are significantly different from measured values.
CAUTION: Calibration should only be used when the accuracy of the input value is
proved to be significantly off the measured value. It should not be used as part of
an installation procedure. Manufacturer values and proper calibration equipment
(e.g., an accurate multimeter) must be available in order to calibrate the input
values accurately. Improper calibration can cascade inaccuracy to all controller
calculations and functions that use the input value.
NOTE: Calibrating for current measured by a shunt requires entering the shunt
ratings under the Scale tab.
NOTE: If measuring battery discharge, enter negative values for current.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
170
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 5.6 – Calibration Tab Example (OutDoor Temp XX.Y)
•
Low calibration point – section for adjusting the low value of the input
measurement, but only if necessary (i.e., the lowest value expected is not
zero). This is not used for such monitors as Battery Temperature, Battery
Symmetry Voltage, and Battery Voltage.
•
High calibration point – section for adjusting the high value of the input
measurement
o Calibrate value – field for entering the measured high or low value
(depending on the section). Click the Apply button to apply the
calibration value
o A/D value – analog-to-digital conversion value. Please do not change this
value without consulting Eltek, as it is intended for production use only.
CAUTION: By enabling the A/D value, the actual A/D value on the
corresponding input will be overwritten by the value in this field.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
171
Scale
Tab for entering the values of either a shunt or fuse.
•
Shunt
Figure 5.7 – Scale Tab – Shunt Example (BattMonCurr X)
o Scale/Shunt Type – select the mV or Volt value of the shunt from the
drop-down list
o Max Rating – select the maximum current rating of the shunt (in amps)
from the drop-down list
•
Fuse
Figure 5.8 – Scale Tab – Fuse Example (BattMonFuse X)
o Fuse Rating – enter the fuse rating (in amps)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
172
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Edit Window for LVBD
The following parameters appear for the low-voltage battery disconnect (LVBD)
edit window.
Figure 5.9 – LVBD Edit Window
•
LVD – check the Enable box to enable monitoring of the low-voltage battery
disconnect contactor
•
Mains Independent reconnect – check the Enable box to permit the LVBD
contactor to close if the Reconnect Voltage is attained, regardless of
whether ac input (mains) is available. This is useful when a backup or
secondary power source is capable of supporting battery charging.
•
Temperature Dependent – check the Enable box to permit the LVBD
contactor to close when the battery temperature is lower than the value
configured for the BatteryTemp alarm monitor (Alarm Conf. > Power
System > Battery > Battery Alarm Configuration)
•
Disconnect Voltage – discharge voltage threshold at which the LVBD
contactor should open to disconnect the batteries; the LVBD alarm is also
triggered
NOTE: This field is the same as the Battery disconnect voltage (System
Conf. > Power System > Power System > System Voltages) and
Disconnect voltage [V] (System Conf. > Battery > Configuration > System
Voltages) fields under the System Configuration section.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
•
173
Reconnect Voltage – system voltage at which the LVBD contactor should be
closed to reconnect the batteries
NOTE: This field is the same as the Battery reconnect voltage (System
Conf. > Power System > Power System > System Voltages) and
Reconnect voltage [V] (System Conf. > Battery > Configuration > System
Voltages) fields under the System Configuration section.
•
Delay after disconnect – time delay (in seconds) to enforce between LVBD
disconnect and reconnect
•
Description – free-form field for the description of the alarm monitor
•
Alarm Group – controller alarm group assigned to report the LVBD alarm
Edit Window for LVLD
The following parameters appear for the low-voltage load disconnect (LVLD) edit
window.
Figure 5.10 – LVLD Edit Window
NOTE: The number of load contactors (LVLDs) must be set under System Conf. >
Power System > Load > Configuration (parameters Select load group and
Number of load contactors). When configured, the LVLD alarm monitor appears
under Alarm Conf. > Power System > Load > Load Group X.
•
LVD – check the Enable box to enable monitoring of the low-voltage load
disconnect contactor
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
174
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
•
Mains Independent reconnect - check the Enable box to permit the LVLD
contactor to close if the Reconnect Voltage is attained, regardless of
whether ac input (mains) is available. This is useful when a backup or
secondary power source is capable of supporting the load.
•
Disconnect Voltage – low voltage threshold at which the LVLD contactor
should open to disconnect the load; the LVLD alarm is also triggered
NOTE: This field is the same as the Disconnect voltage [V] (System Conf. >
Load > Configuration) under the System Configuration section.
•
Reconnect Voltage – system voltage at which the LVLD contactor should be
closed to reconnect the load
NOTE: This field is the same as the Reconnect voltage [V] (System Conf. >
Load > Configuration) under the System Configuration section.
•
Disconnect delay time – time delay (in minutes) between loss of ac input
(mains) and opening the LVLD contactor to disconnect the load; Disconnect
delay enable (below) must be enabled to use this parameter
•
Disconnect delay enable – check the Enable box to enable Disconnect delay
time (above)
•
Description – free-form field for the description of the alarm monitor
•
Alarm Group – controller alarm group assigned to report the LVLD alarm
Alarm Configuration Menus
Alarm monitors are configured under their respective menus in the Alarm
Configuration section.
Power System
The Power System page contains alarm menus for power system alarm monitors
(currently, the only alarm menu category).
Mains
The Mains page contains alarm monitors for ac input (mains).
WITHOUT GROUPS – alarm sections and monitors that appear when there are no
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers present.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
175
Figure 5.11 – Mains Inputs Alarms (without groups)
•
Mains Inputs Alarm Configuration – section for detecting the number of
mains groups with errors
o MainsLow X – monitor for defining major and minor alarms for low ac input
(mains) voltage (from MainsVoltY)
o MainsVoltY – monitors for defining high and low ac input (mains) voltage
thresholds
NOTE: The number of MainsVolt monitors is dependent on how many
phases are specified at System Conf. > Power System > Mains > (Mains
Configuration) Number of Phases
NOTE: AC input (mains) voltage is monitored by rectifiers, which report to
the controller.
WITH GROUPS – alarm sections and monitors that appear when one or more
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers are present and connected to rectifiers.
•
Mains Inputs Alarm Configuration – section for detecting the number of
mains groups with errors
Figure 5.12 – Mains Inputs Alarms (with groups)
o MainsGrpInMajor – monitor for defining a major alarm for mains group
errors
o MainsGrpInMinor – monitor for defining a minor alarm for mains group
errors
•
Mains Group X – section for mains group monitoring; mains groups appear
only for Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers that are monitoring rectifiers
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
176
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 5.13 – Mains Group Alarms
o MainsVolt X.Y – monitors for defining high and low ac input (mains)
voltage thresholds
NOTE: The number of MainsVolt monitors is dependent on how many
phases are specified at System Conf. > Power System > Mains > (Mains
Configuration) Number of Phases
o MainsLow X–monitor for defining major and minor alarms for low ac input
(mains) voltage (from MainsVolt X.Y)
NOTE: AC input (mains) voltage is monitored by rectifiers, which report to
the controller.
•
[Mains Monitor X]– section for configuring an Eltek AC Mains Monitor (CAN
Node); an AC Mains Monitor must be connected for this section to appear.
See the section “AC Mains Monitor”.
Table 5.1 – Mains Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section
Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
Mains
Mains Inputs
Alarm
Configuration
MainsGrpInMajor
Major Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
Unit(s)
N/A
Volt AC
N/A
Unit(s)
N/A
Minor Alarm
MainsGrpInMinor
MajorAlarm
Minor Alarm
Mains Group X
MainsVolt X.Y
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
MainsLow X
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s) represents a whole sum or count
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
177
Generator
Alarm monitors for connected generators (if applicable).
Figure 5.14 – Generator Alarms
•
Generator Alarm Configuration – section for configuring generator alarm
monitors
o GeneratorFail – monitor for sending an alarm signal if the controller has
signaled the generator to start and no ac input is detected (i.e., the
generator fails to start).
o FuelRemaining X – monitor for defining high and low fuel amounts in the
generator tank
NOTE: As of the publication date of this document, tank configuration
can only be done through PowerSuite.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Generator page.
Table 5.2 – Generator Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section
Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
Generator
Generator
Alarm
Configuration
GeneratorFail
Configurable
N/A
N/A
FuelRemaining X
Major High
[Liquid
Volume
Units – User
Defined]
N/A
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Rectifiers
Alarm monitors for rectifiers, rectifier groups, and external rectifier monitors.
WITHOUT GROUPS– alarm sections and monitors that appear when there are no
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers present
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
178
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 5.15 – Rectifier Alarms (without groups)
•
Rectifiers Alarm Configuration – section for configuring rectifier alarm
monitors
o RectifierCurrent – monitor for defining maximum current output
thresholds for the rectifiers
o RectifierError – monitor for detecting the number of rectifiers
experiencing errors
o RectLowMains – monitor for detecting the number of rectifiers
experience low ac input (mains)
o RectCommError – monitor for reporting the number of rectifiers
experiencing communication errors
o Rect.Capacity – monitor for the percentage of rectifier capacity being
used
o RectCurrShareErr – monitor for defining current share deviation (in
percentage) across the rectifiers
o RectifierTemp – monitor for defining high and low temperature thresholds
WITH GROUPS – alarm sections and monitors that appear when one or more
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers are present and connected to rectifiers
•
Rectifiers Alarm Configuration – section for configuring rectifier alarm
monitors
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
179
Figure 5.16 – Rectifier Alarms (with groups)
o TotRectCurrent – monitor for setting high current thresholds for all
rectifier output (if there is more than one rectifier group)
o RectGrpErr – monitor for detecting the number of rectifier groups
reporting an alarm or error
o RectGroupInMinor – monitor for detecting the number of rectifier groups
experiencing a minor alarm
o RectGrpCommErr – monitor for detecting the number of rectifier groups
experiencing a communication error
o TotRectCapacity – monitor for the percentage of total rectifier capacity
being used
o RectCurrShareErr – monitor for detecting current share errors by defining
current share deviation (as a percentage)
o RectifierTemp – monitor for defining high and low rectifier temperature
thresholds
•
Rect.Group X– section for configuring alarm monitors for a rectifier group,
which only appears for a Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controller
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
180
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 5.17 – Rectifier Group Alarms
o RectCurrGrp. X – monitor for defining maximum current output thresholds
for the rectifier group
o RectErrGrp. X–monitor for detecting the number of rectifiers experiencing
errors within the rectifier group
o RectComErrGrp. X – monitor for reporting the number of rectifiers
experiencing communication errors within the rectifier group
o RectTempGrp. X – monitor for defining high and low temperature
thresholds for the rectifier group
o CurrShareErr X – monitor for defining current share deviation (as a
percentage) across the rectifiers within the rectifier group
o RecLoMainsGrp. X – monitor for detecting the number of rectifiers
experience low ac input (mains)
•
[RectCurMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Load
Monitor that is set to monitor rectifier current. See the section “Load
Monitor”.
•
[RectFlexMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Flexi
Monitor that is set to monitor rectifier current. See the section “Flexi
Monitor”.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Rectifiers page.
Table 5.3 – Rectifiers Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section
Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
Rectifiers
Rectifiers Alarm
Configuration
TotRectCurrent
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Amp
N/A
RectGrpErr
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
Menu Page
Section
Heading
Rect.Group X
181
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
RectGroupInMinor
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
RectGrpCommErr
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
TotRectCapacity
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Percentage
N/A
RectCurrShareErr
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Percentage
N/A
RectifierTemp
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Degrees
N/A
RectCurrGrp. X
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Amp
N/A
RectErrGrp. X
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
RectComErrGrp.X
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
RectTempGrp. X
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Degrees
N/A
CurrShareErr X
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Percentage
N/A
RecLoMainsGrp.X
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
Unit(s) represents a whole sum or count
[Solar]
Alarm configuration page for solar chargers; only appears if an external monitor is
connected and/or Eltek solar chargers are installed.
•
Solar Alarm Configuration – alarm monitors for solar chargers
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
182
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 5.18 – Solar Alarms
o SolarCurrent – monitor for defining maximum output current thresholds
for the solar chargers
o SolarChargerErr – monitor for detecting the number of solar chargers
experiencing an error
o SolarCommErr – monitor for detecting the number of solar chargers
experiencing communication errors
o SolarChargerTemp – monitor for defining high and low temperature
thresholds for the solar chargers
•
[SolarCurMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Load
Monitor that is set to monitor solar current. See the section “Load Monitor”.
•
[SolarFlexMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Flexi
Monitor that is set to monitor solar current. See the section “Flexi Monitor”.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Solar page.
Table 5.4 – Solar Charger Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section
Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
Solar
Charger
Solar Charger
Alarm
Configuration
SolarCurrent
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Amp
N/A
SolarChargeErr
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
SolarCommErr
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
SolarChargerTemp
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Degrees
N/A
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
183
[Wind Charge
er]
Alarm configuratio
on page forr wind charrgers; only appears iff an external monitor is
connectted
•
Wind
W
Charg
ger Alarm Configurat
C
ion – alarm
m monitors for wind chargers
Figure
F
5.19 – Wind Charge
er Alarms
o WindCurrrent – mon
nitor for de
efining max
ximum output curren
nt threshold
ds
for the wind
w
charge
ers
o WindErro
or – monito
or for detecting the n
number of w
wind charg
gers
experien
ncing an error
o WindCom
mmError – monitor fo
or detecting the number of wind
d chargers
experien
ncing comm
munication errors
o WindCha
argerTemp
p – monitorr for definin
ng high and
d low temp
perature
threshollds for the wind charg
gers
•
[WindCurM
[
Mon X] – sec
ction for co
onfiguring the alarm monitors o
of a Load
Monitor
M
that is set to monitor wiind currentt. See the ssection “Lo
oad Monitorr”.
•
[W
WindFlexM
Mon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors o
of a Flexi
Monitor
M
that is set to monitor wiind currentt. See the section “Fllexi Monito
or”.
The follo
owing table lists the alarm mon
nitors for th
he Wind Ch
harger pag
ge.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
184
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Table 5.5 – Wind Charger Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section
Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
Wind
Charger
Wind Charger
Alarm
Configuration
WindCurrent
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Amp
N/A
WindError
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
WindCommErr
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
WindChargerTemp
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Degrees
N/A
[FuelCell Charger]
Alarm configuration page for fuel cell chargers; only appears if an external monitor
is connected
•
FuelCell Alarm Configuration – alarm monitors for fuel cell chargers
Figure 5.20 – Fuel Cell Alarms
o FuelCellCurrent – monitor for defining maximum output current
thresholds for fuel cell chargers
o FuelCellError – monitor for detecting the number of fuel cell chargers
experiencing an error
o FuelCellCommErr – monitor for detecting the number of fuel cell chargers
experiencing communication errors
o FuelCellCapacity – monitor for defining maximum output capacity for the
fuel cell chargers (as a percentage of maximum output current)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
185
o FuelCellTemp – monitor for defining high and low temperature thresholds
for fuel cell chargers
•
[FuelC CurMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Load
Monitor that is set to monitor fuel cell current. See the section “Load
Monitor”.
•
[FuelC FlexMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Flexi
Monitor that is set to monitor fuel cell current. See the section “Flexi
Monitor”.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Fuel Cell page.
Table 5.6 – Fuel Cell Charger Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section
Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
FuelCell
Charger
FuelCell Charger
Alarm
Configuration
FuelCellCurrent
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Amp
N/A
FuelCellError
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
FuelCellCommErr
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
FuelCellCapacity
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Percentage
N/A
FuelCellTemp
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Degrees
N/A
[DcDc Converter]
Alarm configuration page for dc-to-dc converters; only appears if dc-to-dc
converters are installed or if an external monitor is connected
•
DcDc Converter Alarm Configuration – alarm monitors for dc-to-dc
converters
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
186
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 5.21 – Dc-to-dc Converter Alarms
o DcDcError – monitor for detecting the number of dc-to-dc converters
experiencing an error
o DcDcCommError – monitor for detecting the number of dc-to-dc
converters experiencing communication errors
o DcDcCurrent – monitor for defining maximum output current thresholds
for dc-to-dc converters
o DcDcTemp – monitor for defining high and low temperature thresholds for
dc-to-dc converters
o DcDcCapacity – monitor for defining maximum output capacity for the dcto-dc converters (as a percentage of maximum output current)
•
[DCDC CurMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Load
Monitor that is set to monitor dc-to-dc converter current. See the section
“Load Monitor”.
•
[DCDC FlexMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Flexi
Monitor that is set to monitor dc-to-dc converter current. See the section
“Flexi Monitor”.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the DCDC Converter page.
Table 5.7 – Dc-to-Dc Converter Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section
Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
DcDc
Converter
DcDc Converter
Alarm
Configuration
DcDcError
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
DcDcCommErr
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
Menu Page
Section
Heading
187
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
DcDcCurrent
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Amp
N/A
DcDcTemp
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Degrees
N/A
DcDcCapacity
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Percentage
N/A
Load
Alarm monitors for load groups and external load monitors.
•
Load Alarm Configuration – section for configuring load alarms handled by
the system controller
Figure 5.22 – Load Alarms
o LoadCurrent – monitor for defining the maximum current draw thresholds
for loads
•
Load Group X – section for configuring load alarms for load groups, which
appear for every controller except Smartpack2 Master (appears for
Smartpack S, Compack, Smartpack2 Basic and Smartpack2 Basic Industrial)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
188
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 5.23 – Load Group Alarms (with LVLD)
o LoadFuse X – monitor for a fuse or circuit breaker for the entire load group
(if applicable)
o LoadCurrGrp. X – monitor for defining the high and low current thresholds
for the load group
o LoadCurrent X.Y – monitors for defining the maximum current thresholds
for individual load branch monitors in the group
o [LVLD X.Y] – low-voltage load disconnect contactor monitor; only appears
if configured under System Conf. > Power System > Load
o Drop diode X.Y – monitors for defining the high voltage threshold for drop
diodes in the load group
•
[LoadPrimary X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Load
Monitor that is set to Stdloadmon. See the section “Load Monitor”.
•
[Load CurMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Load
Monitor that is set to Load CurMon. See the section “Load Monitor”.
•
[Load FlexMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Flexi
Monitor unit that is set to Load Fleximon. See the section “Flexi Monitor”.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Load page.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
189
Table 5.8 – Load Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section
Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
Load
Load Alarm
Configuration
LoadCurrent
Major Alarm
Amp
N/A
Load Group X
LoadFuse X
N/A
Config
Minor Alarm
Configurable
Scale (Fuse)
LoadCurrGrp. X
Major High
Amp
Minor High
Calibration
(Current)
Scale
(Shunt)
Minor Low
Major Low
LoadCurrent X.Y
Major High
Amp
Minor High
Calibration
(Current)
Scale
(Shunt)
Error
Error
LVLD X.Y
N/A
N/A
N/A
Drop diode X.Y
Minor High
Volt DC
N/A
Battery
Alarm monitors for batteries, battery groups, and external battery monitors
•
Battery Alarm Configuration – section for configuring battery alarm
monitors handled by the system controller
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
190
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 5.24 – Battery Alarms
o BatteryVoltage–monitor for defining the high and low voltage thresholds
for batteries
o BatteryCurrent – monitor for defining the high and low current thresholds
for batteries (charge and discharge, respectively)
o BatteryTemp – monitor for defining the high and low temperature
thresholds for battery temperature
o BatteryLifeTime – monitor for determining if the batteries have exceeded
the maximum number of days (user-defined) for a normal life cycle
o LVBD – monitor for detecting the state of the battery LVD (i.e., whether it
is closed or open).
o BatteryQuality – monitor for the percentage of the battery’s original
capacity that remains for charging; the controller triggers the alarm if it
calculates the battery’s charging capacity to be below the percentage
specified
CAUTION: Resetting the BatteryQuality monitor (i.e., unchecking the
Enable box and rechecking it) resets the monitor’s value, causing it to lose
the percentage it calculated from the last battery test. The value is,
however, stored in the battery test result log.
o BatteryTotCap – monitor for total maximum capacity of the batteries (in
amp-hours)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
191
o BatteryRemCap – monitor for maximum discharge thresholds (in amphours) for the batteries; it indicates how much battery capacity remains
before disconnect
o BatteryTimeLeft – monitor for the estimated remaining battery discharge
time (in minutes)
o DeltaStringCurr – monitor for the maximum deviation (as a percentage)
between battery string measurements
o BatteryUsedCap – monitor for estimated battery capacity used (in amphours); this monitor is analogous to a DOD (Depth of Discharge)
measurement
o Ah Charged – counter for amp-hours (x100) of charge on the current
batteries
o Ah Discharged – counter for amp-hours (x100) of discharge on the current
batteries
NOTE: Ah Charged and Ah Discharged are defined in amp-hour divided by
100 as a scaling technique to prevent data overflow; the values are to be
multiplied by 100 (x100). Even though one value is for charge and the
other for discharge, both values are positive (as opposed to negative for
discharge). Amp-hours are calculated every minute.
NOTE: Ah Charged and Ah Discharge values are cleared if the Battery
Capacity or Battery Installation Date are changed.
System Conf. > Power System > Battery > Capacity [per string] /
Battery install date [yyyy-mm-dd]
o BadTestResults – monitor for counting the number of battery tests
where End Voltage is reached (System Conf. > Power System > Battery
> Test) before the time allotted for the Simple Test, indicating that the
batteries are “bad”
•
Battery Bank X – section for configuring battery bank alarm monitors
handled by the system controller(s); battery banks are defined at System
Conf. > Power System > Battery > Configuration
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
192
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 5.25 – Battery Bank Alarms
o BattVolt bank X – monitor for defining the high and low voltage
thresholds for battery voltage within the battery bank
o BattCurr bank X – monitor for defining the high and low (charge and
discharge, respectively) current thresholds for the battery bank
o BattCurrent X.Y – monitors for defining the high and low current
thresholds for battery circuits(other than the battery bank)
o BattFuses X – monitor for a fuse or circuit breaker for the entire battery
bank (if applicable)
o BatteryTemp X.Y – monitors for defining the high and low temperature
thresholds for battery temperature inputs
o SymmVolt X.Y – monitors for defining maximum voltage deviation
between battery symmetry inputs
•
[Battery Monitor X] –section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Battery
Monitor (if connected). See the section “Battery Monitor”.
•
[Batt FlexMon X] – section for configuring the alarm monitors of a Flexi
Monitor that is set to monitor battery current. See the section “Flexi
Monitor”.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Battery page.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
193
Table 5.9 – Battery Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section
Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm
Events
Unit
Tabs
Battery
Battery Alarm
Configuration
BatteryVoltage
Major High
Volt DC
N/A
Amp
N/A
(Degrees)
N/A
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
BatteryCurrent
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
BatteryTemp
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
LVBD*
N/A
N/A
N/A
BatteryQuality
Major Alarm
%
(Percentage)
N/A
Ah
N/A
Ah
N/A
Min
N/A
%
(Percentage)
N/A
Ah
N/A
Ah*100
N/A
Minor Alarm
BatteryTotCap
Minor Low
Major Low
BatteryRemCap
Minor Low
Major Low
BatteryTimeLeft
Minor Alarm
Major Alarm
DeltaStringCurr
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
BatteryUsedCap
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Ah Charged
Doc. No. 370035.013
Major High
Minor High
Issue 1, April 2014
194
Menu Page
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Section
Heading
Battery Bank X
Alarm Monitor
Alarm
Events
Unit
Tabs
Ah Discharged
Major High
Minor High
Ah*100
N/A
BadTestResults
Major Alarm
(Count)
N/A
BattVolt bank X
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Volt DC
Calibration
(Voltage)
BattCurr bank X
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Amp
N/A
BattCurrentX.Y
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Amp
Calibration
(Current)
Configurable
N/A
BattFuses X
Scale
(Shunt)
Config
Scale (Fuse)
BatteryTempX.Y
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
(Degrees)
SymmVolt X.Y
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Volt DC
Calibration
(Voltage)
*LVBD has an alarm monitor edit window that differs from the others. See the section “Edit Window
for LVBD” on page 172.
Inputs
Alarm monitor inputs grouped by controller and monitor devices
NOTE: The sections for the controllers and CAN Nodes on this page only appear if
the devices are connected to the controller CAN bus.
NOTE: The ProgInput XX.Y name changes when configured for a voltage or current
input (to Voltage XX.Y or Current XX.Y, respectively).
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
•
195
SP2 Master 1 Input Configuration – section for configuring the alarm
monitors of a Smartpack2 Master controller
Figure 5.26 – Smartpack2 Master Input Alarms
o Virtual input Y – monitors for Virtual Inputs, which are manual triggers for
toggling an assigned alarm output relay on command
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Smartpack2 controller.
Table 5.10 – Smartpack2 Master Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section
Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
Inputs
SP2 Master 1
Input
Configuration
Virtual input X
Configurable
N/A
Config
•
SP2 Basic X Input Configuration or SP2 BasicInd X Input Configuration –
section for configuring the alarm monitors of either a Smartpack2 Basic or a
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controller
Figure 5.27 – Smartpack2 Basic and Smartpack2 Basic Industrial Input Alarms
o Temperature X.Y – monitors for defining high and low temperature
thresholds for temperature probe inputs
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
196
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
o EarthFault X – monitor for defining the resistance threshold (in kOhms)
for earth (ground) fault detection
o ProgInput X.Y – monitors for programmable inputs on the controller,
which can be relay inputs or voltage (see NOTE below)
NOTE: The input terminals used for temperature are the same physical
terminals used for the programmable inputs. If the temperature input
(Temperature X.Y) is desired, then the input is configured under the
Temperature X.Y monitor; if another kind of input is used, then the input
is configured under the ProgInput X.Y monitor.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Smartpack2 Basic and Basic
Industrial controllers.
Table 5.11 – Smartpack2 Basic and Basic Industrial Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section
Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
Inputs
SP2
Basic/BasicIndX
Input
Configuration
Temperature X.Y
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
(Degrees)
N/A
EarthFault X
Major Alarm
kOhm
N/A
ProgInput X.Y
Configurable
(Voltage - 4
Events)
N/A
(Volt DC)
Config
Calibration
(Voltage
only)
If configuring a Programmable Input (ProgInput) for Voltage, then an untitled field for a voltage
threshold appears under the General tab (between Event and Alarm Group, where the Unit column
is normally located) and must be specified
•
SmartPack S 1 Input Configuration – section for configuring the alarm
monitors of a Smartpack S controller
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
197
Figure 5.28 – Smartpack S Input Alarms
o Temperature X.Y – monitors for defining high and low temperature
thresholds for temperature probe inputs
o Earth Resistance – monitor for defining the resistance threshold (in
kOhms) for earth (ground) fault detection
o Virtual input Y – monitors for Virtual Inputs, which are manual triggers for
toggling an assigned alarm output relay on command
o ProgInput X.Y – monitors for programmable inputs on the controller,
which can be either relay inputs or voltage
NOTE: The input terminals used for temperature are the same physical
terminals used for the programmable inputs. If the temperature input
(Temperature X.Y) is desired, then the input is configured under the
Temperature X.Y monitor; if another kind of input is used, then the input
is configured under the ProgInput X.Y monitor.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Smartpack S controller.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
198
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Table 5.12 – Smartpack S Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section
Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
Inputs
SmartPack S 1
Input
Configuration
Temperature X.Y
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
(Degrees)
N/A
EarthFault X
Major Alarm
kOhm
N/A
Virtual input Y
Configurable
N/A
Config
ProgInput X.Y
Configurable
(Voltage - 4
Events)
N/A
(Volt DC)
Config
Calibration
(Voltage
only)
If configuring a Programmable Input (ProgInput) for Voltage, then an untitled field for a voltage
threshold appears under the General tab (between Event and Alarm Group, where the Unit column
is normally located) and must be specified
•
Compack Input Configuration – section for configuring the alarm monitors of
a Compack controller
Figure 5.29 – Compack Input Alarms
o Temperature X.Y – monitors for defining high and low temperature
thresholds for temperature probe inputs
o Virtual input Y – monitors for Virtual Inputs, which are manual triggers for
toggling an assigned alarm output relay on command
o ProgInput X.Y – monitors for programmable inputs on the controller,
which can be relay inputs or voltage (see NOTE below)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
199
NOTE: The input terminals used for temperature are the same physical
terminals used for the programmable inputs. If the temperature input
(Temperature X.Y) is desired, then the input is configuredunder the
Temperature X.Y monitor; if another kind of input is used, then the input
is configured under the ProgInput X.Y monitor.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Compack controller.
Table 5.13 – Compack Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section
Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
Inputs
Compack 1
Input
Configuration
Temperature X.Y
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
(Degrees)
N/A
Virtual input Y
Configurable
N/A
Config
ProgInput X.Y
Configurable
(Voltage - 4
Events)
N/A
(Volt DC)
Config
Calibration
(Voltage
only)
If configuring a Programmable Input (ProgInput) for Voltage, then an untitled field for a voltage
threshold appears under the General tab (between Event and Alarm Group, where the Unit column
is normally located) and must be specified.
•
[I/O unit X Input Configuration] – section for configuring the input channels
of I/O Monitors (Types 1-3). See the section I/O Monitor Alarm Monitors.
•
[ContrFlexMon X] – section for configuring the input channels of a Flexi
Monitor set to Std Fleximon (Standard Flexi Monitor). See the section Flexi
Monitor.
•
[Mains Monitor X Input Configuration] –section for configuring the input
channels of a Mains Monitor. See the section AC Mains Monitor.
Outputs
Page for mapping alarm groups to output channels and creating logical alarms.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
200
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 5.30 – Smartpack2 Master Outputs (Buzzer, Virtual)
Figure 5.31 – Smartpack2 Basic Industrial Outputs (Batt/Load Contactor, Alarm Out, Phone)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
•
201
Outputs – configuration page for mapping alarm output groups to the
supported output channels (e.g., relays, contactors, buzzers) of controller
and monitor devices
o Select Unit – drop-down list for selecting controllers and CAN Nodes
Table 5.14 – Table of Controller and CAN Node Output Channels
Controller or CAN Node
Output Channel(s)
SP2 Master 1
Buzzer
(Smartpack2 Master)
Virtual 1-4
SP2 BasicInd X
Batt contactor
(Smartpack2 Basic Industrial)
Load contactor 1-2
Alarm output 1-3
Phone 1-5
SP2 Basic X
Batt contactor
(Smartpack2 Basic)
Load contactor 1-2
I/O unit X
Alarm output 1-6
(I/O Monitor, Types 1-3)
SmartPack S 1
Alarm output 1-6
(Smartpack S)
Batt contactor
Load contactor
Buzzer
Phone 1-3
Virtual 1-4
Compack 1
Alarm output 1-3
(Compack)
Batt contactor
Load contactor
Virtual 1-4
o Alarm Map – assignment table for each alarm group. Place a check in the
box under the output desired. Alarm groups can be assigned to multiple
output channels, and multiple alarm groups can be assigned to the same
output channel.
NOTE: Alarm Groups are configurable and may vary in name and order.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
202
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Available output channels:
■ Buzzer – some controllers have an audible buzzer that can be
triggered by an alarm
■ Buzzer output – feature supported by I/O Monitors that triggers a
recurring buzzer
NOTE: The Buzzer output column only appears in Eltek I/O Monitors
that have the latest software revision installed.
■ Alarm output – output relays associated with physical terminals on
the controller or CAN Node; see the manual for each controller or CAN
Node to determine which terminals are associated with each alarm
output relay
■ Batt contactor – low-voltage battery disconnect contactor (LVBD);
assigning alarm groups to the battery contactor triggers a change in
state (either open or closed) in the LVBD. See the manual for each
controller or CAN Node to determine which terminals are associated
with battery contactor relay(s).
■ Load contactor – low-voltage load disconnect contactor (LVLD);
assigning alarm groups to the battery contactor triggers a change in
state (either open or closed) in the LVLD. See the manual for each
controller or CAN Node to determine which terminals are associated
with load contactor relay(s).
■ Virtual – some controllers have virtual alarms; assigning an alarm
group to a virtual output channel triggers the assigned Virtual Input
■ Phone–modem callback phone number(s); assigning an alarm group to
one or more of these output channels sends an alarm message to the
phone number(s) configured on the Modem CallBack page (System
Conf. > Power System > Control System > Modem CallBack).
NOTE: To use the Modem Callback feature, it must be enabled and
phone numbers configured on the Modem CallBack page. In addition,
modem equipment must be connected to the controller unit that
supports modem communication (Smartpack2 Basic Industrial,
Smartpack S, or SmartNode).
o Output Config Window – clicking on an Output Channel column title opens
the Output Config window, where the channel can be configured.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
203
Figure 5.32 – Output
O
Conffig Window
■ Description – frree-form te
ext field wh
here a desc
cription of the outputt
channel can be typed
nnel Chara
acteristic] – drop-dow
wn list of no
avior to ass
sign
■ [Chan
ormal beha
to the relay. Th
he following
g options a
are available:
ormally de
eactivated – the relay
y is normallly deactiva
ated (norm
mally
□ No
op
pen)
□ No
ormally ac
ctivated – the
t relay iss normally a
activated ((normally
closed)
atched – th
he channell is for a lattched low-v
voltage dis
sconnect (L
LVD)
□ La
co
ontactor (the LVD is la
atched in p
place in eitther state, not requiring
en
nergy to re
emain eithe
er open or c
closed).
□ No
ormally de
eactivated resettable
e – the rela
ay is norma
ally
de
eactivated (normally open) and can be resset even if the alarm
grroup is still in alarm. This
T
setting
g is used fo
or the “nag
g” feature,
which recurs
s for as lon
ng as the trriggering alarm is acttive.
□
Normally
N
ac
ctivated re
esettable – the relay is normally
y activated
d
(n
normally clo
osed) and can
c be rese
et even if tthe alarm g
group is still in
alarm. This setting
s
is used for the
e “nag” fea
ature, which recurs fo
or as
long as the triggering
t
alarm
a
is ac tive.
■ Off delay (minu
utes) – the number off minutes tto elapse a
after receiv
ving
an ala
arm from an
a alarm grroup before
e the outpu
ut channell should be
signa
aled.
The following
f
im
mage show
ws the Outp
put Config
g window fo
or the Buzz
zer
Outp
put. The delay timer changes
c
to Nag timerr when eith
her of the
resetttable options is selected.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
204
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 5.33 – Ou
utput Config
g Window forr Buzzer Outp
put (Nag tim
mer instead o
of Off delay)
•
Logical Groups – configuration page
p
for cre
eating logic
c equation
ns to trigge
er an
alarm group
p when two
o other alarm groups are in spec
cific states
s; also know
wn
as Boolean algebra
Figure
F
5.34 – Logical Gro ups Page
o [Table Rows]
R
– equ
uations for activating
g an alarm o
output gro
oup based o
on
the states of two other
o
alarm
m output grroups. Up to ten logical groups
s can
gured.
be config
The equa
ation for ea
ach line rea
ads as follo
ows:
If Alarm Group 1 is
s [Active orr Not Activ
ve] and Ala
arm Group 2 is [Active
e or
Not Actiive], then activate
a
Re
esult Group
p.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Alarm Configuration
205
■ Alarm
m Group 1 – drop-dow
wn list of allarm group
ps to selectt as the firs
st
alarm
m group sta
ate to chec
ck
■ Alarm
m Group 2 – drop-dow
wn list of allarm group
ps to selectt as the
secon
nd alarm group state
e to check
■ Activ
ve/Not Acttive – drop-down list of states ffor the corrresponding
g
alarm
m group; se
elect eitherr Active or Not Active
e
■ Result Group – drop-down
n list of ala
arm groups to select a
as the alarrm
outpu
ut group to
o active if the
t equatio
on is true
NOTE
E: Alarm grroups assig
gned to the
e Result Group canno
ot be used for
any other
o
alarm
m monitors.. In other w
words, an a
alarm group
p assigned
d to a
Result Group must
m
be ded
dicated to that Resullt Group on
nly.
Contrrol Syste
em
The Con
ntrol Syste
em page co
ontains alarm monitors for dete
ecting errorrs
(malfunctions) witth the conttroller and CAN
C
Node devices co
onnected tto the powe
er
system.
Fig
gure 5.35 – Control
C
Syste
em Alarms
A
mon
nitors only appear
a
if th
he associated contro
oller or CAN
N Node is
NOTE: Alarm
presentt.
•
Ambient
A
Te
emp – monitor for the
e maximum
m temperatture detectted by any of
th
he controlller tempera
ature inputts (Smartpack2 Basic
c or Smartp
pack2 Basic
In
ndustrial)
•
Batt-Ambie
B
entTemp – monitor fo
or the diffe
erence betw
ween batte
ery
te
emperature and the AmbientTe
A
emp value (BatteryTe
emp – Amb
bientTemp
p)
•
UserSuspen
U
nded – indicates if a user
u
accou
unt has bee
en suspend
ded due to too
many
m
unsuc
ccessful login attemp
pts
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
206
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
•
CU Err.Basic – monitor for detecting errors with Smartpack2 Basic or
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controllers
•
CU Err.BattMon – monitor for detecting errors with connected Battery
Monitors
•
CU Err.LoadMon – monitor for detecting errors with connected Load Monitors
•
CU Err.IO-Unit – monitor for detecting errors with connected I/O Monitors
(Types 1-3)
•
CtrlUnitError – monitor for detecting errors with the primary controller unit
(Smartpack2 Master, Smartpack, or Compack)
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Control System page.
Table 5.15 – Control System Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section
Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
Control
System
Control System
Ambient temp
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
(Degrees)
N/A
Batt-AmbientTemp
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
(Degrees)
N/A
UserSuspended
Major Alarm
N/A
N/A
CU Err.Basic
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
CU Err.BattMon
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
CU Err.LoadMon
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
CU Err.IO-Unit
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
CtrlUnit Error
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Unit(s)
N/A
Unit(s) represents a whole sum or count
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
207
Eltek CAN Nodes
Eltek CAN Nodes provide auxiliary monitoring extensibility to the control system;
most CAN Nodes are also equipped with output relays for limited alarm and control
signaling. Configuration pages for CAN Nodes only appear in the web interface
when they are connected to the controller CAN bus.
Table 5.16 – CAN Nodes – Alarm Monitors and Locations
CAN Node
Function
(Load and Flexi
Monitors only)*
When Configured
As Monitor Type…
Alarm Page
Where It
Appears
Configuration
Heading/Section
Name
AC Mains
Monitor
Monitor ac input
(mains) voltage,
frequency and current
Mains
Mains Monitor X
Battery
Monitor
Monitor battery charge
current, temperature,
fuse or circuit breaker,
and symmetry
measurements
Battery
Battery Monitor X
Load
Monitor*
Monitor up to eight
load current(s) and
eight fuses and/or
circuit breakers
Std Loadmon
Load**
LoadPrimary X
Load CurMon
Load**
Load CurMon X
Rect CurMon
Rectifiers
Rect CurMon X
DCDC CurMon
DcDc Converter
DcDc CurMon X
Solar CurMon
Solar Charger
Solar CurMon X
Wind CurMon
Wind Charger
Wind CurMon X
FuelC CurMon
FuelCell Charger
FuelC CurMon X
RectifierFleximon
Rectifiers
Rect FlexMon X
Battery Fleximon
Battery
Batt FlexMon X
Load Fleximon
Load
Load FlexMon X
DCDC Fleximon
DcDc Converter
DcDc FlexMon X
Solar Fleximon
Solar Charger
Solar FlexMon X
Wind Fleximon
Wind Charger
Wind FlexMon X
FuelC Fleximon
FuelCell Charger
FuelC FlexMon X
Std Fleximon
Inputs
Contr FlexMon X
Flexi
Monitor*
Monitor a variety of
currents on up to 16
input channels
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
208
CAN Node
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Function
(Load and Flexi
Monitors only)*
When Configured
As Monitor Type…
Alarm Page
Where It
Appears
Configuration
Heading/Section
Name
I/O unit X Input
Configuration
I/O Monitor
Type 1 and
Type 3***
Monitor up to six
programmable inputs
(relays, voltage) and
Outdoor Cabinet
signals
Inputs
I/O Monitor
Type 2
Monitor up to six
programmable inputs
(relays, voltage)
Inputs
I/O unit X Outdoor
Configuration***
I/O unit X Input
Configuration
*Load and Flexi Monitors can be configured to monitor several categories of current through the
System Conf. page (System Conf. > Power System > Control System > Current Monitor (for
Load Monitor) / Flexi Monitor). The Configuration Heading/Section Name appears when the
monitor is configured with the corresponding Monitor Type under the column When Configured As
Monitor Type….
**The Load Monitor appears under the Load page if configured as either Std Loadmon or Load
CurMon. As Std Loadmon (LoadPrimary), the currents monitored are excluded from system current
calculations; as Load CurMon, the currents monitored are included with system current calculations.
***The Fan Control parameters required for the fan inputs are configured under the System Conf.
page (System Conf. > Power System > Control System > Outdoor)
AC Mains Monitor
The AC Mains Monitor provides ac input monitoring beyond what the rectifiers
report. In addition to voltage readings on each phase, frequency, current and total
current can be monitored. The AC Mains Monitor also maintains its own data log.
Alarm Conf. > Power System > Mains
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
209
Figure 5.36 – AC Mains Monitor Alarms
•
Mains Monitor X - section for configuring an AC Mains Monitor CAN Node
o MainsVolt X.Y – monitors for defining high and low ac input (mains)
voltage thresholds
o Frequency X – monitor for defining alarm thresholds for the measured ac
input frequency
o MainsCurr X.Y – monitors for defining alarm thresholds for high ac input
(mains) current
o TotMainsCurr X – monitor for defining total ac input high current
thresholds
Alarm Conf. > Power System >Inputs
•
Mains Monitor X Input Configuration – section for configuring the inputs of a
Mains Monitor CAN Node
o MainsPrin X – monitors for the configurable input channels of a Mains
Monitor
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Mains Monitor.
Table 5.17 – AC Mains Monitor Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section
Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
Mains
Mains Monitor X
MainsVolt X.Y
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Volt AC
N/A
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
210
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Menu Page
Inputs
Section
Heading
Mains
s MonitorX
Input
Configuration
Alarm Moniitor
A
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
Frequency X
M
Major High
M
Minor High
M
Minor Low
M
Major Low
Hz
N/A
MainsCurr X.Y
X
M
Major High
M
Minor High
Amps
Scale
(Shunt)
TotMainsCu
urr X
M
Major High
M
Minor High
Amps
N/A
MainsPrin X
Co
onfigurable
N/A
Config
Location
n on Home
e Page: Mains Status button
Batte
ery Mon
nitor
The Batttery Monittor provides
s battery current,
c
fusse, and tem
mperature monitoring
g as
a supple
ement to the controlller.
Alarrm Conf. > Power Sy
ystem > Ba
attery
Fig
gure 5.37 – Battery
B
Moniitor Alarms
•
Battery
B
Monitor X – section for configuring
g a Battery
y Monitor C
CAN Node
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Alarm Configuration
211
o BattMonCurr X – monitor for defining high and low battery charge (OR
DISCHARGE? OR CHARGE AND DISCHARGE RATHER THAN HIGH AND LOW?)
thresholds; requires a shunt, which must be calibrated and scaled
o BattMonTemp X – monitor for defining high and low battery temperature
thresholds (in degrees)
o BattMonFuse X – monitor for a battery circuit fuse or circuit breaker; fuse
rating must be known
o BattMonSymX.Y – monitors for battery symmetry measurements; an
alarm is triggered if there is a deviation greater than the voltage specified
between any two symmetry measurements on this monitor.
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Battery Monitor.
Table 5.18 – Battery Monitor Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Battery
Battery Monitor X
BattMonCurr X
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
Amp
BattMonTemp X
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
(Degrees)
BattMonFuse X
Configurable
N/A
BatMonSym X.Y
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Volt DC
Tabs
Location on Home Page: Battery Status button
Load Monitor
The Load Monitor is used for monitoring current draw, fuse status, and power
consumption (calculated) on load circuits. It can appear in a number of alarm pages
with different heading names depending on what Monitor Type it is assigned under
the System Conf. section (System Conf. > Power System > Control System >
Current Monitor). Regardless of the monitor type assigned, the Load Monitor
always has the same configuration sections and alarm monitors. In most cases,
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
212
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Load Mo
onitor head
dings end with
w CurMo
on; the exc
ception is th
he standarrd load mon
nitor
type (Sttd Loadmon), where the
t Load Monitor
M
hea
ading is Loa
adPrimary.
Alarrm Conf. > Power Sy
ystem > Lo
oad
•
LoadPrimarry X – head
ding for a Lo
oad Monito
or used to monitor loa
ad current
th
hat is to be
e excluded
d from system currentt calculatio
ons. This is
s the defau
ult
assignmentt of a Load Monitor: Std
S Loadmo
on.
•
on X – head
ding for a Load
L
Monito
or used to monitor lo
oad currentt
Load CurMo
th
hat is to be
e included with
w syste
em current calculation
ns. This he
eading appears
when
w
a Load
d Monitor is set to Lo
oad CurMon
n.
Location on
n Homepag
ge: Load Sttatus butto
on
Alarrm Conf. >Power Sys
stem > Rec
ctifiers
•
Rect
R
CurMo
on X – head
ding for a Load Monito
or used forr monitoring non-Eltek
re
ectifiers. This
T
headin
ng appears when a Lo
oad Monitor is set to R
Rect CurMon.
Location on
n Home pag
ge: Rectifier Status b
button
Alarrm Conf. >Power Sys
stem >DcD
Dc Convertter
•
DcDc
D
CurMo
on X– head
ding for a Load Monito
or used forr monitoring non-Eltek
dc-to-dc converters. This
T
headin
ng appearss when a Lo
oad Monito
or is set to
DCDC
D
CurM
Mon.
Location on
n Home pag
ge: DCDC Status
S
buttton
Alarrm Conf. >Power Sys
stem > Sollar Charge
er
•
Solar
S
CurMo
on X– head
ding for a Load Monito
or used forr monitoring non-Eltek
solar charge
ers. This heading app
pears when
n a Load Monitor is se
et to Solar
CurMon.
C
Location on
n Home pag
ge: Solar Charger
C
Sta
atus butto
on
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Alarm Configuration
213
Alarrm Conf. >Power Sys
stem > Win
nd Charge
er
•
Wind
W
CurMo
on X – head
ding for a Load
L
Monit or used forr monitorin
ng wind
chargers. This
T
heading appears when a Load Monitorr is set to W
Wind CurMon.
Location on
n Home pag
ge: Wind Charger
C
Sta
atus button
Alarrm Conf. >Power Sys
stem >Fue
elCell Charrger
•
FuelC
F
CurM
Mon X – hea
ading for a Load Monittor used fo
or monitoring fuel celll
chargers. This
T
heading appears when a Load Monitorr is set to F
FuelC CurM
Mon.
Location on
n Home pag
ge: FuelCe
ell Charger Status bu
utton
o Currents
s – section for configuring the e
eight current sense in
nputs of a
Load Mo
onitor
Fig
gure 5.38 – Load
L
Monitorr - Currents
■ Curre
ent X–mon
nitor for deffining high current th
hresholds for the tota
al
curre
ent read by
y all of the Load
L
Monittor’s curren
nt sense in
nputs
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
214
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
■ Current X.Y – monitors for defining high current thresholds for current
read by each of the Load Monitor’s current sense inputs
o Fuses – section for configuring the eight fuse (or circuit breaker)
monitoring inputs of a Load Monitor
Figure 5.39 – Load Monitor - Fuses
■ Fuses X.Y – monitors for fuses or circuit breakers; fuse rating must be
known
o Power – section for reporting power calculations (not configurable)
Figure 5.40 – Load Monitor - Power
■ TotPower X – monitor for total power measured on all current sense
inputs of a Load Monitor (not configurable)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
215
■ Power X.Y – monitor for power on each current sense input of a Load
Monitor (not configurable)
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Load Monitor.
Table 5.19 – Load Monitor Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section
Heading
Sub-Section
Heading
Alarm
Monitor
Alarm
Events
Unit
Load
Load Primary X*
Currents
Current X
Major High
Minor High
Amp
Current X.Y
Major High
Minor High
Amp
Load CurMon X*
Rectifiers
Rect CurMon X
DcDc
Converter
DcDc CurMon X
Solar
Charger
Solar CurMon X
Wind
Charger
Wind CurMon X
FuelCell
Charger
FuelC CurMon X
Tabs
Calibration
(Current)
Scale
(Shunt)
Fuses
Configurable
Normally
Open
N/A
Scale
(Fuse)
Normally
Closed
Diode
Matrix
Power
TotPower X
N/A
N/A
N/A
Power X.Y
N/A
N/A
N/A
*These headings both appear under the Load page, depending on what Monitor Type is assigned.
Name on Control Units Summary page: CurrMonitor Xor LoadMonitor X
NOTE: Load Monitors are named either CurrMonitor or LoadMonitor on the Control
Units Summary page depending on configuration. CurrMonitor typically refers to a
Load Monitor installed by the factory in large power systems with extensive load
distribution. LoadMonitor is the name for Load Monitors installed in the field.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
216
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Flexi Monito
or
Like the
e Load Mon
nitor, the Flexi Monitor can appe
ear in a num
mber of alarm pages
depending on wha
at Monitor Type it is assigned
a
un
nder the Sy
ystem Con
nf. section
(System
m Conf. > Power
P
Sys
stem > Con
ntrol Systtem >Flexii Monitor). Regardles
ss of
the Mon
nitor Type assigned,
a
the
t Flexi Monitor alwa
ays has the
e same con
nfiguration
n
sections
s and alarm
m monitors
s.
Alarrm Conf. > Power Sy
ystem > Inp
puts
•
Contr
C
FlexM
Mon X – generic heading for a Fllexi Monito
or used to m
monitor
current. This heading appears when
w
a Flex
xi Monitor iss set to Std Fleximon
n.
n Home pag
ge: System
m Inputs bu
utton (ContrFlexMon
n X)
Location on
ystem > Ba
attery
Alarrm Conf. > Power Sy
•
Batt
B
FlexMo
on X – heading for a Flexi
F
Monittor used to monitor ba
attery currrent.
This
T
heading
g appears when a Fle
exi Monitor is set to B
Battery Fle
eximon.
Location on
n Home pag
ge: Battery
y Status b utton (Battt FlexMon X)
ystem > Lo
oad
Alarrm Conf. > Power Sy
•
Load FlexM
Mon X – hea
ading for a Flexi Monittor used to
o monitor lo
oad currentt.
This
T
heading
g appears when a Fle
exi Monitor is set to L
Load Flexim
mon.
Location on
n Home pag
ge: Load Sttatus buttton (Load F
FlexMon X)
Alarrm Conf. > Power Sy
ystem > Re
ectifiers
•
Rect
R
FlexMon X – heading for a Flexi
F
Monittor used fo
or monitorin
ng non-Elte
ek
re
ectifiers. This
T
headin
ng appears when a Fle
exi Monitorr is set to
RectifierFle
R
eximon.
Location on
n Home pag
ge: Rectifier Status b
button (Fle
exi Monitorr X)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Alarm Configuration
217
Alarrm Conf. > Power Sy
ystem > Dc
cDc Conve
erter
•
DcDc
D
FlexM
Mon X– heading for a Flexi
F
Monittor used for monitorin
ng non-Elte
ek
dc-to-dc converters. This
T
headin
ng appearss when a Fllexi Monito
or is set to
DCDC
D
Flexim
mon.
Location on
n Home pag
ge: DCDC Status
S
buttton (Flexi M
Monitor X))
Alarrm Conf. > Power Sy
ystem > So
olar Charge
er
•
Solar
S
FlexM
Mon X – hea
ading for a Flexi Monittor used fo
or monitoring non-Elte
ek
solar charge
ers. This heading app
pears when
n a Flexi Mo
onitor is se
et to Solar
Fleximon.
F
Location on
n Home pag
ge: Solar Charger
C
Sta
atus butto
on (Flexi Mo
onitor X)
Alarrm Conf. >Power Sys
stem > Win
nd Charge
er
•
Wind
W
FlexM
Mon X – hea
ading for a Flexi Monittor used fo
or monitorin
ng wind
chargers. This
T
heading appears when a Fle
exi Monitorr is set to W
Wind Flexim
mon.
Location on
n Home pag
ge: Wind Charger
C
Sta
atus button (Flexi Mo
onitor X)
Alarrm Conf. >Power Sys
stem >Fue
elCell Charrger
•
FuelC
F
FlexM
Mon X – heading for a Flexi Mon itor used fo
or monitoring fuel cell
chargers. This
T
heading appears when a Fle
exi Monitorr is set to F
FuelC
Fleximon.
F
Location on
n Home pag
ge: FuelCe
ell Charger Status bu
utton (Flexii Monitor X
X)
•
In
nputs– sec
ction for co
onfiguring the
t 16 prog
grammable
e inputs of a Flexi Mon
nitor
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
218
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 5.41 – Flexi Monitor Input Alarms
o Current X– monitor for defining high current thresholds for the total
current read by all Flexi Monitor inputs that are programmed for current
measurement
o ProgInput X.Y–monitors for up to 16 inputs of varying types, including
relays, voltage, temperature, current, and fan speed.
•
Power – section for reporting power calculations (not configurable)
Figure 5.42 – Flexi Monitor Power Monitors
o TotPower X – monitor for total power measured on all applicable inputs of
a Flexi Monitor (not configurable)
o Power X.Y – monitor for power on each applicable input of a Flexi Monitor
(not configurable)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
219
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Flexi Monitor.
Table 5.20 – Flexi Monitor Alarm Monitors
Menu
Page
Section Heading
SubSection
Heading
Alarm
Monitor
Alarm
Events
Unit
Rectifiers
RectFlexMon X
Inputs
Current X
Amp
Battery
BattFlexMon X
Major High
Minor High
Load
Load FlexMon X
DcDc
Converter
DcDcFlexMon X
Solar
Charger
Solar FlexMon X
Wind
Charger
Wind FlexMon X
FuelCell
Charger
FuelCFlexMon X
Inputs
ContrFlexMon X
Current X.Y
Major High
Minor High
Amp
Tabs
Calibration
(Current)
Scale
(Shunt)
ProgInput X.Y
Configurable
(Voltage,
Temperature,
Current, Fan
Speed - 4
Events)
N/A
(Volt
DC)
Calibration
(Voltage)
Scale
(Shunt,
Fuse)
(Fan
Speed)
Power
TotPower X
N/A
N/A
N/A
Power X.Y
N/A
N/A
N/A
If configuring a Programmable Input (ProgInput) for Voltage, then an untitled field for a voltage
threshold appears under the General tab (between Event and Alarm Group, where the Unit column
is normally located) and must be specified
Name on Control Units Summary page: Fleximonitor X
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
220
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
I/O Monitor Alarm Monitors
I/O Monitors have six configurable inputs and six output relays. I/O Monitor Type 1
and Type 3 have additional input/output channels for outdoor cabinet applications.
I/O Monitor Type 3 supports hybrid power functions (solar, fuel tank, wind, etc.) by
providing higher resolution inputs than those in the Type 1. See the installation
guides provided with each I/O Monitor for further details.
Alarm Conf. > Power System > Inputs
•
I/O Unit x Input Configuration – section for configuring the input
terminals of the I/O Monitors (Types 1, 2, and 3)
Figure 5.43 – I/O Monitor Programmable Inputs
o ProgInput XX.Y – monitors for up to six inputs: relays, voltage, diode
matrix, clock (inputs vary by terminal for I/O Monitor Type 3)
•
I/O unit X Outdoor Configuration – section for configuring the outdoor
cabinet monitors of I/O Monitor Type 1 or Type 3
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
221
Figure 5.44 – I/O Monitor Outdoor Inputs
o Fan speed XX.Y – monitors for high and low fan speed thresholds (as a
percentage); designed to be used in conjunction with SpeedDev XX.Y
(below)
o OutDoorTemp XX.Y – monitors for high temperature thresholds for
outdoor cabinet temperature inputs; designed to be used to compare the
temperature inside and outside the cabinet for TempDev XX.Y (below)
o SpeedDev. XX.Y – monitors for fan speed deviation (as a percentage)
between the expected fan speed (specified under output relay Fan
Control Y) and the measured fan speed (FanSpeed XX.Y, above)
Location of Fan Control parameter: System Conf. > Power System >
Control System > Outdoor > Fan Control Y
o TempDev. XX.Y – monitors for high and low temperature deviation (in
degrees) between the temperatures inside and outside of the cabinet
The following table lists the specifications for the programmable inputs of I/O
Monitors.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
222
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Table 5.21 – I/O Monitor Programmable Input Specifications
Programmable
Inputs
I/O Monitor Type 1and Type 2
I/O Monitor Type 3
1-2
NO/NC Relay, Pull Up/Down (?), Diode
Matrix
NO/NC Relay, Pull Up/Down (?), Diode
Matrix
Voltage range: 0-75 V (78 mV
resolution)
Voltage range: 0-75 V (78 mV
resolution)
NO/NC Relay, Pull Up/Down (?), Diode
Matrix
NO/NC Relay
3-4
Voltage range: 0-75 V (78 mV
resolution)
5-6
NO/NC Relay, Pull Up/Down (?), Diode
Matrix
Voltage range: 0-75 V (78 mV
resolution)
Voltage range 0-13 V (13 mV
resolution)
NO/NC Relay
Voltage range 0-13 V (13 mV
resolution)
Current measurement 4-20mA (27 μA
resolution)
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Type 1 and Type 2 I/O Monitors.
Table 5.22 – I/O Monitor Type 1 and Type 2 Input Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
Inputs
I/O unit X Input
Configuration
ProgInput XX.Y
Configurable
N/A
(Voltage – 4
events)
(Volt DC)
Calibration
(Voltage)
If configuring a Programmable Input (ProgInput) for Voltage, then an untitled field for a voltage
threshold appears under the General tab (between Event and Alarm Group, where the Unit column
is normally located) and must be specified
The following table lists the alarm monitors for the Type 3 I/O Monitor.
Table 5.23 – I/O Monitor Type 3 Input Alarm Monitors
Menu Page
Section Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
Inputs
I/O unit X Input
Configuration
ProgInput XX.1
Configurable
N/A
ProgInput XX.2
(Voltage – 4
events)
(Volt DC)
Calibration
(Voltage)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Alarm Configuration
Menu Page
223
Section Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
ProgInput XX.3
Configurable
N/A
ProgInput XX.4
(Voltage – 4
events)
(Volt DC)
Calibration
(Voltage)
ProgInput XX.5
Configurable
N/A
ProgInput XX.6
(Voltage, mA
– 4 events)
(Volt DC,
mA)
Calibration
(Voltage,
mA)
If configuring a Programmable Input (ProgInput) for Voltage, then an untitled field for a voltage
threshold appears under the General tab (between Event and Alarm Group, where the Unit column
is normally located) and must be specified.
Name on Control Units Summary page: I/O unit X
The following table lists the outdoor alarm monitors for the Type 1 and Type 3 I/O
Monitors.
Table 5.24 – I/O Monitor Type 1 and Type 3 Outdoor Alarm Monitors
Menu
Page
Section Heading
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Events
Unit
Tabs
Inputs
I/O unit X
Outdoor
Configuration
Fan speed XX.Y
Major High
Minor High
Minor Low
Major Low
%
(Percentage)
N/A
OutDoorTemp XX.Y
Major High
Minor High
Event
Event
Degrees
Config
(Temeprature)
SpeedDev. XX.Y
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
%
(Percentage)
N/A
TempDev. XX.Y
Configurable
Degrees
N/A
Calibration
(Tempeature)
If configuring a Programmable Input (ProgInput) for Voltage, then an untitled field for a voltage
threshold appears under the General tab (between Event and Alarm Group, where the Unit column
is normally located) and must be specified.
Location on Home page: Outdoor Input button (I/O unit X)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
224
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
I/O Monitor Output Relays
Alarm Conf. > Outputs > Select Unit: I/O unit X
All I/O Monitor types have the same appearance on the Outputs page. Each unit
(when selected from the drop-down list) shows six alarm relays that can be mapped
for all available alarm groups.
NOTE: I/O Monitor Type 1 and Type 3 generate higher output on relays 5 and 6.
Figure 5.45 – I/O Monitor Outputs
The following table lists the output relay specifications for the I/O Monitors.
Table 5.25 - Output Relay Specifications for I/O Monitors
Dry/Form-C Relays
I/O Monitor Types 1 & 3
I/O Monitor Type 2
1-4
1A/60W/75V
1A/60W/75V
5-6
8A/300W/75V
1A/60W/75V
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Logs
225
6. Logs
Data collected forr power sys
stem eventts, measurrements, an
nd user acc
counts are
e
stored as
a logs and
d viewable under the Logs categ
gory.
Even
nt Log
The Eve
ent Log pag
ge stores alarm
a
even
nts (when a
alarms are turned on and off),
including controlle
er or monito
or errors an
nd remova
al of module
es.
•
# – row num
mber
•
Date/Time
D
d time of th
he event
– date and
•
Description
D
n – brief des
scription of the even t. Alarms a
are listed b
by the alarm
m
monitor
m
nam
me.
•
Event
E
– reason for the
e alarm eve
ent
There are three na
avigation buttons
b
in the
t bottom
m right corn
ner: First p
page, Previious
page, an
nd Next pa
age. Each page
p
lists 20
2 events..
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
226
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 6.1 – Event Log Page
Data Log
The Data log page shows parameter measurements stored by controllers and CAN
Nodes.
•
Select Unit – drop-down list of connected controllers and CAN Nodes that
record data measurements
•
# - row number
•
Timestamp – date and time the measurements are taken for the record (row)
•
[Parameters] – each column represents a parameter measured by the
controller or CAN Node device; parameters differ by unit
There are two navigation buttons in the top right corner: Latest xx logs and Next
xx logs. Type the number of entries desired in the field beside either button, then
click the button to view those log entries.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Logs
227
Figure 6.2 – Data Log Page
The following table describes the data log parameters for each supported
controller and CAN Node.
Table 6.1 - Parameters by Controller and CAN Node
Controller or CAN Node (Unit)
Parameter Heading
Description
SP2 Master 1
Battery Voltage
Battery voltage measurement
Battery Current
Battery current measurement
Tot Rect Current
Total rectifier current
calculation
Out Door Temp XX.Y
Outdoor temperature
measurement
Fan speed XX.Y
Fan speed calculation
Prog Input X.YY
Programmable input; actual
heading name may change
depending on the assignment
(e.g., voltage or current)
(Smartpack2 Master)
I/O unit X
(I/O Monitor, Types 1 and 3)
Fleximonitor X
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
228
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Energy Log
The Energy logs page shows energy calculations (in Watt-hours) for major power
categories; aggregated by hour, day, and week.
Figure 6.3 – Hourly Energy Log Page (as an example)
•
Time tag – column that appears first on the time-based tables (Hourly, Daily,
and Weekly); time stamp for the energy calculation.
The time-based Energy log tables (excluding the Accumulated page) have the
same tabs for each power category:
•
Summary – lists energy totals for Load and Rectifier; any measurements
from connected CAN Nodes that are monitoring these power categories are
included in the totals.
•
Load – lists energy totals for load measurements; columns are added for
each controller and CAN Node that measures load current
o Load Summary – total for load measurements; includes controller sense
inputs and any Load Monitors set to Load CurMon or Flexi Monitors set to
Load Fleximon
o LoadPrimary X – column for a Load Monitor set to Std Loadmon
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Logs
229
o Load CurMon XX – column for a Load Monitor set to Load CurMon
o Load FlexMon – column for a Flexi Monitor set to Load Fleximon
•
Rectifier – lists energy totals for rectifier output; columns are added for each
controller and CAN Node that measures rectifier current
o Rectifier Summary – total for rectifier measurements; includes rectifier
measurements and any Load Monitors set to Rect CurMon or Flexi
Monitors set to Rect Fleximon
o Rectifier Group X – energy measurements for total rectifier output in a
rectifier group
o Rect CurMon XX – column for a Load Monitor set to Rect CurMon
o Rect FlexMon X – column for a Flexi Monitor set to Rect Fleximon
•
(Solar) – lists energy totals for solar chargers; columns are added for each
CAN Node that measures solar energy
o Solar Charger Summary – total for solar measurements; includes
controller measurements and any Load Monitors set to Solar CurMon or
Flexi Monitors set to Solar Fleximon
o Solar CurMon XX – column for a Load Monitor set to Solar CurMon
o Solar FlexMon X – column for a Flexi Monitor set to Solar Fleximon
•
(DCDC) – lists energy totals for dc-to-dc converters; columns are added for
each CAN Node that measures dc-to-dc energy
o DcDc Converter Summary – total for dc-to-dc converter measurements;
includes controller measurements and any Load Monitors set to DCDC
CurMon or Flexi Monitors set to DCDC Fleximon
o DCDC CurMon XX – column for a Load Monitor set to DCDC CurMon
o DCDC FlexMon X – column for a Flexi Monitor set to DCDC Fleximon
•
(Wind) – lists energy totals for wind chargers; columns are added for each
CAN Node that measures wind energy
o Wind Charger Summary – total for wind charger measurements; includes
any Load Monitors set to Wind CurMon or Flexi Monitors set to Wind
Fleximon
o Wind CurMon XX – column for a Load Monitor set to Wind CurMon
o Wind FlexMon X – column for a Flexi Monitor set to Wind Fleximon
•
(Fuel Cell) – lists energy totals for fuel cell chargers; columns are added for
each CAN Node that measures fuel cell energy
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
230
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
o FuelCell Charger Summary – total for fuel cell charger measurements;
includes any Load Monitors set to FuelC CurMon or Flexi Monitors set to
FuelC Fleximon
o FuelC CurMon XX – column for a Load Monitor set to FuelC CurMon
o FuelC FlexMon X – column for a Flexi Monitor set to FuelC Fleximon
•
Battery – lists energy totals for batteries; columns are added each Flexi
Monitor that measures battery current (set to Battery Fleximon)
o Batt FlexMon X – column for a Flexi Monitor set to Battery Fleximon
Table 6.2 – Names for Load and Flexi Monitors
CAN Node
Appears Under Tab…
Appears As…
When Configured As
Monitor Type…
Load Monitor*
Load**
LoadPrimary X
Std Loadmon
Load**
Load CurMon X
Load CurMon
Rectifiers
Rect CurMon X
Rect CurMon
DCDC
DcDc CurMon X
DCDC CurMon
Solar
Solar CurMon X
Solar CurMon
Wind
Wind CurMon X
Wind CurMon
Fuel Cell
FuelC CurMon X
FuelC CurMon
Rectifiers
Rect FlexMon X
RectifierFleximon
Battery
Batt FlexMon X
Battery Fleximon
Load
Load FlexMon X
Load Fleximon
DCDC
DcDc FlexMon X
DCDC Fleximon
Solar
Solar FlexMon X
Solar Fleximon
Wind
Wind FlexMon X
Wind Fleximon
Fuel Cell Inputs
FuelC FlexMon X
FuelC Fleximon
Flexi Monitor*
*Load and Flexi Monitors can be configured to monitor several categories of current through the
System Conf. page (System Conf. > Power System > Control System > Current Monitor (for
Load Monitor) / Flexi Monitor). The Configuration Heading/Section Name appears when the
monitor is configured with the corresponding Monitor Type under the column When Configured As
Monitor Type….
**The Load Monitor appears under the Load page if configured as either Std Loadmon or Load
CurMon. As Std Loadmon (LoadPrimary), the currents monitored are excluded from system current
calculations; as Load CurMon, the currents monitored are included with system current calculations.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Logs
231
Accumulated
The Accumulated page lists total accumulated energy (in Watt-hours) by power
categories over the lifetime of the controller. Totals are provided for Load,
Rectifier, and Battery by default. Solar, DcDc Converter, Wind, FuelCell, and
Generator appear if enabled or present in the system.
Figure 6.4 – Accumulated Energy Page
Hourly
The Hourly page lists hourly energy totals over the past two days. Time tag format
is Day.Month – Hour (DD.MM – HH), and uses a 24-hour clock.
Figure 6.5 – Hourly Energy Log Page
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
232
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Daily
The Daily page lists daily energy totals over the last 52 days. Time tag format is
Day.Month (DD.MM).
Figure 6.6 – Daily Energy Log Page
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Logs
233
Week
kly
The Wee
ekly page lists weeklly energy totals
t
over the past y
year. Time tag forma
at is
Week – Year (wXX
X – YYYY).
Fig
gure 6.7 – We
eekly Energy
y Log Page
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
234
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Generator Log
The Generator log page displays accumulated run time and fuel consumption over
daily, weekly, and monthly periods for up to two generator fuel tanks.
Figure 6.8 – Generator Log Page
•
Select Tank – drop-down list of available fuel tanks that are being monitored
(maximum of two tanks)
o Accumulated run time[hours] – total run time while under monitoring
o Accumulated fuel consumption[units] – total fuel consumed while under
monitoring
o Day – displays run time (in minutes) and fuel consumption over the past
52 days. Date format is Day.Month (DD.MM).
o Week – displays run time (in hours) and fuel consumption over the past
year (52 weeks). Date format is Week – Year (wXX – YYYY).
o Month – displays run time (in hours) and fuel consumption over the past
52 months. Date format is Month Year (Mmm YYYY).
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Logs
235
Battery Cycles
The Battery cycles page displays the number of battery cycles (full charge
followed by full discharge, or vice-versa) in total and over time intervals.
Figure 6.9 – Battery Cycles Log
•
Total number of battery cycles – total number of battery cycles recorded
while under monitoring
•
Index – index number; the last 52 records are viewable
•
Day – the number of battery cycles over the last day
•
Week – the number of battery cycles over the last week
•
Month – the number of battery cycles over the last month
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
236
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Battery Te
ests
The Batttery tests
s page disp
plays a tablle for the re
esults of b
battery tests.
Figure 6.10 – Battery Test Results Log
•
# – record number
n
of each
e
batte
ery test
•
Start
S
time – time whe
en the batttery test sttarted
•
Test
T
duration [min] – battery test duration
n, in minute
es
•
Test
T
type – type of ba
attery testt executed (Interval, A
Automatic,, or Manuall)
•
Average
A
current [A] – average discharge
d
c
current (in a
amps) mea
asured ove
er
th
he entire te
est duratio
on
•
Disch.
D
Energ
gy [Ah] – total
t
energy (in Amp-h
hours) disc
charged du
uring the
battery
b
testt
•
Temp
T
[°C] – average battery
b
tem
mperature d
during the test
•
End
E voltage
e [V] – final battery voltage mea
asured at tthe end of the batterry
te
est
•
Calc
C
quality
y [%] – battery quality calculatio
on based o
on the batttery test
re
esult, given
n as a perc
centage of the origina
al capacity that rema
ains for
charging
•
Termin.
T
critteria – reas
son for the
e terminatio
on of the b
battery test (End Volttage
or End Time
e)
•
Test
T
result – symbol indicating whether
w
th
he test wass successffully comple
eted
or not.
•
Test
T
Details
s Icon – clic
cking the ic
con opens the Batterry test dettails window
w
NOTE:
N
The Test
T
Details Icon only
y appears ffor successful batterry tests.
•
Battery
B
tes
st details – detailed results of a successfu
ul battery ttest
o Start Da
ate & Time – date and
d time the battery tesst began
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Logs
237
o Stop Tim
me – date and
a time th
he battery test ended
d
o Duration
n – total tim
me of the battery
b
tesst
o End Volttage – batttery voltag
ge at the en
nd of the ttest
o Discharg
ged Ah – to
otal amp-ho
ours discha
arged
o Calculatted Quality
y – battery quality pe
ercentage b
based on te
est results
s
o Average
e Current – average battery
b
disc
charge currrent
o Battery Temperature – batte
ery temperrature during the testt
o Test res
sult – resultt of the battery test (successfu
ul or not)
o Termina
ation Cause
e – reason for the batttery test e
ending
o Select Unit
U
– selec
ct controlle
ers or CAN Nodes tha
at support b
battery inp
puts
o (Inputs) – check bo
oxes for ea
ach battery
y input on tthe unit se
elected; che
eck
or unche
eck each bo
ox to includ
de or exclu
ude the inp
put from th
he chart and
table below.
Figure 6.11
1 – Battery Test
T
Details W
Window (and
d Chart)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
238
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
o Chart – tab
t for the
e Battery Test
T
Discha
arge data g
graph
■ Batte
ery Test Diischarge data – line g
graph of ba
attery testt data form
m the
inputts of the se
elected unit
NOTE
E: Details fo
or each datta point on
n the graph
h can be se
een by
hovering over a data pointt with the c
cursor (mo
ouse-over)
■ (Inpu
uts) – legen
nd for each
h data line a
and point o
on the grap
ph; each input
s left)
can be
b toggled on and offf by clicking
g on its sym
mbol (on its
o Table – tab
t for the
e data pointts for each
h input on tthe Chart p
page
■ Time – the firstt column lis
sts the time
e at which each data
a point was
s
captu
ured
■ (Inpu
ut) – the remaining co
olumns represent eac
ch input tha
at is selectted
for th
he controlle
er or CAN Node
N
unit
Figure
F
6.12 – Battery Tes
st Details Wiindow with T
Table Tab
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Logs
239
Change Log
The Change log page lists system-level changes for technical support purposes.
Figure 6.13 – Change Log Page
NOTE: This page is only viewable with admin login.
There are three navigation buttons in the bottom right corner: First page, Previous
page, and Next page. Each page lists 16 events.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
240
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Save Logs to File
The Save logs to file page is for generating a file for any or all logs, which can be
downloaded and saved.
Figure 6.14 – Save Logs to File Page
•
Select/Unselect all – check this box to select or unselect all logs
o Event log – check this box to generate a file with the Event log
o Number of log items – enter the number of events to include in the log
file
o Data log – check this box to generate a file with the Data log
o Number of log items – enter the number of events to include in the log
file
o Choose control unit – drop-down list of controllers and/or CAN Nodes
that record data logs; select a unit from which to generate the data log
o Energy log – check this box to generate a file with the Energy log
o Generator log – check this box to generate a file for the Generator log
o Battery cycle log – check this box to generate a file with the Battery
cycle log
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Logs
241
o Battery test log – check this box to generate a file for the Battery test
log
o Change log – check this box to generate a file with the Change log
o Number of log items – enter the number of events to include in the log
file
o Module inventory – check this box to generate a file with the inventory of
all controllers, monitors, and power modules connected and operating in
the power system
•
Generate log(s) – after checking one or more log boxes, the Generate log(s)
button can be pressed to generate a file for one or more logs. A status
indicator appears to the right of the button to show progress on generating
the log file.
NOTE: Only one file is generated by clicking this button; it contains all logs
that are selected.
NOTE: The log file generated is in the comma-separated values (CSV) format
and uses semicolons (;) as delimiters. Typical spreadsheet applications can
open CSV files.
•
Download log – after the log file is generated, the Download log button can
be pressed to save the file to the computer
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
242
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Accounts Log
The Accounts log page displays login and logout attempts of all users, as well as
failed login attempts.
Figure 6.15 – Accounts Log Page
NOTE: This page is only viewable with admin login.
•
# - record number; up to 20 records are shown on each page
•
Account – user or account name associated with the activity
NOTE: “Illegal user” means that the user name entered during the attempt
does not exist in the controller. It indicates a failed login attempt, as the
controller does not permit access by non-existent user names. A failed
password attempt is logged as “Illegal password.”
•
Description – action type taken by the account (log in or log out)
•
IP Address – IP address of the computer used for the account
•
Date – date of the account activity, with format Year-Month-Day (YYYY-MMDD)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Logs
•
243
Time – time of the account activity, with format Hour:Minute:Second
(HH:MM:SS, 24-hour clock)
There are three navigation buttons in the bottom right corner: First page, Previous
page, and Next page. Each page lists 20 events.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
244
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
7. Comm
C
ands
The Com
mmands se
ection conttains sets of
o actions that can be manually
y executed
d
through
h the controller. These actions principally
p
c
consist of resets, tes
sts, softwa
are
upgrade
es, and load
ding or sav
ving configuration file
es.
Systtem
The Sys
stem page contains commands
c
for system
m-wide actions involv
ving resets and
audio/v
visual notification (LED
D, buzzer) tests.
t
Figure 7.1
1 – System Co
ommands Pa
age (Control login)
•
Reset
R
Manu
ual Alarm(s
s)/Silence Buzzer – resets man
nually-trigg
gered alarm
ms
and the buz
zzer. This is useful to
o silence nu
uisance ala
arms and m
minor alarm
ms
trriggered while
w
performing mainttenance.
NOTE:
N
This silences the built-in buzzer for the Smarttpack2 Mas
ster contro
oller,
not any aux
xiliary or ex
xternal buzzer boardss.
•
Reset
R
Numb
ber of Mod
dules – rese
ets the num
mber of co
ontrollers, m
monitors, a
and
power
p
modu
ules when any are ad
dded or rem
moved from
m the syste
em. This
eliminates communica
c
ation alarm
ms when a u
unit is perm
manently re
emoved fro
om
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Commands
245
the system by resetting the number of units to the number that are currently
connected to the controller.
•
Delete Event Log – erases the Event Log; only available with admin login
(grayed out otherwise)
•
Set Default Configuration – resets system values to the defaults for the
selection made on the Choose system voltage drop-down list to the right.
CAUTION: This action is a system reset, removing customized configurations
and restoring default values. It returns the controller to its original
production state and may require assistance from Eltek to restore settings
to post-production values (i.e., the settings it had when shipped for customer
use).
o Choose system voltage – drop-down list of nominal dc system voltages
•
Set Default Configuration with Default-xml files – resets system values
using a properly-formatted Eltek XML file. An XML file can be used to
configure all controller parameters.
•
Set Default Calibration – resets controllers and CAN Nodes to default
calibration values. The unit to be reset is selected in the Choose unit dropdown list to the right. This is useful when manual calibration was
unsuccessful, possibly triggering measurement and calculation problems.
o Choose unit – drop-down list of connected controllers and CAN Nodes
that have calibration reset
•
Controller led-test – command to test the notification LEDs on the controller
•
Rectifier led-test – command to test the notification LEDs on the rectifiers
•
Buzzer test – command to test the buzzer in the controller
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
246
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Battery
The Battery page features commands for battery actions.
Figure 7.2 – Battery Commands Page
•
Start Battery Test – starts a manual battery test based on the configuration
on the Test page
System Conf. > Power System > Battery > Test
Either the Simplified Test or the Normal Test is executed (depending on
which one is selected on the Test page).
•
Stop Battery Test – stops a battery test that is in progress
NOTE: Manually stopping a battery test causes the results to be discarded.
•
Start Battery Boost – starts battery boost charging based on the
configuration on the Boost page
System Conf. > Power System > Battery > Boost
•
Stop Battery Boost – stops battery boost charging
•
Start Battery Equalize – starts battery equalize charging based on the
configuration on the Equalize page
System Conf. > Power System > Battery > Equalize
•
Stop Battery Equalize – stops battery equalize charging
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Commands
247
Output Test
The Output Test page has commands for testing output channels on controllers
and CAN Nodes.
Figure 7.3 – Output Test Page (Admin login)
NOTE: Activating output channels triggers alarm notifications.
NOTE: Output tests require admin login.
•
Output Test – drop-down list of controllers and CAN Nodes with output
channels that can be tested. The output channels mirror the Outputs tab of
the Alarm Configuration section:
Alarm Conf. > Power System > Outputs
NOTE: Activating a Virtual Input channel on the Output Test page activates
the notification on the Virtual Inputs page. The difference is that activation
on the Output Test is temporary (it deactivates after the Output Test
duration expires); a Virtual Input activated on the Virtual Inputs page
remains so until manually deactivated.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
248
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Table 7.1 – Controller and CAN Node Output Channels
Controller or CAN Node
Output Channel(s)
SP2 Master 1
Buzzer
(Smartpack2 Master)
Virtual 1-4
SP2 BasicInd X
Batt contactor
(Smartpack2 Basic Industrial)
Load contactor 1-2
Alarm output 1-3
SP2 Basic X
Batt contactor
(Smartpack2 Basic)
Load contactor 1-2
I/O unit X
Alarm output 1-6
(I/O Monitor, Types 1-3)
SmartPack S 1
Alarm output 1-6
(Smartpack S)
Batt contactor
Load contactor
Buzzer
Virtual 1-4
Compack 1
Alarm output 1-3
(Compack)
Batt contactor
Load contactor
Virtual 1-4
•
Output Test duration – time duration (in seconds) for each test activation
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Commands
249
Virtual Inputs
The Virtual Inputs page is for activating and deactivating Virtual Inputs of
controller units.
Figure 7.4 – Virtual Inputs Commands Page
•
Description – names of the Virtual Inputs
•
Activate/Deactivate – buttons to activate or deactivate Virtual Inputs that
are enabled. Inactive Virtual Inputs have a button labeled Activate; active
sVirtual Inputs have a red button labeled Deactivate. If any Virtual Inputs are
not enabled, the button is grayed out and labeled Disabled.
NOTE: Virtual Inputs are enabled and configured under the Alarm
Configuration page:
Alarm Conf. > Power System > Inputs > [Controller] Input Configuration
•
Event – shows the alarm event that is configured for the Virtual Input
•
Alarm Group – shows the alarm group that is configured for the Virtual Input
Software Upgrade
The Software Upgrade page is for upgrading the software for each controller and
CAN Node connected to the power system.
NOTE: For more details on this procedure and additional methods for performing a
software upgrade, please see Eltek document 370036.063 – Software Upgrade
Procedure.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
250
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 7.5 – Software Upgrade Page (Smartpack2 only)
NOTE: This feature is available for Smartpack2 controllers only and requires
administrator (admin) permissions.
•
Unit table – lists all connected controllers and CAN Nodes
o Type – name of the controller or CAN Node unit
o Part # - Eltek part number of the unit
o Ver # - revision number of the unit (hardware)
o Serial # - unique serial number of the unit
o SW part # - Eltek part number of the embedded software
o SW Ver # - revision number of the software on the unit
o Status – status indicator for the unit (whether or not it is in alarm)
•
Selected Unit – Information fields for a unit that is selected on the table
•
Start Software Update – click this button to start the software update,
using the latest file saved to the SD card
NOTE: The software file must be loaded on to the SD card. Alternatively,
software can be upgraded from a file on the computer by using the Eltek
Network Utility.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Commands
251
Load/Save Config
The Load/Save Config pages facilitate loading and saving controller configuration
files.
Load Config File
The Load Config File page is for loading a configuration file from the computer into
the controller.
NOTE: HEX configuration files may not load properly if the software for the
controller or CAN Node was upgraded after the HEX file was saved. Please contact
Eltek for assistance if this occurs.
Figure 7.6 – Load Config File Page
•
Select file – click the Browse… button to find the configuration file (either an
XML or Intel HEX file) on the computer
•
Unit table – once a configuration file is selected, the applicable controller or
CAN Node device is selected for upload
•
Upload Config file – this button appears in the lower right corner when a
configuration file is selected. Once clicked, a progress bar appears to the left
of the button.
NOTE: If the selected file is not correctly configured for Eltek units, a
warning appears below the file information area stating that the file does not
contain the correct information.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
252
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Save Config File
The Save Config File page is for saving a configuration file to the computer.
NOTE: It is recommended that configuration files for each controller and CAN Node
be saved and stored as backup after the power system is configured, as well as
each time setpoints are reconfigured.
Figure 7.7 – Save Config File (First Page)
•
Select/Unselect all – the check box selects and unselects all devices on the
unit table below it
•
Unit table – check the box on the far left of each row to select the
controllers and CAN Nodes for which a configuration files should be saved
•
Next – click the Next button (below the table) after selecting all devices
from which a configuration file is to be saved to the computer. Another page
appears for saving the files.
•
Back – click the Back button to return to the Save Config File page
•
Start reading files – click this button to start assembling the configuration
files. A notice appears indicating that the selected file(s) will be read. Click
OK to continue.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Commands
253
Figure 7.8 – Save Config File (Second Page)
•
Stop reading files – this button appears after the Start reading files button
has been clicked. Click the Stop reading files button to terminate the
reading progress. A progress bar appears below this button showing the
progress of generating the configuration file.
Once the configuration file is created, a dialog box opens asking where the
file should be saved. Choose the location on the computer where the file is
to be saved.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
254
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 7.9 – Safe Config Page (Reading File)
•
Read next file – If multiple files are selected, this button appears after each
file is read, along with a Cancel button. Click Read next file to continue to
the next configuration file, or click Cancel to stop reading configuration files.
Figure 7.10 – Save Config Page (Read Next File)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Statistics
s
255
8. Statist
S
tics
The pag
ge for statistics provides downlo
oadable files for a va
ariety of system
measurements an
nd calculatiions.
NOTE: Currently,
C
the
t Smartp
pack S conttroller has the Statisstics categ
gory but does
not support it. This
s category
y is not ava
ailable on C
Compack co
ontrollers.
Statistics
The Sta
atistics sec
ction is for statistics pages.
p
Brow
wse SD Card
C
The Bro
owse SD Ca
ard page is an FTP vie
ewer for sta
atistics file
es on the c
controller’s SD
card; this is availab
ble on the Smartpack
k2 controller only.
Figure 8.1
8 – Browse
e SD Card (Sm
martpack2 on
nly)
NOTE: This
T
page may
m be blo
ocked if the
e network d
does not p
permit acce
ess to FTP
servers.
•
FTP
F root –p
product doc
cumentatio
on and softtware filess at the FTP
P root
directory; th
here are als
so other diirectories:
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
256
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
o CONFIG – directory containing configuration files for controller and CAN
Node units connected to the system
o STATS – directory containing system measurements and performance
statistics (such as current, voltage, temperature), sorted by year. Files for
individual input feeds and temperature inputs are also available (under the
FEEDERS and TEMPS directories, respectively).
o LOG – directory containing event and data logs
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Help
257
9. Help
H
The Hellp button opens
o
the Eltek
E
Help System
S
forr the web interface (C
CWUI –
Controller Web-ba
ased User Interface).
I
Please co
ontact Elte
ek for the la
atest access
credenttials.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
258
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
10. Logout
The Log
gout button
n ends the current se
ession, logg
ging out off the user a
account an
nd
returnin
ng to the la
anding page
e.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Procedures
259
260
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
1. Procedures Overview
Setup of controller functions often requires configuring parameters in several areas
of the Web Interface. This section describes the procedures for common controller
tasks and functions according to the following categories:
•
Setup
•
Operation
•
Administration
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Setup
261
2. Setup
S
This sec
ction descrribes proce
edures for basic
b
contrroller setup
p that can be
accomp
plished thro
ough the Web
W Interface.
Setting Flo
oat (Re
eferenc
ce) Vo
oltage
CAUTION:: Refer to the
t battery
y manufactturer's documented s
specificatio
ons
for recommended flo
oat voltage
e per batte
ery cell. It iss the user's
responsibility to enter proper battery
b
parrameters.
NOTE: Float
F
voltag
ge can be calculated
c
based on tthe voltage
e required per battery
y
cell.
f
voltag
ge through the web in
nterface:
To set float
1.
Click
C
on the
e System Conf.
C
icon in
n the top m
menu bar.
2.
In
n the left menu
m
bar, click
c
on the
e Power System butto
on (below tthe Power
System
S
hea
ading), then
n choose System
S
Volltages.
3.
Locate the fields
f
calle
ed Reference voltage
e. One is fo
or voltage p
per cell (Ce
ell),
and the oth
her is total voltage for the syste
em (Total).
4.
Enter the vo
oltage requ
uired using
g either volttage per ce
ell or total system
voltage. The
e float volttage for the other fie ld is autom
matically ca
alculated w
when
th
he change is saved.
5.
Click
C
the dis
skette icon
n in the low
wer right-ha
and corner to save th
he change. The
voltage valu
ue in paren
ntheses updates to re
eflect the n
new float v
voltage vallue.
Float vo
oltage is no
ow set.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
262
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Fig
gure 2.1 – Se
etting Float Voltage
V
thro
ough the Web
b Interface
Setting Rectifierr Current Lim
mit
Rectifier current limit restricts total output curre nt of all rectifiers.
NOTE: Rectifier
R
cu
urrent limit manages total
t
rectiffier output rather tha
an output p
per
rectifierr. Because Eltek rectifiers are co
onstant-po
ower, this m
means thatt voltage is
s
adjusted
d to limit current. The
erefore, the controlle
er overridess rectifier c
current limit
when th
here is any conflict with battery
y voltage se
ettings.
To set rectifier currrent limit through
t
th
he web inte
erface:
1. Click
C
on the
e System Conf.
C
icon in
n the top m
menu bar.
2. In
n the left menu
m
bar, click
c
on Rec
ctifier buttton (below the Powerr System
heading), th
hen choose
e Configura
ation.
3. To
T turn on rectifier
r
current limit, locate the
e Current liimit line an
nd select the
check box next
n
to the
e word Enab
ble.
4. To
T set the current
c
limit value, en
nter the de
esired maxiimum curre
ent value in
n
th
he field Current limitt value.
NOTE:
N
This value is fo
or total rectifier outpu
ut, not indiividual recttifiers.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
263
5. Click
C
the dis
skette icon
n in the low
wer right-ha
and corner to save ch
hanges.
Rectifier current limit is now set.
Figure 2.2 – Setting
g Rectifier Current
C
Limit through the
e Web Interfa
ace
Battery Co
onfigurration
Multi-ba
ay power sy
ystems (lik
ke the Eltek
k Scalable)) may require some setup for th
he
followin
ng features
s:
•
Number
N
of banks
b
•
Capacity
C
an
nd number of battery strings
•
Setting
S
and
d/or editing
g the batte
ery table
To navig
gate to the
e General Battery
B
con
nfiguration
n page:
1. Click
C
on the
e System Conf.
C
icon in
n the top m
menu bar.
2. In
n the left menu
m
bar, click
c
on Batttery butto
on (below tthe Power System
heading). The Configu
uration pag
ge appearss by defaullt (the firstt page unde
er
th
he Battery
y sub-menu
u).
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
264
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 2.3
2 – Generall Battery Con
nfiguration P
Page
The follo
owing secttions expla
ain the purp
pose and c
configuratio
on of each feature.
Numb
ber of Banks
B
The Num
mber of ba
anks param
meter reflec
cts the tottal number of controlllers that arre
equippe
ed to monittor batterie
es within th
he system.. In multi-ba
ay systems (like the
Eltek Sc
calable sys
stem) the value
v
show
wn should m
match the ttotal numb
ber of bays
(both re
ectifier and distributio
on) that are
e present in
n the syste
em lineup.
NOTE: In
I the Scala
able power system, iff the value
e in the Num
mber of ba
anks field is
s
not the same as th
he total nu
umber of ba
ays (both rrectifier and distribution bays), tthen
adjust itt to match by typing in the num
mber of bay
ys present in the lineu
up. This
affects how many
y Smartpac
ck2 Basic In
ndustrial co
ontrollers a
appear on c
certain pag
ges.
Capacity an
nd Number of Battery
B
y String
gs
It is assumed that all battery
y strings co
onnected tto the systtem are red
dundant an
nd
thus have the sam
me ampere--hour capa
acity. To en
nter the ba
attery Ah c
capacity:
1. Enter the Ah capacity for a singlle string in the Capac
city [per sttring] field.
2. Enter the nu
umber of battery
b
strings in the Number off Battery s
strings field.
The con
ntroller automatically
y multiplies the amperre-hour cap
pacity by tthe numberr of
battery strings and shows th
hat value at
a the botto
om of the m
main displa
ay screen.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
265
Figure 2.4
2 – Battery
y Capacity on
n Display Scrreen
Batte
ery Tab
ble
The batttery table permits en
ntering or uploading
u
c
custom batttery speciifications.
Such sp
pecification
ns help determine batttery healtth by comp
paring test data to kn
nown
perform
mance value
es.
By default the values are fille
ed in by the Eltek Std
d (Eltek Sta
andard) table. To
change either the values or the
t table:
1. Click
C
the Ed
dit Battery Table in th
he Battery
y Type line..
2. The
T Battery
y table win
ndow appea
ars. By deffault the o
option to us
se Eltek's
predefined
p
battery table is enab
bled.
3. Uncheck
U
the Enable box.
b
The window populates with
h the batte
ery table and
action butto
ons.
4. Iff any chang
ges are ma
ade, be sure
e to click th
he Save ico
on (diskettte) in the lo
ower
right hand corner.
c
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
266
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 2.5
5 – Battery Table Page (ttable to be lo
oaded)
The follo
owing actio
ons can be
e taken, depending on
n what is desired:
•
To
T load a ta
able availab
ble in the controller s ystem (usu
ually just the Eltek
Standard
S
ta
able), selec
ct the table
e from the Template Options drropdown
menu.
m
Then
n click the Load Table
e button. T
The table a
and values load into tthe
Table
T
Detaiils box in rig
ght side off the windo
ow.
•
To
T edit the loaded tab
ble, select the
t Edit ta
able button
n in the leftt side of th
he
window.
w
Th
his action also
a
allows rows to be
e added or deleted (u
using the tw
wo
buttons
b
imm
mediately below
b
the Edit
E
table button).
•
To
T either up
pload a batttery table file or to save the cu
urrent table
e to a file, c
click
th
he File ope
eration tab
b, to the rig
ght of the T
Table Details tab.
o To uploa
ad a battery table file
e, click the Browse… b
button to o
open an
explore window
w
an
nd locate th
he file. The
e file must have a ".tb
bl" extensio
on.
Once loc
cated, select the file and
a click th
he Upload file button
n to load it into
the conttroller.
o To save the curren
nt battery table
t
as a ffile, click th
he Save to file… button.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
267
Figure 2.6
2 – Battery
y Table - File Operation P
Page
Setting Battery Chargi
C
ing Currrent L
Limit
Battery current lim
mit restrictts charge current. Elte
ek controlllers have two separate
current limit param
meters for different power
p
situa
ations: Mains (normall AC utility
service)) and Generator (AC backup).
b
NOTE: A shunt is required
r
in order to us
se battery current lim
mit.
To set battery
b
cha
arging current limit th
hrough the
e web interfface:
1. Click
C
on the
e System Conf.
C
icon in
n the top m
menu bar.
2. In
n the left menu
m
bar, click
c
on Batttery butto
on (below tthe Power System
heading), th
hen choose
e Current Limit.
L
3. To
T turn on battery
b
currrent limit, locate the
e Battery c
current limiitation line
e
and check the
t box nex
xt to the word
w
Enable
e.
4. To
T set curre
ent limit va
alues, enterr the presc
cribed max
ximum curre
ent value in
th
he fields fo
or Mains fe
eed currentt limit (normal AC serrvice) and G
Generator
fe
eed curren
nt limit (if applicable;
a
e and generrator speciifications).
check site
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
268
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
NOTE:
N
Norm
mally the va
alue for Ge
enerator fe
eed currentt limit is lo
ower than
Mains
M
feed current lim
mit. If the Generator
G
ffeed curre
ent limit is not going tto
be
b used, the
en simply put
p the sam
me value here as the Mains feed current
limit.
5. Click
C
the dis
skette icon
n in the low
wer right-ha
and corner to save ch
hanges.
Battery charging current
c
limit is now se
et.
Figure 2.7 – Setting Batttery Charging Current LLimit through
h the Web Intterface
Battery Dis
scharg
ge Testting
CAUTION:: Battery discharge te
esting requ
uires speciffications frrom the
battery manufacture
m
er. DO NOT
T proceed w
with batterry testing o
of any kind
d
without ha
aving the documente
d
ed specifica
ations on h
hand. If una
available,
contactt the battery manufac
cturer directly. Eltek does not p
provide batttery
discharg
ge specific
cations.
There are two metthods of ex
xecuting battery disc
charge testting: Simpllified and
Normal.
•
The
T Simpliffied test do
oes not use
e the batte
ery table fo
or referenc
ce (see the
section “Batttery Table
e” beginning on page 265); inste
ead, it relie
es on userentered values to determine whether the b
batteries a
are able to discharge for
th
he entire duration
d
specified (Ma
ax duration
n) or meet the amp-h
hour value ((Max
discharge) before
b
falliing to the voltage
v
pe
er cell specified in the
e End voltage
fiield. All three parame
eters are us
ser-defined
d, but mustt be within
n the
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
269
specifications provided by the battery manufacturer. The test stops when
any one of the parameters mentioned above (Max duration, Max discharge,
or End voltage) is reached.
•
The Normal Test relies on the battery table for reference, using the battery
specifications to determine end voltage. The only editable parameter that
affects termination of the test is Max duration.
NOTE: Under Normal Test, battery discharge results are evaluated only if the
test is stopped by reaching End voltage. Results are discarded if a test is
terminated due to reaching Max duration or any other reasons (such as
manually stopping the test).
Other configurable parameters on the Battery Test Configuration page:
•
Guard time is the number of hours that a battery test should be delayed
after a loss of AC input power.
•
Interval test facilitates regular, periodic battery testing and also
accommodates the inhibiting testing during certain months (for example,
summer months).
•
Automatic test initiates testing when AC input power is lost. Data is
recorded only if End voltage is reached.
•
Discontinuance test is an advanced battery feature that is used to detect
defective or failed battery cells in unbalanced battery strings. It requires at
least two battery strings and a separate shunt in each string. The
Discontinuance test is not covered in this document.
Battery discharge testing is designed to record the results of battery discharge—
whether scheduled, manually started, or caused by an outage of ac power. The
following figures show the Battery Test page for both Simplified and Normal test
parameters. The first figure is for the Simplified test:
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
270
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 2.8 – Battery Test Page (Simp
plified test selected)
The follo
owing figure shows which
w
fields
s are not c onfigurable
e when sett for a Norm
mal
battery test:
Figure 2.9 – Battery Te
est Page (Norrmal test sellected)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
271
To set battery
b
disc
charge tes
sting throug
gh the web
b interface
e:
1. Click
C
on the
e System Conf.
C
icon in
n the top m
menu bar.
2. In
n the left menu
m
bar, click
c
on Batttery butto
on (below tthe Power System
heading).
3. Click
C
on Tes
st.
4. Enter settin
ngs as requ
uired for the batteriess. Refer to the descriptions of tthe
fiields above
e.
5. Click
C
on the
e save icon (diskette) to save ch
hanges.
NOTE: The
T battery
y table is lo
ocated und
der the Con
nfiguration
n menu. To access the
battery table, choose System
m Conf. > Power
P
Sysstem > Batttery > Con
nfiguration
n>
[Edit ba
attery table
e].
Figurre 2.10 – Editt Battery Disscharge Tablle
NOTE: The
T battery
y table can
n be adjuste
ed only thrrough the w
web interfa
ace. It cann
not
be chan
nged throug
gh the disp
play.
See the
e section “M
Manual Battery Discha
arge Test” for instruc
ctions on m
manually
executing a battery discharg
ge test.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
272
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Battery Temperature Compensation
CAUTION: Battery temperature compensation requires specifications from the
battery manufacturer. DO NOT proceed without having the documented
specifications on hand. If unavailable, contact the battery manufacturer directly.
Eltek does not provide battery manufacturer specifications.
Battery temperature compensation adjusts battery charging voltage after a
predefined temperature threshold has been exceeded. The reference voltage and
temperature slope are specifications provided by the battery manufacturer.
Maximum and minimum compensation voltage should also be defined to protect
load equipment.
The fields available are:
•
Temperature compensation – check the box to enable Temperature
Compensated Charging parameters. Clicking again on the box (uncheck)
disables the parameters.
•
Minimum compensation voltage – minimum charging voltage per battery cell
(protects connected load equipment).
•
Maximum compensation voltage – maximum charging voltage per battery
cell (protects connected load equipment).
•
Reference voltage – charging voltage per battery cell recommended by the
battery manufacturer at the reference temperature specified in the
“Reference Temperature” field.
NOTE: This field is the same parameter as Reference voltage (Cell) on the
System Voltages page (System Conf. > Power System > Power System >
System Voltages).
•
Reference temperature – the reference temperature in degrees Celsius that
the battery manufacturer specifies for the charging voltage entered in the
“Reference Voltage” field.
•
Temperature slope – compensation factor in millivolts per degree Celsius per
battery cell recommended by the battery manufacturer
NOTE: It is necessary to connect battery temperature probes to the input(s) of the
controller(s) to be used for this feature. Please see the User Guide provided with
the power system controllers for details on what kind of temperature probes to use
and where to install them on the controller(s).
The following figure shows the Battery Temperature Compensation page in the
Web Interface:
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Setup
273
Fig
gure 2.11 – Setting
S
Batte
ery Tempera
ature Compe nsation thro
ough the Web
b Interface
To set battery
b
tem
mperature compensation throug
gh the web
b interface
e:
1.
Click
C
on the
e System Conf.
C
icon in
n the top m
menu bar.
2.
In
n the left menu
m
bar, click
c
on Batttery (below
wer System
m heading).
w the Pow
3.
Click
C
on Tem
mpComp.
4.
Enter settin
ngs as requ
uired for the batteriess. See the ssection “Te
empComp””
beginning
b
on page 113
3 for detailled descrip
ptions of th
he fields.
5.
Click
C
on the
e Save icon (diskette image) to ssave chang
ges.
NOTICE:
N
In larger pow
wer system
ms (like the Eltek Scala
able), it is n
necessary to
know
k
which
h ID number is assigne
ed to the S
Smartpack2
2 Basic Industrial
controller within
w
the control
c
systtem; this h
helps identify the con
ntroller in th
he
Web
W Interfa
ace. Check
k the bay la
abel on the inside of tthe bay doo
or (at the ttop)
fo
or the conttroller ID nu
umber. The
e line is ma
arked as "S
SP2 BasicIn
nd _____".
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
274
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 2.12 – Sc
calable Bay Controller
C
Ad
ddress Labell (Distribution Bay label s
shown here)
6.
Click
C
on Ala
arm Conf. in
n the top menu.
m
7.
Click
C
on Batttery in the
e left menu
u. Wait for the window to popullate.
8.
Under
U
Batte
ery Alarm Configurat
C
tion, locate
e the Batte
eryVoltage
e line (usua
ally
line #1) and click on th
he gear icon to open tthe Edit wiindow.
Figure
e 2.13 – Batte
ery Voltage Alarm Monittor
9.
A
Mon
nitor line an
nd check the Enable box. This e
enables
Locate the Alarm
battery
b
volttage monittoring, whic
ch is requirred for batttery tempe
erature
compensation.
10. Click
C
on the
e Save icon to save th
he change.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
275
11. Back
B
on the
e Battery page
p
(under Alarm Co
onf.), click o
on the Batttery Bank
section hea
ading. Wait for the win
ndow to po
opulate.
NOTE:
N
Therre is only one Battery
y Bank hea
ading for Sm
martpack S and
Compack
C
co
ontrollers; for Smartp
pack2, therre may be m
more than one. The
number nex
xt to Batte
ery Bank co
orrespondss to either tthe Smartp
pack2 Basiic or
Smartpack2
S
2 Basic Indu
ustrial controller ID w
where the b
battery pro
obes are
in
nstalled.
NOTE:
N
If the Smartpack2 Basic or
o Basic Ind
dustrial controller ID d
does not
appear in th
his list, it may
m be nece
essary to a
adjust the N
Number off banks vallue
n the Batte
ery Configu
uration win
ndow. See
e “Configura
ation” beginning on page
in
107 for deta
ails.
Figure 2.14 – Battery
B
Tem
mperature Pro
obe Inputs (C
Controller)
12. Locate the BatteryTe
empX.X mo
onitors.
NOTICE:
N
Ba
attery Tem
mp Probe inp
puts are nu
umbered according to the ID of the
controller and the inpu
ut position. For exam
mple, in the
e Eltek Scallable plantt,
BatteryTem
B
mp1.1 means that tha
at input is in the firstt Smartpac
ck2 Basic
In
ndustrial co
ontroller an
nd is input #1 on thatt controllerr.
13. Click
C
on the
e Edit icon (gears)
(
of the
t first prrobe input tto be enab
bled.
14. Locate the Alarm
A
Mon
nitor line an
nd check the Enable box to ena
able the inp
put.
15. Click
C
on the
e Save icon to save th
he change.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
276
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
16. Repeat
R
step
ps 13 to 15
5 for any re
emaining prrobe inputss to be ena
abled.
The tem
mperature probes
p
are now set and battery
y temperatture compe
ensation is
enabled
d.
Temperatu
ure Pro
obe Settup
Temperrature prob
be setup fo
or ambient temperatu
ure reading
gs is supported by botth
Eltek co
ontrollers and
a Flexi Monitors. Th
he followin
ng sectionss describe tthe setup
procedu
ure in the Web
W Interfa
ace for both types of devices. FFor the phy
ysical
installattion of the temperatu
ure probe(s
s), please refer to the
e documentation for tthe
controlller or Flexi Monitor.
Controllers
Eltek co
ontrollers are
a equippe
ed with pro
ogrammablle input terrminals tha
at support
tempera
ature probes. Smartp
pack S and
d Compack controllers have the
e input
terminals located on the unitts themsellves. Smarrtpack2 co
ontrollers re
equire either
the Basic or Basic Industrial devices.
d
T Tempe
erature X.Y
Y and Prog
gInput X.Y a
alarm mon
nitors on th
he controlle
er’s
NOTE: The
Inputs heading
h
are
e the same
e physical terminals.
t
If the Tem
mperature a
alarm moniitor
is enabled, then th
he correspo
onding Pro
ogInput mo
onitor is dissabled; and
d vice-versa
a.
Figure 2.15 – Temp Prob
be Terminals (Smartpack
k2 Basic)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
277
The follo
owing figure illustrates how the
e same terminals are disabled ffor use as
battery temperatu
ure probes:
Figu
ure 2.16 – Ba
attery Temp Probe Termi nals (Smartp
pack2 Basic))
NOTE: The
T BatterryTemp X.Y
Y alarm mo
onitor unde
er the Batttery Bank h
heading for the
controlller (on the Battery pa
age) uses the
t same te
erminals ass Tempera
ature X.Y a
and
ProgInp
put X.Y monitors on the Inputs page.
p
If the BatteryT
Temp alarm
m monitor iis
enabled
d, then the corresponding Temp
perature an
nd ProgInp
put monitorrs are disab
bled.
Fig
gure 2.17 – In
nput 1 Used for BattTem
mp and Disab led for Temp
perature and
d ProgInput
NOTE: For
F the Sm
martpack S controller, only inputt terminals 1-4 can be
e used for
tempera
ature moniitoring. If so
s utilized, the corressponding ProgInput is
s disabled.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
278
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 2.18
8 – Temperatture and Programmable IInput Monito
ors for Smarttpack S
NOTE: For
F the Com
mpack con
ntroller, all three inputt terminalss can be us
sed for
tempera
ature moniitoring. If so
s utilized, the corressponding ProgInput a
alarms are
disabled
d.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
279
Figure 2.19 – Temperrature and Prrogrammable
e Input Monittors for Com
mpack
If tempe
erature pro
obes are ins
stalled for ambient re
eadings an
nd connected to a
controlller’s tempe
erature/pro
ogrammable input(s),, use the fo
ollowing ins
structions to
enable the
t probe input(s):
1.
Click
C
on Ala
arm Conf. in
n the top menu.
m
2.
Click
C
on Inputs in the left
l
menu.
3.
After
A
the window populates, clic
ck on the h eading for the contro
oller that the
te
emperature probe is connected
d to (e.g., S
SP2 BasicIn
nd X Input C
Configurattion
or Smartpac
ck S Input Configurat
C
tion).
NOTE:
N
If the system uses
u
Smarttpack2 Bassic or Smarrtpack2 Ba
asic Industrrial
controllers and they do
d not appe
ear on the Inputs pag
ge, it may b
be necessa
ary
to
o adjust th
he Number of banks value
v
on th
he Battery page unde
er System
Configurati
C
ion. See “C
Configuratio
on” beginn
ning on pag
ge 107 for d
details.
4.
Locate the Temperatu
ure X.Y mo
onitors.
NOTE:
N
The monitor nu
umbers (1.1, 1.2, 1.3) correlate to the term
minal numb
bers
of the contrroller inputts (1, 2, and
d 3). The fiirst numbe
er (X) indica
ates the
controller ID
D number, and
a the second (Y) in
ndicates the input num
mber.
5.
Click
C
on the
e Edit icon (next
(
to the list numb
ber) to laun
nch the edit window.
6.
The
T first line
e item is fo
or enabling
g the probe
e input. Che
eck the Enable box to
o
enable the temperatu
t
ure probe.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
280
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
7.
Make
M
any otther adjusttments des
sired for th
he tempera
ature probe
e paramete
ers,
in
ncluding ala
arm thresh
holds at the
e bottom.
8.
Click
C
on the
e Save icon in the low
wer right hand corner tto save changes.
9.
Repeat
R
step
ps 4 throug
gh 8 for any remaining tempera
ature probe
es to be sett.
10. Click
C
on the
e Save icon in the low
wer right hand corner tto save changes.
The tem
mperature probes
p
are now enabled.
Flexi Monito
ors
If tempe
erature pro
obes are ins
stalled usin
ng a Flexi M
Monitor, usse the follo
owing
instructtions to ena
able the prrobe input((s):
1.
Click
C
on Ala
arm Conf. in
n the top menu.
m
2.
Click
C
on the
e menu pag
ge on the le
eft where tthe Flexi Monitor appears.
NOTE:
N
Whe
ere the Flex
xi Monitor appears
a
de
epends on iits Monitorr Type
assignmentt under the
e System Configurati
C
ion section
n. To check
k, navigate
e to:
System
S
Conf. > Powe
er System
m > Controll System > Flexi Mon
nitor
See
S Table 2.3
2 - Flexi Monitor
M
Typ
pes and Corrrespondin
ng Alarm He
eadings for
th
he Alarm Configurat
C
ion menu page
p
that tthe Flexi Monitor appears given a
Monitor
M
Typ
pe assignm
ment. By de
efault, the Flexi Monitor is set tto Std
Fleximon
F
an
nd appears
s under the
e Inputs pa
age of the A
Alarm Configuration
section.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
281
Figure
e 2.20 – Loca
ation of Flexii Monitor Ala
arms (set as Std Fleximon)
3.
On
O the apprropriate page, click on
n the FlexM
Mon headin
ng to expand the Flex
xi
Monitor
M
list of alarm monitors.
m
By
B default, the Flexi M
Monitor is s
set to Monitor
Type
T
Std Fleximon an
nd appears on the Inp
puts page a
as Contr FllexMon X.
4.
There
T
are 16 channels
s on the Fle
exi Monitorr. Identify tthe channe
el with the
te
emperature probe co
onnected, and
a click th
he Edit icon
n beside th
he
corresponding ProgInp
put.
NOTE:
N
By default,
d
eac
ch terminal is labeled
d as ProgInput X.YY, X represen
nts
th
he ID numb
ber assigne
ed to the Fllexi Monito
or, and YY rrepresents
s the
programma
p
ble input number.
n
5.
When
W
the Edit window
w opens, cliick on the C
Config tab
b.
6.
On
O the Conffig page, click on the Input Con
nfiguration drop-down
n list and
select Temp
perature.
7.
Click
C
on the
e Save icon in the low
wer right corner of the
e Edit window to save
e
th
he change. Note that the inputt descriptio
on changess to Tempe
erature X.Y
YY.
8.
Click
C
on the
e General ta
ab.
9.
Locate the Alarm
A
Mon
nitor line ne
ear the top
p of the page and che
eck the Ena
able
box.
b
This en
nables the alarm mon
nitor.
10. Note
N
the ap
ppearance of four ala
arm eventss at the botttom of the Edit wind
dow.
Set
S the tem
mperature thresholds
t
and desire
ed Alarm G
Groups for e
each Eventt.
11. Click
C
on the
e Save icon in the low
wer right corner to sav
ve the chan
nges.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
282
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
12. Click
C
anywh
here outsid
de of the Ed
dit window
w to close itt.
The tem
mperature probe
p
conn
nected to the
t Flexi Mo
onitor is no
ow set.
Setting Ala
arms
Alarm settings are
e configure
ed in the Allarm Config
guration section of b
both the we
eb
interfac
ce and disp
play menus. Alarm mo
onitors for v
various inp
puts are assigned to
alarm groups. Alarrm groups, in turn, are
e mapped tto output c
channels, including
output relays.
r
The
ese assignm
ments are user-config
gurable. Th
he following diagram
illustrattes how ala
arm monito
ors are assiigned to alarm groups, and how
w alarm gro
oups
are map
pped to outtput chann
nels.
Alarrm Monitors
Temperatture Probes
Programm
mable Alarm Inp
puts
Current Sense (shunt lea
ads)
C
Monito
ors
Internal Controller
Virtual Inp
puts
A
Alarm
Group
ps
Assign
n to...
Ala
arm Group 01
Ala
arm Group 02
…
arm Group XX
Ala
Output Channe
els
Map to
o...
Outpu
ut Relays
Buzze
er
LVD Contactors
C
Modem (Phone)
al Inputs
Virtua
Figure 2.21 – Alarrm Assignme
ents Overview
w
The nex
xt two secttions expla
ain different parts of tthe preced
ding diagram. Input
Alarms explains what
w
the inp
puts are on
n the Inputts page of tthe contro
oller and ho
ow
gn them to alarm grou
ups. Outpu
ut Alarm Re
elays expla
ains the Ou
utputs pag
ge of
to assig
the controller, how
w to map alarm group
ps to relayss, and how
w to rename
e alarm gro
oups.
NOTE: Each
E
contro
oller has different ala
arm input/o
output inte
erfaces:
•
The
T Compack controlller has thre
ee inputs a
and three o
output relays; they arre
lo
ocated on the
t top of the
t contro
oller.
•
The
T Smartp
pack2 controller does
s not have a
any input/output terrminals built in;
in
nstead, an Eltek I/O Monitor
M
is re
equired. I/O
O Monitorss feature siix alarm inp
puts
and six outp
put relays.
•
The
T Smartp
pack S conttroller has six inputs a
and six outtput relays
s; they are
lo
ocated on the
t left sid
de of the co
ontroller (w
when viewe
ed from the
e front).
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
283
Figure 2.2
22 – Alarms Terminals
T
forr Eltek Contrrollers
Inputt Alarms
There are three ca
ategories of
o input alarms:
•
Temperatu
T
re: Temperrature inpu
uts are justt one of sev
veral possiible
designation
ns for the in
nput alarm terminals (three for the Compa
ack controller;
six for the Smartpack
S
S; six for an
a I/O Moniitor2 conne
ected to th
he
Smartpack2
S
2). Enabling
g the inputt for Tempe
erature ind
dicates thatt a
te
emperature probe is connected
d to the inp
put termina
al selected.
•
Virtual
V
inpu
ut: Virtual inputs are for
f use as m
manual trig
ggers to to
oggle an
assigned Alarm Group
p on comma
and. There is no physsical termin
nal associated
with
w these; they are "v
virtual".
•
Programma
P
able input (ProgInput
(
t): Program
mmable inpu
uts are the
e designatio
ons
fo
or the input alarm terrminals, witth the exce
eption of ttemperaturre probes. T
The
programma
p
ble input designation
d
n can be ussed for rela
ay input (no
ormally ope
en or
normally clo
osed), diode matrix, clock
c
input,, or voltage
e.
NOTE: The
T input te
erminals us
sed for Tem
mperature
e are the sa
ame physic
cal termina
als
used for the Progrrammable inputs (Pro
ogInput). Iff the Temp
perature input is enab
bled,
then the
e corresponding prog
grammable
e input farth
her down o
on the list tturns gray and
cannot be configu
ured. Similarly, if the Programma
P
able input is enabled, then the
corresponding Tem
mperature
e input turn
ns gray and
d cannot be
e configure
ed.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
284
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 2.23 – Temp
perature and ProgInput Monitors
M
on a Smartpack2
2 Basic Indus
strial Contro
oller
NOTE: For
F the Sm
martpack2 Basic
B
and Smartpack
S
k2 Basic Ind
dustrial con
ntrollers, th
he
Temperrature X.Y and ProgIn
nput X.Y allarm monittors on the controller’s Inputs
heading
g are the sa
ame physic
cal termina
als. If the T
Temperature alarm m
monitor is
enabled
d, then the corresponding ProgInput monittor is disab
bled; and vice-versa.
Figure 2.24 – Temp Prob
be Terminals (Smartpack
k2 Basic)
The follo
owing figure illustrates how the
e same terminals are disabled ffor use as
battery temperatu
ure probes:
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
285
Figu
ure 2.25 – Ba
attery Temp Probe Termi nals (Smartp
pack2 Basic))
NOTE: For
F the Sm
martpack2 Basic
B
and Smartpack
S
k2 Basic Ind
dustrial con
ntrollers, th
he
Battery
yTemp X.Y alarm mon
nitor under the Batte
ery Bank he
eading for tthe controller
(on the Battery pa
age) uses the
t same terminals ass Tempera
ature X.Y a
and ProgInp
put
X.Y mon
nitors on th
he Inputs page.
p
If the
e BatteryT
Temp alarm
m monitor is
s enabled,
then the
e corresponding Tem
mperature and
a ProgIn put monito
ors are disa
abled.
Fig
gure 2.26 – In
nput 1 Used for BattTem
mp and Disab led for Temp
perature and
d ProgInput
NOTE: For
F the Sm
martpack S controller, only inputt terminals 1-4 can be
e used for
tempera
ature moniitoring. If so
s utilized, the corressponding ProgInput is
s disabled.
NOTE: For
F the Com
mpack con
ntroller, all three inputt terminalss can be us
sed for
tempera
ature moniitoring. If so
s utilized, the corressponding ProgInput a
alarms are
disabled
d.
To setup an input alarm thro
ough the web interfac
ce:
1.
Click
C
on the
e Alarm Con
nf. icon in the
t top me
enu bar.
2.
In
n the left menu
m
bar, click
c
on Inputs and wa
ait for the llist to popu
ulate.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
286
3.
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Find the input to set and
a click on
n the edit ic
con (gears)). Wait for tthe edit
window
w
to populate.
p
Figure 2.27
7 – Alarm Inp
puts Page (Co
ompack Controller)
4.
Check
C
the Enable
E
box.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
287
Fig
gure 2.28 – Alarm
A
Input E dit Window
5.
Set
S the Eve
ent type. Fo
or a virtual input, leav
ve Event ass Event.
6.
Select
S
the alarm
a
group to trigger when the
e alarm eve
ent occurs.
NOTE:
N
For Programma
P
able Inputs only, click on the Callibration ta
ab. Select tthe
ty
ype of inpu
ut.
7.
Click
C
the Sa
ave icon (diskette sym
mbol in the lower righ
ht corner) to save
changes.
8.
Assign
A
the alarm
a
grou
up to a relay
y, if not do
one so alrea
ady. See th
he subsequ
uent
section for “Output Alarm Relays
s”.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
288
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Output Alarrm Relays
Output alarm relay
ys are form
m-C contacts that are
e triggered if mapped
d to one or
arm groups
s.
more ala
To set output
o
relays through
h the web interface:
1.
Click
C
on the
e Alarm Con
nf. icon in the
t top me
enu bar.
2.
In
n the left menu
m
bar, click
c
on Outtputs and w
wait for the list to po
opulate. This
can take ab
bout a minu
ute to complete.
NOTE:
N
At th
he top of th
he window is a drop-d
down box c
called Selec
ct Unit. Us
se
th
his to selec
ct the conttrol unit to which the alarms are
e connecte
ed. This is
particularly
p
importantt for the Sm
martpack2 Master controller, sin
nce the unit
ittself only has
h an audible buzzer to assign to the alarrm groups. For the
Smartpack2
S
2 controller, I/O Monittors are required for external allarm input and
output; the appropriatte I/O Moniitor must b
be selected
d in the dro
op-down menu
in
n order to modify
m
alarrm relay as
ssignmentss.
3. For each ala
arm group that
t
should
d trigger an
n output re
elay, place a check in
n the
box
b under the
t relay(s)) desired. Relays
R
can be assigne
ed to multip
ple alarm
groups,
g
and
d alarm groups can triigger multiiple relays..
Fig
gure 2.29 – Alarm
A
Outputs Page (Map
pping Examp
ple Shown)
4.
Change
C
alarrm group names
n
as desired to re
eflect the alarm to be indicated
d by
th
hat group. Click in the
e Alarm Grroup field tto edit the name.
5.
Click
C
the Sa
ave icon (diskette sym
mbol in the lower righ
ht corner) to save
changes.
ut alarm is now set up.
The inpu
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
289
Alarm
m Setpo
oints
Since alll alarm parrameters are
a set esse
entially in tthe same m
manner, the following
g
instructtions demo
onstrate ho
ow to set Battery
B
Volltage alarm
m paramete
ers as an
example
e. As the fo
ollowing diagram illus
strates, thi s section e
explains ho
ow to set u
up
alarm in
nputs (Interrnal Alarm Parameterrs in this ex
xample), ho
ow to assig
gn the
parameters to alarm groups,, and how to
t assign a
alarm group
ps to outpu
ut relays.
Figure
e 2.30 – Alarm
m Groups to Output Rela
ays
Please note
n
that the
t screens
shots are taken
t
from
m the Comp
pack contro
oller; the
process
s is identica
al for Smartpack2 and
d Smartpac
ck S contro
ollers.
Setting Alarrm Batttery Vo
oltage A
Alarm (Examp
ple)
To illusttrate how to
t set an alarm monittor, the folllowing proc
cedure des
scribes how
w to
set up the
t Battery
y Voltage alarm
a
throu
ugh the We
eb Interface
e as an exa
ample.
To set alarm
a
Batte
ery Voltage
e alarm parrameters tthrough the
e web interface:
1.
Click
C
on the
e Alarm Con
nf. icon in the
t top me
enu bar.
2.
In
n the left menu
m
bar, click
c
on the
e Battery a
and wait for the list to
o populate..
3.
Under
U
the Battery
B
Ala
arm Config
guration ba
ar, find BattteryVoltag
ge (it should
be
b line #1) and
a click on
n the Edit icon
i
(gear ssymbol).
4.
The
T edit win
ndow open
ns. Locate the
t Alarm M
Monitor lin
ne and chec
ck the Enable
box.
b
NOTE:
N
The edit
e window
w may vary
y from reviision to rev
vision. Som
me edit
windows
w
ha
ave a General tab and
d a Calibrattion tab; iff so, click on the Gene
eral
ta
ab.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
290
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 2.3
31 – Battery
y Voltage Ala
arm Configurration
5.
At
A the very bottom off the edit window
w
is w
where alarm
m threshold
ds are set. For
Battery
B
Voltage there
e are four events:
e
Majjor High, M
Minor High, Minor Low
w,
and Major Low.
L
Config
gure param
meters as d esired. Clic
ck the Save
e icon
(d
diskette sy
ymbol in the lower rig
ght corner) to save ch
hanges.
6.
Note
N
the Allarm Group
p assignme
ents next to
o each Eve
ent line. Click on the
drop-down arrow
a
to se
ee the alarrm groups a
available.
The
T output relay assig
gnment of the alarm g
me
group and the alarm group nam
can be chan
nged on the
e Outputs page. In th
his example
e, Alarm Group 06 wiill be
changed for the Majorr Low parameter of th
he Battery
y Voltage alarm.
7.
In
n the current edit win
ndow, click the Save icon and th
hen close the edit
window.
w
8.
Select
S
Outp
puts in the left menu bar. Wait ffor the window to pop
pulate, which
can take ab
bout a minu
ute to complete.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
291
Figure 2.32 – Smartpack
k2 Alarm Outtputs Page ((Multiple Con
ntrol/Monito
or Units)
NOTE:
N
At th
he top of th
he window is a drop-d
down box c
called Selec
ct Unit. Us
se
th
his menu to select th
he control unit
u to whic
ch the alarrms are con
nnected. T
This
is
s particularrly important for the Smartpack
S
k2 Master c
controller, since the u
unit
ittself only has
h an audible buzzer to assign to the alarrm groups. For the
Smartpack2
S
2 controller, I/O Monittors are required for external allarm input and
output; the appropriatte I/O Moniitor must b
be selected
d in the dro
op-down menu
in
n order to modify
m
alarrm relay as
ssignmentss.
9.
Locate the line of the alarm grou
up assigned
d to the ala
arm event (Alarm Gro
oup
06
0 in this ex
xample).
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
292
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 2.33
3 – Alarm Outtput Page (C
Compack Con
ntroller)
10. Click
C
in the field underr Alarm Gro
oup and ty
ype in a disttinctive name for this
s
alarm group
p. In this ex
xample, the
e name is c
changed to
o BatteryLo
owMajor (liine 6
n the prece
eding figure
e).
in
11. Next,
N
selectt the outpu
ut relay tha
at the alarm
m should ttrigger. In this examplle,
Alarm
A
output1 is selected becau
use it is the
e default ffor all major alarms. N
Note,
to
oo, that there are onlly three ou
utput alarm
m relays forr the Comp
pack contro
oller.
12. Click
C
the Sa
ave icon (diskette sym
mbol in the lower righ
ht corner) to save
changes.
13. Return
R
to th
he Battery
y Voltage edit
e window
w by clickin
ng on Batte
ery in the le
eft
menu
m
bar.
14. Locate BattteryVoltag
ge (line #1) and click o
on the Editt icon (gearr symbol).
15. After
A
the window populates, clic
ck on the A
Alarm Group box in th
he Major Lo
ow
event line.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
293
Figurre 2.34 – Batttery Voltage
e Edit Window
w
16. Find and sellect BatterryLowMajo
or.
17. Click
C
the Sa
ave icon (diskette sym
mbol in the lower righ
ht corner) to save
changes.
The Batttery Voltag
ge alarm monitor
m
is now
n
set.
Setting Nag
g Alarms
Eltek I/O
O Monitors support th
he use of a “nag” or re
ecurring bu
uzzer alarm
m which, ev
ven
if reset or silenced
d, activates
s the buzze
er again affter a configured time
e elapses ffor
as long as the trig
ggering alarrm group is
s active.
To enab
ble the nag
g alarm featture for an
n alarm group:
1.
Navigate
N
to
o the Alarm
m Outputs page
p
(Alarrm Conf. > Power Sy
ystem >
Outputs).
O
2.
Select
S
the unit
u that will
w use the nag alarm feature.
NOTE:
N
If the I/O Monittor has the
e latest sofftware insttalled, then
n the first
column to appear
a
afte
er the Alarm
m Group co
olumn is ca
alled Buzze
er Output. If it
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
294
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
does not ap
ppear, then
n the I/O Mo
onitor unit requires a software upgrade
before
b
proc
ceeding to the
t next sttep.
Fig
gure 2.35 – I//O Monitor Outputs Page
e (with latestt software)
3.
Id
dentify the
e alarm grou
up(s) in the
e first colum
mn to map
p to the nag
g feature a
and
click the correspondin
ng box(es) under
u
the B
Buzzer Outtput colum
mn.
4.
Click
C
the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r
corne
er to save c
changes.
5.
Click
C
on the
e Buzzer Ou
utput colum
mn heading
g to open tthe Outputt Config
window.
w
Figure 2.3
36 – Buzzer Output
O
Conffiguration Window
6.
Locate the Description field. To its right iss a drop-down list for configuring
th
he behavio
or of the bu
uzzer. Sele
ect Normallly activate
ed resettable.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
295
7.
For the Nag
g timer (minutes) field
d, enter th
he number o
of minutes
s that shou
uld
elapse after the buzze
er is silence
ed before iit should ac
ctivate aga
ain. The
buzzer
b
will continue
c
activating after
a
the el apsed time
e for as lon
ng as the alarm
groups
g
thatt are mapped to it are
e active.
8.
Click
C
on the
e Save icon in the low
wer right corner to sav
ve changes
s.
The nag
g alarm is now
n
set.
Setting Sitte Inforrmatio
on
NOTE: Site
S informa
ation can be
b set through the we
eb interfac
ce only, nott through tthe
display. However, site inform
mation is re
eadable thrrough the d
display at tthe followin
ng
path:
Main
M
Menu > Logs/Re
eports > In
nventory R
Report
In the web
w interfac
ce, site info
ormation is
s set on the
e System IInfo page, where dettails
about th
he site and
d the powe
er system in
nstallation are entere
ed. Entering a field va
alue
is option
nal, but it is
s highly rec
commende
ed for futurre identific
cation, main
ntenance a
and
traceab
bility.
To set site
s informa
ation throu
ugh the we
eb interface
e:
1.
Click
C
on the
e System Conf.
C
icon in
n the top m
menu bar.
2.
In
n the left menu
m
bar, click
c
on Pow
wer System
m.
3.
Click
C
on Sys
stem Info.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
296
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 2.37 – Sy
ystem Inform
mation Page
4.
Fill in the fie
elds as des
sired. All fie
elds are opttional.
5.
Click
C
on the
e save icon (diskette) to save ch
hanges.
The follo
owing field
ds are availlable (referr to preced
ding figure):
•
Company
C
– Name of the
t compan
ny that ow
wns the pow
wer system
m
•
Site
S
– Name
e and/or ID
D of the site
e
•
Model
M
– Pow
wer system
m model (re
efer to doc
cumentatio
on provided
d with the
system)
•
Serial
S
Numb
ber – Syste
em serial number or o
other identtification nu
umber
•
In
nstall Date
e – Installattion date (y
year, montth, day)
•
Service
S
Datte – Date of latest service (yearr, month, da
ay)
•
Responsible
R
e – Person or compan
ny that serviced the p
power systtem
•
Message
M
lin
nes (1 and 2) – Free-fform fields for any me
essages re
elated to
services performed on
n the powe
er system ((results, un
nresolved is
ssues, etc..)
•
Latitude – Latitude
L
off the site (d
degrees, ho
ours, minuttes, hemisp
phere [nortth or
south])
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
297
•
Longitude – Longitude
e of the sitte (degreess, hours, minutes, dire
ection [eas
st or
west])
w
•
Elevation
E
– Site elevation (in me
eters)
Setting Ge
enerato
or Actiivation
n
Generattor activatiion is trigge
ered by configuring sseveral parrameters available
through
h the Web Interface.
NOTE: The
T activattion switch
h of the gen
nerator mu
ust be conn
nected to o
one of the
output relays
r
of th
he power system’s
s
co
ontroller orr monitors (like an I/O
O Monitor),
which serves to ac
ctivate the
e generatorr when sign
naled by th
he controlle
er.
NOTE: There
T
is no digital inpu
ut required
d from the generator back to th
he power
system. The Eltek
k controllerr system determines if the gene
erator has been
success
sfully switc
ched on by detecting the prese nce (or lack) of ac inp
put.
To set generator
g
activation
a
parameter
p
s:
1.
Navigate
N
to
o the Generral Generator Config
guration pa
age.
System
S
Conf. > Gene
erator > Ge
eneral > G
Generator c
control
Figure
F
2.38 – Generator Configuratio
C
n Settings (E
Example)
2.
Locate Generator con
ntrol and ch
heck the Enable box..
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
298
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
3.
At
A the botto
om of the page
p
are tw
wo Event lines for Ge
enerator. O
One or both
h can
be
b assigned
d to alarm groups
g
to the
t right. FFor this exa
ample, only
y one Alarm
m
group
g
is ass
signed.
NOTE:
N
In th
his example
e, an alarm group callled Gensett has alread
dy been
created on the Outputts page (Alarm Conff. > Outputts). If an ala
arm group has
not already been reserved for sw
witching on
n the generator, then
n select one
e of
th
he unused alarm grou
ups for this
s purpose.
4.
Click
C
the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r
corne
er to save c
changes.
5.
Navigate
N
to
o the alarm Outputs page.
p
Alarm
A
Conff. > Output
Figure
e 2.39 – Alarm
m Outputs Pa
age (Examplle)
6.
Locate Sele
ect Unit and use the drop-down
d
n list to sele
ect the con
ntroller or C
CAN
Node
N
with the
t output relay that is connectted to the g
generator’s activatio
on
switch.
7.
Id
dentify the
e Alarm Gro
oup that was selected for the G
Generator e
event in sttep
3.
3
NOTE:
N
If the
e alarm gro
oup has nott been rena
amed, it is recommen
nded to entter a
name in the
e Alarm Gro
oup field (w
which is a ffree-form ttext field) tthat reflectts its
use for send
ding ON/OF
FF signals to
t the gen erator. In tthis example, the alarrm
group
g
has be
b named Genset.
G
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
299
8.
Id
dentify the
e output rellay (Alarm output X) to which the generattor is
connected; click the box
b at the intersectio
on of this ou
utput relay
y column and
th
he alarm group row for the generator.
9.
Click
C
the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r
corne
er to save c
changes.
10. Navigate
N
to
o the Generrator alarm
ms page.
Alarm
A
Conff. > Genera
ator > Gen
nerator Ala
arm Config
guration
Figure
e 2.40 – Gene
erator Alarm Configuratio
on
11. Click
C
the Ed
dit icon nex
xt to the Ge
eneratorFa
ail monitorr.
12. Check
C
the Enable
E
box for the Ala
arm Monito
or line. This enables the monito
or,
which
w
reporrts an alarm
m if the gen
nerator acttivation sig
gnal has be
een issued,, but
th
here is no ac
a input.
Figu
ure 2.41 – Generator Fail Edit Window
w
13. Click
C
the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r
corne
er to save c
changes.
14. Return
R
to th
he Generattor configu
uration pag
ges to set a
activation p
parameters.
(S
System Co
onf. > Generator). Th
he generattor can be a
activated b
by battery
current or capacity;
c
vo
oltage; and
d time para
ameters (Ca
apacity, Daily, Month
hly,
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
300
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
and Voltage
e Setup). See
S the top
pic “Genera
ator” beginn
ning on pag
ge 93 for
details on each
e
param
meter page..
NOTE:
N
The Generator
G
event is au
utomaticallly triggere
ed if system
m voltage
drops to one volt abov
ve the Batttery Disco nnect Volttage (Batte
ery Disconn
nect
Voltage
V
+ 1V). This pa
arameter is
s configure
ed at Alarm
m Conf. > B
Battery >
Battery
B
Ala
arm Config
guration > LVBD (clic
ck the Editt icon).
Fig
gure 2.42 – Battery
B
Disco
onnect Volta
age (LVBD Ed
dit Window)
15. Click
C
the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r
corne
er of each c
configuration page to
o
save changes.
Generattor activatiion is now set.
Setting SN
NMP Co
ommun
nicatio
on
NOTE: This
T
feature
e is only av
vailable thrrough the w
web interfa
ace, not through the
display. Simple Ne
etwork Man
nagement Protocol
P
(S
SNMP) setttings through the web
b
ce are availlable from software revision
r
2.2
2 and later.. Screenshots in this
interfac
section are from the Smartp
pack2 contrroller.
NOTE: Configurat
C
tion options
s are availa
able for SN
NMP v3, SNMP v1, and
d SNMP v2c
c.
Configure the appropriate se
ettings for the SNMP version off the netwo
ork.
ction descrribes the se
etup requirred to esta
ablish the E
Eltek controller as an
This sec
object on
o an existing networrk commun
nicating via
a SNMP. An
ny other de
etails regarding
the netw
work, Netw
work Manag
gement Sy
ystem (NMS
S), or SNMP
P configura
ation for th
he
installattion site must be obtained from
m local systtems admin
nistration ((IT) and
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
301
associatted docum
mentation. The
T SNMP version, ne
etwork setttings, secu
urity protoc
cols,
commun
nity strings
s, etc. shou
uld be prov
vided by the local IT g
group.
NOTE: For
F detailed overview
ws of each SNMP pag e in the We
eb Interfac
ce, please rrefer
to the in
nformation
n in the Sys
stem Config
guration se
ection (“SN
NMP Setting
gs”, beginn
ning
on page
e 144).
SNMP
P Web-B
Based Configu
C
uration
To acce
ess the SNM
MP Setting
gs pages:
1.
Click
C
on the
e System Conf.
C
icon in
n the top m
menu bar.
2.
In
n the left menu
m
bar, click
c
on Dev
vice Settin
ngs to expa
and the me
enu.
3.
Under
U
Devic
ce Settings
s, click on SNMP
S
Setttings. The General SN
NMP
Configurati
C
ion page ap
ppears.
System
S
Conf. > Devic
ce Setting
gs > SNMP
P settings
By default, the controller is set
s to SNM
MP-based c
configuration, which m
means that an
SNMP managemen
m
nt applicattion will be used to co
onfigure the controlle
er's SNMP
settings
s rather tha
an the controller's we
eb interfac
ce.
Figure 2..43 – SNMP-b
based config
guration (deffault)
Where permissible
p
e, a Web-ba
ased config
guration op
ption is ava
ailable to c
configure the
controlller's SNMP settings th
hrough the
e web interrface. Whe
en the radio
o button is
selected
d, the follo
owing menu
us appear on
o the left menu bar::
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
302
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
•
USM
U
Users
•
Vacm
V
Acces
ss
•
V1/V2
V
Com
mmunity
•
Traps
T
Figure 2.44 – Web-based Config
guration Pag
ges
NOTE: For
F detailed overview
ws of each SNMP pag e in the We
eb Interfac
ce, please rrefer
to the in
nformation
n in the Sys
stem Config
guration se
ection.
SNMP
P Imple
ementattion
To conffigure the controller
c
for
f the Netw
work Mana
agement Sy
ystem (NM
MS):
1.
Compile
C
the
e Eltek MIB files in the
e NMS data
abase.
2.
Add
A the Elte
ek controller object to
t the mana
agement m
map.
3.
Ping
P
the con
ntroller to verify conn
nectivity.
4.
Define
D
and configure
c
trap
t
handling and SNM
MP users (especially for SNMP v
v3).
NOTE: The
T Manag
gement Info
ormation Base
B
(MIB) ffiles for Elttek controlllers are
available only from
m Eltek. Ple
ease contact Eltek Te
echnical Su
upport at 1
1-800-4354872 orr techsupport.us@elttek.com forr the latestt MIB files.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
303
Table 2.1 – Alarm Traps (Eltek MIB branch 10)
Trap
Description
alarmPowerSystemTrap
This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in
the power system.
alarmBatteryTrap
This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in
the Battery subsystem.
alarmLoadGroupTrap
This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in
the Load subsystem.
alarmMainsTrap
This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in
the Mains subsystem.
alarmRectifierTrap
This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in
the Rectifier subsystem.
alarmControlSystemTrap
This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in
the Control-system subsystem.
alarmDcDcTrap
This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in
theDCDC converter subsystem.
alramInputsTrap
This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in
the Inputs subsystem.
alarmOutputsTrap
This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in
the Outputs subsystem.
alarmGeneratorTrap
This trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in
the Generator subsystem.
alarmSolarChargerTrap
This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in
the SolarCharger subsystem.
alarmWindChargerTrap
This Trap is sent when an alarm condition occurs in
the WindCharger subsystem.
infoHeartBeatTrap
When enabled, this trap transmits a periodic
“heartbeat” signal to indicate that the system is
connected and operational.
For details on using various SNMP applications with Eltek controllers, please see
document #2155710, How to SNMP with Eltek Controllers.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
304
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Load
d Monittor and
d Flexi Monittor Settup
Eltek Lo
oad Monitor and Flexi Monitor un
nits provide
e suppleme
entary mon
nitoring. A
After
connectting one orr more of th
hese devices to the C
CAN bus, ad
dditional se
etup is
required
d in the con
ntroller und
der the Sys
stem Conffiguration a
and Alarm Configuration
sections
s.
Load Monito
or
Load Mo
onitors are used for monitoring
m
load shuntts and load
d fuses. Wh
hen connec
cted
to the CAN
C
bus of an Eltek controller, a page calle
ed Currentt Monitor a
appears under
the System Config
guration menu:
m
System
S
Conf. > Powe
er System
m > Controll System > Current M
Monitor
In additiion, the ala
arm monito
ors for the Load
L
Monittor appear under the Alarm
Configu
uration sec
ction; the precise
p
pag
ge dependss on the Mo
onitor Type
e selected on
the Current Monittor page.
Alarm
A
Conff. > Powerr System > [Load / R
Rectifier / DCDC / So
olar / Wind
d/
Fuel
F
Cell]
Table
e 2.2 – Load Monitor
M
Type
es and Corre
esponding Ala
arm Heading
gs
Monitor
M
Type
e
Alarm Confiiguration Pag
ge
Section Heading
g
Std
S Loadmon
Load
Load
dPrimary X
Load CurMon
Load
Load
d CurMon X
Rect
R
CurMon
Rectifiers
Rect CurMon X
DCDC
D
CurMon
n
DcDc Conve
erter
DcD
Dc CurMon X
Solar
S
CurMon
Solar Charge
er
Sola
ar CurMon X
Wind
W
CurMon
Wind Charge
er
Wind
d CurMon X
FuelC CurMon
n
FuelCell Cha
arger
FuelC CurMon X
To conffigure the Load
L
Monito
or in the Web
W Interfac
ce:
1.
Navigate
N
to
o the follow
wing page to
t set the M
Monitor Type:
System
S
Conf. > Powe
er System
m > Controll System > Current M
Monitor
2.
Id
dentify the
e Load Monitor (called
d CurrMonittor X unde
er the first c
column) to
o
configure.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
305
3.
Under
U
Monitor type, select
s
the current
c
typ
pe the unit is intended to monitor.
4.
Click
C
the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r
corne
er to save c
changes.
Figure 2.45 – Currrent Monitorr Page (for Co
onfiguring Lo
oad Monitors
s)
5.
Navigate
N
to
o the follow
wing page to
t set the a
alarm monitors:
Alarm
A
Conff. > Powerr System > [Load / R
Rectifier / DCDC / So
olar / Wind
d/
Fuel
F
Cell]
NOTE:
N
The alarm page
e where th
he Load Mo
onitor appe
ears depend
ds on the
selection made
m
on the
e Current Monitor
M
pag
ge. See Ta
able 2.2 - Load Monito
or
Types
T
and Correspond
C
ding Alarm Headings for the corrresponding
g page and
d
heading nam
mes. Regardless of the section
n name, the
e Load Mon
nitor alarm
monitors
m
are always the same.
6.
Id
dentify the
e alarm section headin
ng for the LLoad Monittor and clic
ck on it to
expand it.
The follo
owing secttions descrribe how to
o configure
e the Load Monitor’s s
shunt and ffuse
inputs.
Shuntt Configuration
To conffigure a Loa
ad Monitor shunt inpu
ut:
1.
Click
C
on the
e Currents sub-headin
ng to expand it.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
306
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 2.46 – Load Monito
or Heading an
nd Sub-head ings (Monito
or Type: Std L
Loadmon)
2.
Id
dentify the
e shunt inpu
ut(s) to con
nfigure and
d click on tthe Edit ico
on.
NOTE:
N
The first row is
s for LoadC
Current, an
n alarm mon
nitor that s
sums all off the
current inpu
uts and gen
nerates an
n alarm if th
he sum exc
ceeds the s
specified
th
hreshold.
Figu
ure 2.47 – Lo
oad Monitor Current
C
Alarm
m Monitor (G
General Tab)
3.
Click
C
the ch
heck box ne
ext to Enab
ble to enab
ble the alarrm monitorr.
4.
Set
S the amp
perage thre
eshold (und
der Amp).
5.
Assign
A
alarm
m groups (iif differentt from the d
default).
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
307
6.
Click
C
the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r
corne
er to save c
changes.
7.
Click
C
the Sc
cale tab.
Figure 2.4
48 – Load Mo
onitor Curren
nt Shunt Scalle Tab
8.
Check
C
that the scale and
a rating are correctt; otherwisse, change them by u
using
th
he drop-do
own lists fo
or Scale/Sh
hunt type a
and Max ra
ating.
NOTE:
N
The shunt size
e and rating
g must be k
known and
d correctly entered on
n
th
his page in order to get
g accuratte readingss.
9.
Click
C
the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r
corne
er to save c
changes.
10. Repeat
R
for any
a remain
ning shunt inputs thatt need to b
be configurred.
The shu
unt input is now configured.
Fuse Configu
C
ration
To conffigure a Loa
ad Monitor fuse (or cirrcuit break
ker) monito
or input:
1.
Click
C
on the
e Fuses sub
b-heading to
t expand iit.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
308
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 2.4
49 – Load Monitor Fuses Sub-Heading
S
g (Monitor Ty
ype: Std Load
dmon)
2.
Id
dentify the
e fuse inputt(s) to conffigure and click on the Edit icon
n.
Figure 2.50 – Load Mon
nitor Fuse Mo
onitor Generral Tab
3.
Click
C
the ch
heck box ne
ext to Enab
ble to enab
ble the alarrm monitorr.
4.
Iff desired, change the Event and
d Alarm Gro
oup assign
nments (the
e default
assignmentt is a Majorr Alarm eve
ent assigne
ed to the F
Fuse alarm Alarm Group).
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
309
5.
Click
C
the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r
corne
er to save c
changes.
6.
Click
C
the Sc
cale tab.
7.
Enter the ra
ating of the
e fuse (or circuit
c
breaker).
8.
Click
C
the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r
corne
er to save c
changes.
Figure 2.5
51 – Load Mo
onitor Fuse M
Monitor Scale
e Tab
9.
Click
C
the Co
onfig tab.
10. Select
S
the type
t
of input that the
e fuse (or c
circuit breaker) provid
des to the L
Load
Monitor
M
(No
ormally Ope
en, Normallly Closed, o
or Diode Ma
atrix).
11. Click
C
the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r
corne
er to save c
changes.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
310
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Figure 2.52 – Load Monitor Fuse Configuration Tab
Flexi Monitor
Flexi Monitors can be employed for the following monitoring purposes: current,
voltage, temperature, relay input, and fan speed. When connected to the CAN bus
of an Eltek controller, a page called Flexi Monitor appears under the System
Configuration menu:
System Conf. > Power System > Control System > Flexi Monitor
In addition, the alarm monitors for the Flexi Monitor appear under the Alarm
Configuration section; the precise page depends on the Monitor Type selected on
the Flexi Monitor page.
Alarm Conf. > Power System > Battery / Load / Rectifier / DCDC / Solar /
Wind / Fuel Cell / Inputs
The following table shows the Alarm Configuration pages and section headings that
correspond to each Monitor Type.
Table 2.3 – Flexi Monitor Types and Corresponding Alarm Headings
Monitor Type
Alarm Configuration Page
Section Heading
Std Fleximon
Inputs
Contr FlexMon X
Batt Fleximon
Battery
Batt FlexMon X
Load Fleximon
Load
Load FlexMon X
RectifierFleximon
Rectifiers
Rect FlexMon X
DCDC Fleximon
DcDc Converter
DcDc FlexMon X
Solar Fleximon
Solar Charger
Solar FlexMon X
Wind Fleximon
Wind Charger
Wind FlexMon X
FuelC Fleximon
FuelCell Charger
FuelC FlexMon X
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Setup
311
To conffigure the Flexi
F
Monito
or in the Web Interfac
ce:
1.
Navigate
N
to
o the follow
wing page to
t set the M
Monitor Type:
System
S
Conf. > Powe
er System
m > Controll System > Flexi Mon
nitor
2.
Id
dentify the
e Flexi Moniitor (under the first co
olumn) to c
configure.
3.
Under
U
Monitor type, select
s
the current
c
typ
pe the unit is intended to monitor.
4.
Click
C
the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r
corne
er to save c
changes.
Figure 2.53 – Flexi Monitor
M
Conffiguration Pa
age
5.
Navigate
N
to
o the follow
wing page to
t set the a
alarm monitors:
Alarm
A
Conff. > Powerr System > [Load / B
Battery / R
Rectifier / DCDC / So
olar
/ Wind / Fu
uel Cell / In
nputs]
NOTE:
N
The alarm page
e where th
he Flexi Monitor appea
ars depend
ds on the
selection made
m
on the
e Flexi Mon
nitor page. See Table
e 2.3 - Flexi Monitor
Types
T
and Correspond
C
ding Alarm Headings for the corrresponding
g page and
d
heading nam
mes. Regardless of the Monitorry Type nam
me, the Fle
exi Monitorr
alarm monittors are alw
ways the same.
6.
Id
dentify the
e alarm section headin
ng for the FFlexi Monittor and clic
ck on it to
expand it.
7.
Iff the Inputs
s sub-head
ding does not
n expand
d, click on the Inputs s
sub-headin
ng to
expand it.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
312
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 2.54
2
– Config
guration Secttion and Opttions for Flex
xi Monitor Inp
puts
(A
Alarm Configuration > Inp
puts Page)
8.
Id
dentify the
e fuse inputt(s) to conffigure and click on the Edit icon
n.
NOTE:
N
The first row is
s for Curren
nt X, an ala
arm monito
or that sum
ms all of the
current mon
nitors and generates
g
an alarm iff the sum e
exceeds th
he specified
th
hreshold.
NOTE:
N
The input type
e and Enablle box can be selecte
ed on this p
page, but
th
hese instru
uctions use
e the Edit window
w
to d
do so.
9.
Click
C
the ch
heck box ne
ext to Enab
ble to enab
ble the alarrm monitorr.
10. Click
C
the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r
corne
er to save c
changes.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
313
Figure 2.55
5 – Flexi Mon
nitor Edit Win
ndow (Generral Tab)
11. Click
C
on the
e Config tab.
12. Next
N
to Inpu
ut Configu
uration, clic
ck on the d
drop-down list and select the ty
ype
of input tha
at is connec
cted to the
e alarm mo
onitor channel.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
314
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 2.56 – Configuration Tab
b for Flexi Mo
onitor Inputss (Edit Windo
ow)
See the
e following table for th
he tabs tha
at appear w
with each sselection. Some inpu
ut
types re
equire additional conffiguration.
Table 2.4
2 - Definitio
ons of Inputs
s and Additio
onal Tabs (wh
here applicab
ble)
Inp
put Type
De
efinition
Additional Tabs
s
No
ormally Open
n
No
ormally-open
n relay
None
No
ormally Close
ed
No
ormally-close
ed relay
None
Vo
oltage
Vo
oltage input
Callibration
Te
emperature
Te
emperature input
None
Cu
urrent
Cu
urrent input
Callibration, Sca
ale
Fa
an Speed
Fa
an speed (tac
chometer) inp
put
Fan
n Config
Fu
use-NO
Fu
use input, normally-open
Sca
ale
Fu
use-NC
Fu
use input, normally-closed
d
Sca
ale
Fu
use-DM
Fu
use input, dio
ode matrix
Sca
ale
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
315
13. Iff applicable
e, click on the
t tab tha
at appears for the inp
put type for further
configuratio
on.
CAUTION:
C
Calibration
C
should only be used when the accuracy o
of the inpu
ut
value is proved to be significantl
s
ly off the m
measured v
value. It sh
hould not b
be
used as parrt of an insttallation prrocedure. M
Manufactu
urer values
s and prope
er
calibration equipment
e
t (e.g., an ac
ccurate mu
ultimeter) must be av
vailable in
order to calibrate the input value
es accurattely. Improper calibra
ation can
cascade ina
accuracy to
o all contro
oller calcula
ations and functions that use th
he
nput value..
in
14. Return
R
to th
he Generall tab.
15. In
n the box between
b
Ev
vent and Alarm
A
Group
p, set the a
alarm thres
shold.
16. Use
U the dro
op-down list under Event to sele
ect the alarm event ttype.
17. Use
U the dro
op-down list under Ala
arm Group to select tthe alarm g
group to
trrigger for alarm
a
outpu
ut.
18. Click
C
the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r
corne
er to save c
changes.
19. Repeat
R
step
ps 8 to 18 for
f any rem
maining inp
puts to con
nfigure.
The Flex
xi Monitor inputs
i
are now config
gured.
Logic
cal Gro
oups (B
Boolea
an Alge
ebra)
Logical groups are
e provided in
i the Outp
puts of the
e Alarm Con
nfiguration
n section to
o
supportt Boolean algebra
a
ope
erations. In
n short, the
e controller can be co
onfigured tto
trigger an
a Alarm Group
G
if two
o other Ala
arm Groupss are in the states spe
ecified.
NOTE: The
T Alarm Group assigned to th
he Result G
Group cannot be used
d for any otther
alarm monitor.
m
Currently, the equ
uation functions as fo
ollows:
Alarm
A
Group [1] (ON/OFF) + Ala
arm Group [2] (ON/OF
FF) = Result Group (O
ON)
NOTE: The
T alarm group num
mbers in the
e equation above are in bracketts because
e
they can be any off the Alarm
m Groups av
vailable in the contro
oller. The A
Alarm Group
numberrs in the equation do not
n specifically indica
ate Alarm G
Groups 1 and 2 of the
e
controlller.
The pag
ge for Logic
cal Group is a tab on the Outpu
uts page off the Alarm
m
Configu
uration sec
ction:
Alarm
A
Conff. > Powerr System > Outputs > Logical Groups (ta
ab)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
316
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 2.57 – Logical Gro
oups Tab
To set a Logical Grroup:
1.
Determine
D
the
t conditions require
ed for two Alarm Groups in orde
er to trigge
er a
unique Alarm
m Group fo
or the Resu
ult Group.
IF
F Alarm Gro
oup [1] is active/inacttive AND A
Alarm Group
p [2] is acttive/inactiv
ve,
THEN
T
Resullt Group is activated.
2.
Navigate
N
to
o the Logica
al Groups tab
t of the Outputs page.
3.
Select
S
an Alarm Group
p from the drop-down
n list for Alarm Group
p 1.
4.
Select
S
the state
s
(Active or Not Active)
A
tha
at the first Alarm Group should be
in
n as part off the condition to trig
gger the Re
esult Group
p using the
e drop-dow
wn
lis
st for Activ
ve/Not Active (to the
e right of tthe Alarm G
Group 1 co
olumn).
5.
Select
S
an Alarm Group
p from the drop-down
n list for Alarm Group
p 2.
6.
Select
S
the state
s
(Active or Not Active)
A
tha
at the seco
ond Alarm G
Group shou
uld
be
b in as part of the co
ondition to trigger
t
the
e Result Grroup using the drop-d
down
lis
st for Activ
ve/Not Active (to the
e right of tthe Alarm G
Group 2 co
olumn).
7.
Select
S
the Alarm
A
Grou
up to be trig
ggered by the condittions of the
e equation
using the drrop-down list for Resu
ult Group.
NOTE:
N
Do not
n assign an
a Alarm Group
G
to the Result Group if it is
s used for a
any
other alarm
m monitor.
8.
Click
C
the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r
corne
er to save c
changes.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
317
Up to 10
0 Logical Groups
G
can be set.
EXAMPL
LE: Set up a unique alarm
a
for a situation w
where therre is an ac m
mains alarm
m
and a re
ectifier alarrm, providin
ng a prelim
minary indic
cation that the powerr system m
may
have to switch to back-up po
ower.
1.
Go
G to the Outputs pag
ge (Alarm Conf. > Ou
utputs > O
Outputs ta
ab). Wait fo
or
th
he Alarm Groups
G
tablle to populate.
2.
Find an unused Alarm Group (Ala
arm Group XX). Check
k each dev
vice under
Select
S
Unit to make sure the Ala
arm Group selected iss not mapp
ped to any
output chan
nnel. The Alarm
A
Group
p selected for the Re
esult Group
p of the Log
gical
Group
G
equation must be dedicatted.
3.
Rename
R
the
e Alarm Gro
oup to som
mething desscriptive, liike “Backup
p Warning””.
4.
Select
S
an ou
utput chan
nnel for the
e Alarm Gro
oup. In a real-world ap
pplication,
select the output
o
alarrm relay to which an e
external alarm monitor is
connected.
Figure 2.58 – Alarm
m Group Map
pped (Examp
ple)
5.
Click
C
on the
e Save icon in the low
wer right corner to sav
ve changes
s.
6.
Click
C
on the
e Logical Grroups tab (at
( top, nex
xt to the O
Outputs tab
b).
7.
In
n the first available
a
ro
ow, select Mains
M
alar m for Alarm
m Group 1.
8.
In
n the Activ
ve/Not Acttive list to the
t right off Alarm Group 1, sele
ect Active..
9.
Select
S
Recttifier alarm
m for Alarm
m Group 2.
10. In
n the Activ
ve/Not Acttive list to the
t right off Alarm Group 2, sele
ect Active..
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
318
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
11. Set
S Result Group
G
to th
he reserved alarm gro
oup (Backu
up Warning
g in this
example).
Figure 2.59 – Log
gic Group Se tup Example
e
12. Click
C
on the
e Save buttton in the lo
ower right corner to ssave chang
ges.
Emaiil (SMT
TP) Settup
Eltek co
ontrollers support
s
em
mail delivery
y of data and alarm m
messages tto other
address
ses on a loc
cal network with an SMTP
S
serve
er.
The follo
owing item
ms are requ
uired in orde
er to setup
p email messsaging fro
om the
controlller:
•
An
A SMTP se
erver on the
e local netw
work
•
The
T SMTP server’s
s
IP address
a
•
Iff authentication is req
quired on the SMTP server, then
n the User Name and
d
Password
P
are
a needed
NOTE:
N
If au
uthenticatio
on is requirred, Alarm messagess from the c
controller
cannot be delivered
d
siince they do
d not curr ently use tthe User Name and
Password
P
fields.
•
Email addre
esses for re
ecipients (u
up to two)
NOTE:
N
The controller,, recipients
s, and SMTP
P server m
must be on tthe same
domain. Forr example, if the serve
er is SMTP .companyd
domain.com
m, then all
email addre
esses (inclu
uding the one selecte
ed for the c
controller) must all ha
ave
th
he domain @compan
nydomain.com.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
319
To set up
u email me
essaging:
1.
Navigate
N
to
o the eMail page (Sys
stem Conf.. > Device Settings > Network
k
Settings
S
> eMail). Wa
ait for the Alarm
A
Grou
ups table to
o populate.
Figure 2.60
2
– Email (SNMP) Con figuration Pa
age
2.
Iff authentication for th
he SMTP se
erver is req
quired, enter the userr name (SM
MTP
User
U
Name field) and the
t passwo
ord (SMTP Password field).
3.
For the SMT
TP Server ip-Address field, ente
er the SMTP
P server’s IIP address..
TIP:
T Ping the network to find the
e email serv
ver’s IP add
dress. If un
ncertain,
contact the
e local systtems admin
nistrator (IT
T departme
ent) for help.
4.
For the Sender e-mail Address, enter
e
an em
mail addresss for the c
controller. It
can be fictittious. This address will appear a
as the send
der’s addre
ess. The
controller cannot rece
eive email messages.
m
5.
Enter email addresses
s for up to two
t
recipie
ents in the Receiver M
Mail X secttions
(R
Receiver E--mail Addrress X fields).
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
320
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 2.61 – Receiver
R
Maiil Sections
6.
Select
S
whic
ch message
es these re
ecipients arre to be se
ent: Alarms
s, interval
messages
m
(data logs),, and/or cu
ustom func
ction (Receive Funct. 1).
7.
Iff configurin
ng alarm messages, find the Ala
arm E-Mail Settings s
section.
Fig
gure 2.62 – Alarm
A
Setting
gs Section
8.
Enter the su
ubject line for alarm email
e
messsages in the Alarm mail Subjectt
fiield.
9.
Iff a message should be sent if an
n alarm turrns off, sele
ect the Sen
nd Off Alarrm
box.
b
10. Iff configurin
ng interval data mess
sages, find the Interv
val E-Mail S
Settings
section.
Fig
gure 2.63 – In
nterval Settin
ngs Section
11. Iff configurin
ng interval data mess
sages, find the Interv
val E-Mail S
Settings
section.
12. Enter the su
ubject line for interva
al email me
essages in tthe Interva
al Subject
fiield.
13. Enter the fille name for the data file sent ass an attach
hment in th
he Intervall
Attachmen
A
t field.
14. Enter the time betwee
en each intterval in the Interval period (min) field; the
units are miinutes.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Setup
321
15. Enter the time the inte
ervals shou
uld start in
n the Interv
val start time field
(H
HH:MM form
mat)
16. Click
C
the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r
corne
er to save c
changes.
Email no
otifications
s using SMT
TP are now
w set.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
322
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
3. Operat
O
tion
This sec
ction descrribes comm
mon operattional proce
edures tha
at can be ac
ccomplishe
ed
through
h the Contrroller Web Interface.
Using
g the Comma
C
ands Button
B
s
The Com
mmands se
ection prov
vides functtion button
ns to quicklly execute basic testts
and rese
ets. Click on
o the Com
mmands ico
on to naviga
ate to this page.
NOTE: Admin-leve
A
el permissio
ons are req
quired to ex
xecute the
e following commands
s:
•
Delete
D
Even
nt Log
•
Output
O
Testts (relays and
a LVD co
ontactors)
NOTE: When
W
a com
mmand button is clicked, a warning message appears to confirm
the action. Simply
y click OK to
t execute the comm
mand.
Syste
em
Commands on the
e System page are priimarily for silencing a
active alarm
ms, testing
g
alarm in
ndicators, resetting in
nventory, and
a resettin
ng defaultss.
For each
h command
d, click the
e Apply buttton to exe
ecute the a
action. The
e table belo
ow
lists pottential actions and th
he correspo
onding com
mmand to e
execute.
Table 3.1 – System Com
mmands
Action
Click th
he Apply buttton for…
Silence the alarm bu
uzzer
Reset M
Manual Alarm
m(s)/Silence B
Buzzer
Reset an alarm
Reset M
Manual Alarm
m(s)/Silence B
Buzzer
Refresh inventory co
ount for conttrollers and/o
or
CAN Nodes
Reset N
Number of Modules
Refresh inventory co
ount for rectiifiers or othe
er
power modules
m
Reset N
Number of Modules
Test con
ntroller LEDs
Contro ller led-test
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Operation
n
323
Action
Click th
he Apply buttton for…
Test rec
ctifier LEDs
Rectifie
er led-test
Test the
e alarm buzze
er
Buzzer test
NOTE: The
T Delete
e Event Log
g command
d requires admin-leve
el permissions to
execute
e.
The follo
owing figure shows the
t System
m Command
ds page.
Fig
gure 3.1 – Sy
ystem Comm
mands Page
Batte
ery
Commands on the
e Battery page
p
are for starting a
and stopping battery
y tests and
charging
g modes. For
F each co
ommand, click
c
the Ap
pply button
n to execute the actiion.
Commands on the
e Battery page
p
are se
elf-explanatory (eithe
er Start or S
Stop the
action), so please refer to the relevant sections u
under the ““Battery” to
opic (Sectio
on 4
- System
m Configuration) for additional
a
details
d
abo
out Battery
y Test, Batttery Boostt,
and Batttery Equallize.
The follo
owing figure shows the
t Battery
y page.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
324
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Fig
gure 3.2 – Ba
attery Comm
mands Page
Output Testt
The Outtput Test page
p
provid
des a conv
venient way
y to test sp
pecific output channe
els
of Eltek
k controllers and CAN Nodes. Ou
utput chan
nnels includ
de alarm re
elays, LVD
contacttors, buzze
ers, and virttual inputs.
NOTE: Admin-leve
A
el permissio
ons are req
quired to e xecute outtput tests..
CAUTION:: Testing th
he Load co
ontactor an
nd Battery
y contactorr channels
opens the
e correspon
nding LVD contactor!
c
If these ch
hannels are
e to be tes
sted,
ensure that
t
openin
ng the con
ntactors do
oes not disrrupt system
m operatio
on.
CAUTION:: Testing output
o
channels gene
erates false alarm conditions fo
or
any monittors connec
cted to tho
ose channe
els.
To test an output channel:
1.
Note
N
the Ou
utput Testt duration time
t
at the
e bottom of the page
e. This is th
he
le
ength of tim
me (in seco
onds) that the test w
will last. Change if nec
cessary.
2.
Select
S
the controller
c
or
o CAN Nod
de from the
e Output T
Test drop-d
down list.
3.
Id
dentify the
e channel to
o test and click the A
Apply butto
on.
4.
Confirm
C
tha
at the output channel has been activated..
NOTE: Virtual
V
Inpu
uts can be tested botth on this p
page and o
on the Virtu
ual Inputs
page. Only
O
the priimary controller in a power
p
systtem has virrtual inputs
s (Smartpa
ack2
Master, Smartpack S, and Co
ompack).
The follo
owing figure shows the
t Outputt Test page
e for a Flatpack S sys
stem (which
h
uses the
e Smartpac
ck S contro
oller).
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Operation
n
325
Figure
e 3.3 – Outpu
ut Test Page (Smartpack S)
Virtual Inputs
The Virttual Inputs
s page prov
vides a quic
ck means o
of triggerin
ng the Virtu
ual Inputs,
which are used to manually activate
a
an
n Alarm Gro
oup which, in turn, ac
ctivates
whichev
ver output channel(s)) the alarm
m group is a
assigned to
o.
To set up
u a Virtual Input:
1. Go
G to the Virtual Inputt alarm monitor unde r the Alarm
ms Conf. pa
age:
Alarm
A
Conff. > Powerr System > Inputs > [Controlle
er] Input C
Configuratiion
Figure 3.4
3 – Virtual Inputs
I
(Smarrtpack2 Masster)
2.
Click
C
on the
e Edit icon (gears)
(
nex
xt to the Virtual Inputt to configu
ure.
3.
Check
C
the Enable
E
box to enable the Virtual Input.
4.
Assign
A
the Virtual
V
Inpu
ut to an Ala
arm Group by selecte
ed one of the options
s in
th
he Alarm Group
G
drop-down list.
5.
Click
C
on the
e Save icon to save ch
hanges. Th
he Virtual Input is now
w enabled and
assigned to
o an Alarm Group.
G
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
326
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Fig
gure 3.5 – Virrtual Input Ed
dit Window
6.
Click
C
on the
e Outputs page.
p
7.
Locate the Alarm
A
Grou
up that the
e Virtual Inp
put is assig
gned to.
NOTE:
N
If the power sy
ystem conttains more than one c
controller o
or monitor
with
w outputt channels, check eac
ch device u
using the Select Unit drop-down
n list
to
o see if the
e Alarm Gro
oup for the
e Virtual Inp
put is alrea
ady mapped (assigned
d) to
another cha
annel. Alarrm Groups can be mapped to multiple outp
put channe
els.
8.
Map
M the Ala
arm Group to
t an Outp
put Channe
el (for exam
mple, an ala
arm relay o
or a
buzzer).
b
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Operation
327
Figure 3.6 – Map Alarm Groups to Output Channels
The Virtual Input is now set up.
The following graphic illustrates the assignments and mappings required to set up a
Virtual Input:
Alarm Conf. >
Power System >
Inputs >
[Controller] Input
Configuration
Virtual Input X
Virtual Input X
(Edit Window)
Assign to...
Alarm Group XX Map to...
Alarm Conf. >
Power System >
Outputs >
[Select Unit]
Output Channel
Figure 3.7 – Setup Path for Virtual Inputs
NOTE: Virtual Inputs also appear as output channels on the Outputs page.
Mapping an Alarm Group to a Virtual Input on the Outputs page differs from the
procedure described above in that the Alarm Group triggers the Virtual Input. While
it is possible to create assignment loops (where a Virtual Input triggers an Alarm
Group that is assigned to the same Virtual Input), the signals do not create an
indefinite loop; the signal sent is either ON or OFF and does not change the state of
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
328
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
the Virtual Input iff it is alread
dy in the sttate of the signal (i.e.., a Virtual Input that is
egards ano
other ON signal; and a Virtual Inp
put that is OFF disreg
gards anoth
her
ON disre
OFF sign
nal).
Virrtual Input
Assigned to an Alarm Group
G
on th
he Inputs page
e
Ala
arm Group
Mapped to
o a Virtual Inp
put on
the Outputs
O
page
e
Figure 3.8 – Virtual Inpu
ut and Alarm Group Assig
gnments
ed to an Ala
arm Group can
CAUTION:: Triggering a Virtual Input thatt is assigne
generate false alarm
m condition
ns for any m
monitors co
onnected tto the
assigned output channel(s).
c
To activ
vate a virtu
ual input:
1.
Click
C
the Ac
ctivate buttton to activate the V
Virtual Inpu
ut. The buttton turns red
and change
es to Deacttivate.
2.
Confirm
C
tha
at the assig
gned outpu
ut channel((s) for the A
Alarm Grou
up is/are
active.
3.
Click
C
the De
eactivate button
b
to deactivate
d
the Virtual Input.
NOTE: Unlike
U
the Output Te
est page, which
w
autom
matically deactivates
s after the
specifie
ed duration elapses, activating
a
a Virtual Inp
put on the Virtual Inp
puts page
keeps itt active unttil it is man
nually deac
ctivated.
The follo
owing figure shows the
t Virtual Inputs pag
ge.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Operation
n
329
Figure 3.9 – Virtual Inpu
uts (with an Activated Ch
hannel)
EXAMPL
LE: As an example,
e
co
onsider how
w a Virtuall Input can be used to
o turn a lam
mp
on or offf:
NOTE: Admin
A
perm
missions are required..
1.
Id
dentify an available
a
output relay
y on one off the powe
er system’s
s controllerrs or
I/
/O Monitors
s.
Figure 3.10 – I/O Monito
or Type 2
2. Connect
C
a la
amp switch
h to the av
vailable outtput relay.
3. Test
T
functio
onality by going
g
to th
he Comman
nds > Outp
put Test p
page; selec
ct
th
he device from
f
the Output Testt drop-dow
wn list. Click
k the Apply
y button next
to
o an Alarm
m Output lin
ne. The lam
mp activate
es when th
he correct rrelay is
activated.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
330
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 3.11 – Output Te
est Page
4.
Go
G to the Alarm Conff. > Outputts page and select th
he controlle
er or I/O
Monitor
M
dev
vice from th
he Select Unit
U
drop-d
down list.
Figure 3.1
12 – Alarm Ou
utputs Page for an I/O Monitor
5.
Locate the Alarm
A
Outp
put in the column
c
hea
adings and
d click on it (the Alarm
m
output
o
head
ding is a hy
yperlink). The
T Outputt Config window appears.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Operation
n
331
Fig
gure 3.13 – Ou
utput Config
guration Wind
dow for Alarrm Output 1
6.
Change
C
the text in the
e Descriptiion field to
o something
g appropria
ate, like
“L
Lamp”.
7.
Make
M
sure Normally
N
deactivated
d
d is selecte
ed in the drop-down llist to the rright
of the Desc
cription fielld.
8.
Save
S
chang
ges by click
king on the Save icon in the lowe
er right corner.
9.
Id
dentify an available
a
Alarm
A
Group
p in the Ala
arm Group column.
10. Change
C
the Alarm Gro
oup name to somethin
ng approprriate, like “L
Lamp Switc
ch”.
11. Map
M the Ala
arm Group to
t the Alarrm Output by placing a check m
mark in the cell
where
w
the Alarm
A
Group and Alarm Output iintersect.
Figure 3.14 – Ex
xample of Ma
apping an Ala
arm Group to
o an Output
12. Save
S
chang
ges by click
king on the Save icon in the lowe
er right corner.
13. Go
G to the Alarm
A
Conff. > Inputs
s page and click on th
he [Controlller] Input
Configurati
C
ion heading
g.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
332
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Fig
gure 3.15 – Location
L
of Virtual
V
Inputss (Smartpack
k2 Master)
14. Id
dentify an available
a
Virtual
V
Inputt and click on the Ediit icon to o
open the Ed
dit
Window.
W
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Operation
n
333
Figu
ure 3.16 – Viirtual Input E
Edit Window
15. Check
C
the Enable
E
box to enable the Virtual Input.
16. Iff desired, change the Monitor Description field to so
omething appropriate
e,
like “Lamp On/Off”.
O
17. Select
S
Even
nt from the
e Event dro
op-down lisst.
18. Select
S
the Alarm
A
Grou
up (“Lamp Switch”
S
fro m step 10 in this exa
ample) under
th
he Alarm Group
G
drop-down list.
19. Save
S
chang
ges by click
king on the Save icon in the lowe
er right corner.
20. Test
T
functionality on the Comm
mands > Viirtual Inpu
uts page. C
Click the
Activate
A
bu
utton next to the Virttual Input sselected.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
334
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figu
ure 3.17 – Virrtual Inputs Command
C
Pa
age with Inpu
ut Activated
d
Setup of
o a Virtual Input as a lamp switc
ch is compllete.
Alarm
m Rela
ay Testt
The alarrm relays can
c be testted the web interface
e by going to the Outtput Test p
page.
See the
e section Ou
utput Testt.
CAUTION: Testing ala
arm relays causes ala
arm condittions. Make
e sure
monitoring
g equipmen
nt and pers
sonnel are aware of ssuch testin
ng and will n
not
be adverse
ely affecte
ed. It is not recommen
nded to tesst alarm re
elays from a
an
off-site location!
ays for low
w-voltage disconnect
CAUTION: Some conttroller unitts have rela
(LVD) conttactors. Activating th
hese contac
ctors will o
open them and
disconnect any batte
eries or loa
ads connec
cted!
Manu
ual Batttery Discha
D
rge Te
est
To manu
ually execu
ute a batte
ery discharge test:
1. Double-chec
D
ck Battery Test settings (Syste
em Conf. > Battery > Test). Ma
ake
sure test pa
arameters are reason
nable for th
he batterie
es and dete
ermine if th
he
te
est will be Simplified or Normal.
NOTE:
N
Unde
er Normal Test,
T
batte
ery discharg
ge results are evalua
ated only iff the
te
est is stopped by rea
aching End voltage. Re
esults are discarded if a test is
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Operation
335
terminated due to reaching Max duration or any other reasons (such as
manually stopping the test).
2. If any changes are made, make sure to save them by clicking on the Save
icon in the lower right corner.
3. Go to the Commands > Battery page.
Figure 3.18 – Battery Commands Page
4. Locate the Start Battery Test line and click the Apply button to start the
manual battery test.
NOTE: The battery test must run its course to the end in order to save
results. Otherwise, they will be discarded.
NOTE: If a premature abort is required, click the Apply button for Stop Battery
Test.
Downloading Logs
Logs collected by the controller include:
•
Event log – Alarm and event history.
•
Data log – A log of data values, including battery voltage, battery current,
load current, total rectifier current, mains voltage, power, battery
temperature, and battery remaining capacity. Data is collected at intervals
specified in the Data Log Setup page of the web interface.
System Conf. > Power System > Data Log
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
336
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
•
Energy
E
log – A log of energy
e
use
ed for load,, rectifier, ssolar charg
ger, genera
ator,
and battery
y: displayed
d in watt-ho
ours (totall, hourly, da
aily, and we
eekly).
•
Generator
G
log
l – A log of generattor run time
e and fuel consumption (total,
daily, weeklly, monthly
y).
•
Battery
B
cyc
cles – The number
n
of battery cy
ycles (totall, daily, wee
ekly, montthly).
•
Battery
B
tes
sts – A list of battery discharge tests.
•
Change
C
log
g – Parametter change
e log.
•
Accounts
A
– A list of lo
ogins and lo
ogouts, inc
cluding IP addresses o
of failed log
gins.
Logs can be downloaded through the Web
W Interfa
ace.
NOTICE: Logs are stored in “CSV”
“
files,, which are
e delimited by tabs an
nd semicolo
ons.
To view
w the data properly
p
formatted in
n a spreadssheet progrram, files m
must be
importe
ed as delimited files, with
w “tabs” and “semicolons” specified as tthe delimitters.
Prior to creating and downloading logs, you may w
want to co
onfigure the
e energy lo
og,
in order to choose
e intervals for
f the info
ormation ga
athered. O
Or, you may
y want to verify
the setttings that will
w be applied to logs
s created a
and downlo
oaded. To c
configure o
or
verify datalog setttings, see “Data
“
Log” on page 1 37.
After th
he datalog has been configured
c
, create an
nd downloa
ad a log.
To creatte a log:
1.
In
n the Web Interface, choose
c
Log
gs > Save logs to fil e.
Figure 3.19 – Save Logs Page in
n Web Interfa
ace
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Operation
n
2.
337
On
O the Save
e logs to file page, ch
heck Selec t/Unselectt all (in the
e upper righ
ht
corner of th
he page). This single action
a
addss a check b
beside all the logs on the
le
eft side of the
t page. If you do no
ot need all the logs, leave checked only th
hose
lo
ogs desired
d; selecting
g fewer log
gs will redu ce the processing tim
me described
in
n the next step.
s
Figure 3.20 – Cho
oosing Logs to Download
d
3.
After
A
selectting all logs
s, click the Generate log(s) buttton near th
he lower le
eft
corner of th
he page.
Fiigure 3.21 – Generate
G
Lo
ogs Button
Wait
W for the
e process to conclude
e; the proce
ess can take several minutes. A
After
th
he process
s is finished
d, an updatted status message a
appears, in
ndicating th
hat
th
he log gene
eration is Complete!
C
Figure 3.22 – Sta
atus: Comple
ete! Message
e
At
A this point, the log is
s available for downlo
oad.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
338
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
4.
To
T retrieve the log, click the Dow
wnload log
g button in the lower rright corne
er of
th
he page.
Figure 3.23 – Download Lo
og Button
5.
When
W
prompted to open or save the file, ch
hoose Save
e as.
Figure 3.24
3
– Saving
g Log
6.
In
n the next dialog,
d
cho
oose the loc
cation, filename, and
d format for the
download. From
F
the Sa
ave as typ
pe list, be sure to choo
soft Excel
ose Micros
Comma
C
Sep
parated Va
alues File (**.csv).
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Operation
n
339
Figure 3.25
5 – Choosing Location, Fillename, and Format
After th
he file has been
b
saved
d, it can be
e imported into a spre
eadsheet p
program, su
uch
as Micro
osoft Excel, for viewin
ng and ana
alysis.
Downloading Sta
atistics
s
NOTE: This
T
featurre is curren
ntly availab
ble for Sma
artpack2 co
ontrollers o
only. This
page ma
ay be block
ked if the local netwo
ork does no
ot permit a
access to F
FTP servers
s.
The Sta
atistics sec
ction conta
ains configu
uration file
es, system statistics, and eventt and
data log
gs, which can be downloaded to
o a computter. See Se
ection 8 - S
Statistics
(under Comprehen
C
nsive Overv
view) for de
etailed desscriptions. To downlo
oad files fro
om
this sec
ction:
1.
Click
C
on the
e Statistics
s button in the top me
enu bar to navigate tto the
statistics window.
w
2.
es
The
T defaultt page unde
er Statistic
cs is called
d Browse SD Card, wh
here the file
are currentlly stored. As
A such, th
he top leve
el may conttain user documentattion
and controller software files (*.s19).
3.
To
T download a file, sim
mply right-c
click on the
e hyperlink
k, choose S
Save as… att
th
he prompt,, and navig
gate to the folder on tthe compu
uter where the file is tto
be
b stored.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
340
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 3.2
26 – Statistic
cs Window (S
Smartpack2 Only)
Downloading and
d Uploa
ading C
Config
guratio
on Files
s
Configuration files
s—which sttore param
meter settin
ngs for the
e controllerr(s) and any
y
connectted CAN No
odes—can be saved from
f
and lo
oaded to each device
e. This is
useful when
w
custo
om configu
urations are
e to be load
ded on sev
veral power systems, or
when a custom co
onfiguration
n is either lost
l
or corrrupted. Th
hese operattions are
perform
med through the Load
d/Save Con
nfig page o
of the Commands sec
ction.
Commands
C
s > Comma
ands > Loa
ad/Save Co
onfig
NOTE: Loading
L
an
nd saving controller configuratio
on files req
quires admiinistrator
permiss
sions (admiin login).
Configuration files
s are generrated by th
he controlle
er itself, so
o the follow
wing
procedu
ures start with
w downlloading (Sa
ave Config)) the config
guration filles.
Down
nload Configur
C
ration Files
F
To down
nload configuration files:
1.
Navigate
N
to
o the Save Config File
e page:
Commands
C
s > Comma
ands > Loa
ad/Save Co
onfig > Sa ve Config
g File
2.
The
T page lis
sts all conn
nected con
ntroller and
d CAN Node
e devices. By defaultt, all
check boxes by each device
d
is se
elected. S
Select the d
devices fro
om which
configuratio
on files are
e to be save
ed.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Operation
n
3.
341
With
W the desired units
s selected, click the N
Next button.
Figure 3.27 – Save Config
g File Page
4.
On
O the nextt page, the controller units to be
e read from
m are listed
d in the
Reading
R
datta from co
ontrol units
s box (left). Click the button Sta
art reading
g
fiiles to begin downloa
ading the configuratio
on files.
NOTE:
N
The Back butto
on can be selected
s
at any time to the retu
urn to the
Save
S
Config
g File page
e. Howeverr, if the Sta
art reading
g files buttton has bee
en
selected, th
he downloa
ad continue
es uninterrrupted.
Figure
e 3.28 – Read
d Page for Sa
ave Config Fiile
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
342
5.
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
A notice app
pears indic
cating that the selectted file willl be read. C
Click OK to
o
continue.
Figure 3.29
9 – Notice Me
essage
6.
A progress message appears
a
in the
t Processs Status b
box on the right, and a
progress
p
ba
ar appears at the botttom of the
e page (Gen
nerating file). The Sttart
re
eading file
es changes to Stop re
eading filess, which ca
an be clicke
ed to abortt the
process.
p
Figure 3.30
0 – Save in Prrogress
7.
When
W
the co
onfiguratio
on file for one
o unit is rready for d
download, a dialog box
appears ask
king where
e the file sh
hould be sa
aved. Choo
ose a location on the
computer where
w
the file
f is to be saved.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Operation
n
343
Figure 3.31
1 – Save File Prompt
8.
Iff multiple files were selected,
s
th
he buttonss Read nextt file and C
Cancel app
pear.
Click
C
the Re
ead next fille button to
t read the
e configurattion file forr the next
controller device. The
e Cancel bu
utton can b
be clicked tto cancel tthe downlo
oad
of the rest of
o the files
s.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
344
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Figure 3.3
32 – File Save
e Completed (first device
e only)
Uploa
ad Conffiguration File
es
NOTE: Configurat
C
tion files fo
or the contrrollers and/or CAN No
odes mustt be on the
computter being us
sed to acce
ess the We
eb Interfac e. Make su
ure that th
he file name
es
have no
ot been alte
ered, as an
ny alteratio
on will prev
vent the co
ontroller fro
om recogniizing
the file as valid.
To uploa
ad configuration files
s:
1.
Navigate
N
to
o the Load Config
C
File
e page:
Commands
C
s > Comma
ands > Loa
ad/Save Co
onfig > Lo ad Config File
2.
The
T page th
hat appears lists all controller a nd CAN No
ode devices
s connecte
ed to
th
he power system.
s
Click the Bro
owse… buttton at the top of the page to
lo
ocate the configurati
c
on file to lo
oad.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Operation
n
345
Figure 3.33 – Load Config
g File Page
3.
After
A
selectting the co
onfiguration
n file to upload, the W
Web Interfa
ace determ
mines
which
w
devic
ce the conffiguration file
f is for.
Iff the file is correct, th
hen an Uplo
oad Config
g file button appears in the lowe
er
right cornerr.
Iff the file is not correc
ct, then an error messsage appea
ars below tthe list of
devices. Th
he file name
e must be corrected in order to
o continue. Please
contact Elte
ek for spec
cifications.
4.
Click
C
the Up
pload Conffig file buttton to load the file intto the appllicable
device(s). A progress bar then appears
a
to the left of the button
n.
5.
Once
O
the prrogress barr indicates the upload
d is comple
ete, the pro
ocedure is
fiinished.
Configuration file save
s
and lo
oad is complete.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
346
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
4. Administration
This section describes common administrative tasks that can be accomplished
through the Web Interface.
Administering User Accounts
User accounts are administered from the User Accounts page:
System Conf. > Device Settings > User Accounts
NOTE: Admin login is required to make any changes to User Account settings,
except for the current user’s password.
To change or add user accounts, navigate to the User Accounts page and click the
Edit Accounts button.
Figure 4.1 – Edit Accounts Button
On the Edit page are two sections: Global Account Settings and User Account
Administration.
•
Global Account Settings – this section is for specifying password
requirements. See User Accounts beginning on page 158 for descriptions of
each setting.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Administrration
•
347
User
U
Accou
unt Adminis
stration – this
t
section is for cre
eating, editting, and
deleting use
er accountts. See Use
er Accountts beginnin
ng on page 158 for
descriptions
s of each column.
c
o To creatte a new us
ser account, find the first availa
able user ac
ccount row
w
and click
k the Enablle button (at the end of the row
w).
o To edit an
a existing user account, simply
y click in th
he field(s) tto be modiffied.
o To delette an existing user account, clic k the Delette button a
at the end of
the row.
Fig
gure 4.2 – Ed
dit User Acco
ounts Page
When finished, clic
ck the Save
e icon in th
he lower rig
ght corner tto save changes.
Chan
nge Co
ontrolle
er Nam
me
The nam
me of the controller
c
is
s changed under Netw
work Settiings:
System
S
Conf. > Devic
ce Setting
gs > Netwo
ork Settin
ngs > TCP//IP
NOTE: Changing
C
the
t name of
o the controller on th
his page afffects how it appears
s on
any network it is connected
c
to and the
e Eltek Netw
work Utility
y program..
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
348
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
The field
d to chang
ge the conttroller name
e is called Device Name. To change the
controlller name:
1.
Click
C
in the Device Name field.
2.
Iff undesired
d text existts, delete the
t existing
g text.
3.
Type
T
in the desired na
ame for the
e controllerr.
4.
Click
C
the Sa
ave icon in the
t lower right
r
corne
er to save c
changes.
Figure 4.3 – Device Nam
me Field
Find and Ch
hange the IP
P Addre
ess
Finding the IP addrress of an Eltek
E
contrroller can b
be done in a number o
of ways. Iff the
ected to a computer
c
or
o compute
er network
k, then simply navigatte
controlller is conne
to the TCP/IP
T
page
e to see th
he current IP
I address::
System
S
Conf. > Devic
ce Setting
gs > Netwo
ork Settin
ngs > TCP//IP
Of cours
se, if a netw
work connection is no
ot establisshed with tthe controller, then th
he
Web Interface is not useful for
f this procedure. Th
his section explains h
how the IP
address
s can be found using other
o
meth
hods.
Find the
t IP Address
A
s
By default, all Elte
ek controlle
ers are ship
pped with a static IP a
address off
192.168
8.10.20.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
349
Administrration
It is com
mmon for th
he IP addre
ess to be ch
hanged aftter the con
ntroller is c
connected tto a
computter network
k. It is either configurred with a new static
c IP address
s (manually
y
reconfig
gured) or se
et to DHCP
P in order to
o obtain a d
dynamic IP
P address ffrom the
network
k. If a conn
nection through the Web
W Interfa
ace has nott been esta
ablished, then
there arre two principle ways
s that the controller’s
c
s IP addresss can be fo
ound:
•
Through
T
the
e display (iff available;; the Eltek Compack c
controller d
does not have
a display)
•
Through
T
the
e Eltek Nettwork Utilitty (ENU), w
which must first be ins
stalled on tto a
computer th
hat is conn
nected to the
t controller (either directly or through a
LAN)
Throu
ugh the Display
D
NOTE: Since
S
the Compack
C
controller does not ha
ave a displa
ay, this me
ethod cannot
be used
d to find the
e IP addres
ss of a Com
mpack conttroller. Use
e the Eltek Network
Utility method
m
insttead.
To find the
t IP addrress of a Sm
martpack2
2 or Smartp
pack S controller:
1.
Unlock
U
the screen by pressing th
he UP key, the DOWN
N key, and tthen the
ENTER key.
2.
Use
U the key
ys to navigate to the following sscreen:
System
S
Config > Pow
wer System
m > Generral System
m Config
3.
Use
U the DOW
WN key to find Agentt IP Addresss
NOTE:
N
Each
h octet of the
t IPv4 ad
ddress is on
n a separatte line, so tthe IP addrress
appears as three-digitt groups ov
ver four line
es.
In
n the figure
e below, the IP addres
ss is 172.0
016.062.18
80.
Figurre 4.4 – IPv4 Address on Display (eac
ch octet is on
n its own line
e)
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
350
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Throu
ugh the Eltek
E
Ne
etwork Utility
U
NOTE: This
T
proced
dure requirres the use
e of a comp
puter with the Eltek N
Network Uttility
(ENU) in
nstalled.
1.
Launch the Eltek Netw
work Utility
y (ENU) on tthe compu
uter.
Fig
gure 4.5 - Elte
ek Network Utility Icon
2.
After
A
the EN
NU program
m opens, cllick on the search button (magn
nifying glas
ss
ic
con) in the upper left corner to find
f
the co
ontroller. W
Wait for the
e window to
o
populate.
p
Figurre 4.6 – Eltek
k Network Uttility Window
w
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Administrration
3.
351
Once
O
the co
ontroller ap
ppears, the
e IP Addresss is shown
n under the
e IP Addres
ss
column.
Change the IP Address
The IP address
a
of the
t controller can be
e changed tthrough the Web Inte
erface on th
he
TCP/IP page:
p
System
S
Conf. > Devic
ce Setting
gs > Netwo
ork Settin
ngs > TCP//IP
By default, Eltek controllers
c
are configured with a static IP a
address. T
This can be
e
changed
d to either another sttatic addre
ess or to a d
dynamic ad
ddress (DH
HCP)
determiined by the
e network.
NOTE: If
I the contrroller is to be connected to a co
omputer ne
etwork, req
quirements
s for
proper addressing
a
g must be provided
p
by
y the local systems/n
network ad
dministrato
or(s)
(IT group).
Dynam
mic (DHC
CP)
To enab
ble dynamic
c addressin
ng, simply check
c
the Enable box
x to the rig
ght of DHCP.
The con
ntroller will then obtain its new IP
I address from the n
network.
Figure 4.7 – DCHP Config
guration
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
352
User Guide: Eltek Contro
oller Web Inte
erface
Static
c (Manua
al)
To enter a static IP
P address:
1.
Make
M
sure that
t
the En
nable box next
n
to DHC
CP is not c
checked; ottherwise, the
fiields for th
he Manual settings
s
se
ection cann
not be editted.
2.
With
W the fields under Manual
M
setttings editable, enterr the netwo
ork setting
gs
fo
or the conttroller: Age
ent IP Address, Netw
work Subne
et Mask, Default
Gateway,
G
and DNS Se
erver. See Network S
Settings be
eginning on
n page 139 for
definitions of
o these fie
elds
NOTE:
N
Not all fields are required
d for netwo
ork setup, sso consult with the lo
ocal
systems or network administrattor(s) for th
he required
d informatio
on.
3.
Once
O
all Manual settin
ngs fields are
a configu
ured as nee
eded, click the Save icon
in
n the lowerr right corn
ner to save the chang
ges.
Figure 4.8 – Static
S
IP Conffiguration
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, Aprril 2014
Trademark and Copyright Notices
353
Trademark and Copyright Notices
NOTE: This publication is an independent production of Eltek, Inc. and has not been
authorized, sponsored, or approved by the companies and organizations credited in
this section. The third-party (unaffiliated) companies, organizations, and respective
trademarks mentioned in this publication are named only for the purpose of
specifying compatibility and known compatibility issues with their software
applications and/or operating systems and Eltek products; such mentions are not
either an endorsement or a criticism of, sponsorship by, or affiliation with any of the
products or organizations mentioned.
The credit lines that follow are listed in no particular order:
•
Microsoft, Windows, and Internet Explorer (IE) are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
•
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
•
Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.
•
Chrome is a registered trademark of Google Inc.
•
Mac and Safari are registered trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
•
Opera is a trademark of Opera Software ASA.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
354
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Glossary
AC Mains Monitor – Eltek CAN Node designed for monitoring ac input (mains), monitoring ac voltage,
current, and frequency.
Alarm – a software-generated notice from the system controller that an alarm monitor has detected
a measurement or signal that triggered a reportable event.
Alarm Group or Alarm Output Group (AOG) – a software assignment for grouping alarms together
and mapping to alarm output channels of the controller or CAN Nodes. Alarm groups are userdefinable, and mapping them to the controller’s output relays is also customizable. Currently, there
are 24 alarm groups available: 18 for relays, and 6 for low-voltage disconnect (LVD) contactors.
Alarm Monitor – a software module that measures input or output signals or logical states and
compares the measurement with programmed values or limits, raising an alarm if the programmed
threshold is met or exceeded.
Ampacity – the current-carrying capacity or current rating of a power conductor; the term is a
portmanteau of the terms ampere and capacity.
Battery Bank – a set of battery strings connected in parallel, with each string consisting of enough
batteries to support the full voltage of the power system (e.g., 24V or 48V strings). A power system
can be supported by multiple battery banks.
Battery Block – a manufactured battery unit consisting of two or more battery cells and connected
in series with other battery blocks to build a battery string. For example, typical
telecommunications equipment requires either 24V or 48V batteries; in 24V systems, two 12V
blocks are connected to produce the 24V capacity string required; in 48V systems, four 12V blocks
are connected to produce the capacity string required.
Battery Boost (Fast or Quick Charge) – battery boost charging is used to accelerate battery
recharging by elevating charge voltage. In Eltek controllers, this function is very similar to Battery
Equalize charging.
Battery Equalize – battery equalize charging is used to rebalance individual battery cells, since they
tend to become slightly unbalanced over time. Equalize charging applies an elevated charge voltage
for a few hours in an attempt to rebalance the battery cells. This is used mainly for large lead-acid
batteries. In Eltek controllers, this function is very similar to Battery Boost charging.
Battery Monitor – Eltek CAN Node that monitors battery current, temperature, and fuse (or circuit
breaker).
Battery Quality – a value representing the percentage of a battery’s original capacity that remains
for charging.
Battery String – a series of battery blocks that are connected to provide the required dc voltage for
a power system. Two or more battery strings connected in parallel comprise a battery bank.
Battery Symmetry – a category of battery voltage monitoring designed to detect battery cells that
are failing to hold charge. Symmetry monitoring looks for deviations between the voltage
measurements between or within battery strings.
Battery Test – controller mode that records battery performance data during discharge.
CAN Node – an Eltek control unit designed to communicate controller and monitoring information
over a proprietary controller area network (CAN) bus. Eltek CAN Nodes include controllers, but
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Glossary
355
usually refer to the auxiliary monitoring devices (like the Battery Monitor, Load Monitor, and I/O
Monitor Types 1-3) that provide additional monitoring and output signal functionality.
Charger – generic term for a power module or system that charges batteries. As such, the term can
be applied to rectifiers, converters, and even entire power systems. As used by Eltek, the term is
limited to power modules designed for converting energy from solar, wind, or fuel cell sources. See
RECTIFIER and CONVERTER for specific uses of these terms.
Compack – a small form-factor Eltek controller designed for use with the Micropack family of power
modules. Configuration can only be done through a computer interface (e.g., PowerSuite or the Web
Interface). It provides three configurable inputs and three output relays.
Converter – generic term for a power module that converts electric current from one form to
another. Though often applied to ac-to-dc power conversion, this term is specifically applied to dcto-dc power modules, which transform dc voltage from one level to another (e.g., 48 Vdc to 24 Vdc).
Critical premises (Contactor operation) – alarm conditions that must be met for the system to
report a critical condition, which indicates that there is low ac current (mains) and/or low battery
current. The choice affects when the low-voltage disconnect (LVD) contactors may be
disconnected; by design, LVDs disconnect in critical condition and reconnect in normal condition.
Current Monitor – one of the nomenclatures give to Eltek Load Monitors. See Load Monitor.
Depth of Discharge (DOD) – the inverse of SOC (State of Charge), depth of discharge determines
how much battery charge has been used during a battery discharge. Eltek controllers report DOD in
amp-hours (Ah).
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) – a network application protocol where devices added
to the network obtain configuration information from the network host. Eltek controllers can have
DHCP enabled in order to be configured by the computer network. By default, Eltek controllers are
pre-configured with a static IP address.
Discontinuance Test – The discontinuance test detects battery string imbalances (caused by such
problems as open circuits and short-circuits) faster than battery symmetry measurements. It
monitors individual battery string currents (which means that each battery string must have its own
shunt) and raises an alarm if any of the currents deviates from the average current for all strings by
more than the percentage specified under the DeltaStringCurr alarm parameter (Alarm Conf. >
Battery > Battery Alarm Configuration).
Earth Fault Detection – The Earth Fault Detection functionality built-in the Smartpack2 Basic
controllers can be used to raise an earth fault alarm, when the impedance ground-to-positive supply
conductor is not the same as the impedance ground-to-negative supply conductor. This situation will
occur when there is current leakage from the supply conductor (from + or – or both) to ground.
ENU (Eltek Network Utility) – Eltek computer application for locating Eltek controllers on a local
network and changing some of their network parameters, upgrading software, and launching the
Web Interface. ENU is designed for the Microsoft Windows environment only.
Event – the internal controller action triggered by an alarm monitor when programmed thresholds
are exceeded by the monitored signal or logical state device. Events are associated with alarms.
Flexi Monitor – Eltek CAN Node designed for a variety of input monitoring; it is very similar in
function to the Load Monitor, but can also be used for monitoring batteries and fans. In addition, its
inputs can monitor both current and fuses (or circuit breakers), and each input can be assigned to a
type that is different from the others.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
356
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Float Voltage – battery charge voltage that compensates for battery self-discharge; this is the
power system voltage under normal conditions. It is also called Reference Voltage in the web
interface, typically in the context of volts per battery cell.
Genset/Gen-set (Generating set) – backup power supply system, which can be activated,
deactivated, and/or monitored by Eltek controllers. Up to two generators and fuel tanks can be
monitored.
Hysteresis – lag or delay. In the Web Interface, Hysteresis is a parameter in alarm monitors for
entering a tolerance value on either side of the alarm threshold values. This tolerance value
prevents rapid ON/OFF switching of the alarm if the measured value is changing rapidly.
I/O Monitor – Eltek CAN Node device that provides auxiliary alarm inputs and output relays. Types 1
and 3 also support inputs and signaling features for outdoor cabinet applications.
I/O Unit – generic term in the Web Interface for Eltek I/O Monitors. See I/O Monitor.
IP Address – Internet Protocol address; the network address of a computer device (such as an Eltek
controller).
LAN (Local Area Network) – computer network within a defined area, such as a building or office.
Eltek controllers are designed for integration with computer networks through built-in Ethernet
ports and TCP/IP parameters.
Load Group – a load group refers to the loads monitored by a single controller unit. All controllers
except for the Smartpack2 Master have a load group.
Load Monitor – an Eltek CAN Node that monitors load current. It can be set to a variety of current
monitor types, including load, dc-to-dc converters, and alternative energy sources.
LVBD (Low-Voltage Battery Disconnect) – contactor that disconnects batteries from the power
system when the specified voltage limit is reached.
LVD (Low-Voltage Disconnect) – contactor that opens and closes a circuit (usually a set of loads or
battery banks) based on voltage parameters.
LVLD (Low-Voltage Load Disconnect) – contactor that disconnects loads from the power system
when the specified voltage limit is reached.
Mains – the ac power supplied by a utility grid. Eltek’s Web Interface uses “mains” because it is a
more common term globally.
Mains Group – a mains group is a set of ac inputs for a rectifier group that is monitored by a
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial controller; rectifiers must be connected to the Smartpack2 Basic
Industrial controller in order for this group to appear.
Normal Test – The Normal Test relies on the battery table for reference, using the battery
specifications to determine end voltage. The only editable parameter that affects termination of the
test is "Max duration". Under Normal Test, battery discharge results are evaluated only if the test is
stopped by reaching End voltage. Results are discarded if a test is terminated due to reaching Max
duration or any other reasons (such as manually stopping the test).
NTP (Network Time Protocol) – network application protocol for synchronizing computer clocks.
Eltek controllers support reception of current time information from an NTP server under the
Timeserver page (System Conf. > Device Settings > Network Settings > Timeserver).
OVS (Over-Voltage Shutdown) – protection feature that shuts down rectifiers which exceed high
voltage thresholds.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Glossary
357
Power Module – generic term for the power-converting units of power systems, including rectifiers
and converters. Ac-to-dc rectifiers, dc-to-dc-converters, and solar, wind, and fuel cell chargers are
power modules.
PowerSuite – an Eltek software application that provides advanced configuration and monitoring
capabilities for computers connected to Eltek controllers. PowerSuite is designed for the Microsoft
Windows environment only. The Web Interface is being expanded to offer all of the same capabilities
as PowerSuite, since the Web Interface has the distinct advantage of not requiring software
installation on the computer accessing the controller.
Rectifier – a power module that converts ac power to dc power. See Converter for comparison.
Rectifier Group – a rectifier group is a set of rectifiers monitored by a single Smartpack2 Basic
Industrial controller.
Reference Voltage – voltage per battery cell required to compensate for self-discharge. It is also
called Float Voltage.
Simplified Test – The Simplified test does not use the battery table for reference; instead, it relies
on user-entered values to determine whether the batteries are able to discharge for the entire
duration specified (Max duration) or meet the amp-hour value (Max discharge) before falling to the
voltage per cell specified in the "End voltage" field. All three parameters are user-defined, but must
be within the specifications provided by the battery manufacturer. The test stops when any one of
the parameters mentioned above (Max duration, Max discharge, or End voltage) is reached.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) – communication protocol for transmitting email messages
across a network. Eltek controllers support email communication for reporting purposes.
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) – protocol for managing devices on a computer
network. The Eltek controller supports integration onto a network managed by SNMP. Eltek
provides MIB (Management Information Base) files for this integration. Currently, Eltek controllers
support SNMP v1, v2c, and v3.
SP2 (Smartpack2) – an Eltek controller family designed for use with the Flatpack2 and Powerpack
power modules. Most configurations consist of a Smartpack2 Master, Smartpack2 Basic (or Basic
Industrial), and I/O Monitor Type 2 unit to comprise the controller system. Additional controllers and
CAN Nodes can be added to increase functionality, especially for large-scale power systems.
SP2 Basic (Smartpack2 Basic) – an Eltek controller unit primarily responsible for monitoring
rectifiers and reporting data to the Smartpack2 Master controller.
SP2 BasicInd (Smartpack2 Basic Industrial) – an Eltek controller unit designed for more extensive
applications than the Smartpack2 Basic unit, including multi-bay power systems, polarity isolation,
and Modem Callback.
SP2 Master (Smartpack2 Master) – the central unit of the Smartpack2 controller system,
containing both an interactive display and Ethernet port for the Web Interface. It features an SD
card that can be used to save and load statistics and software. The Master unit requires other
Smartpack2 units in order to form a complete controller system.
SPS (Smartpack S) – an Eltek controller designed for use with the Flatpack S family of power
modules. It contains both an interactive display and Web Interface. It provides six configurable
inputs and six output relays.
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) – a cryptographic communication protocol available as a connection
option for the Eltek Controller Web Interface.
State of Charge (SOC) – the percentage of battery capacity remaining during a battery discharge.
Depth of discharge (DOD) is its inverse.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
358
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
State of Health (SOH) – calculation of a battery’s ability to deliver on its performance ratings based
on its quality (percentage of original capacity that remains for charging) and total maximum
capacity.
Temperature Compensation – controller feature that adjusts battery charging based on thermal
conditions.
Virtual Alarm – a manually-activated toggle for alarm events and alarm groups. A virtual alarm can
be used to manually activate and deactivate output channels, depending on how the assigned alarm
group is mapped. A virtual alarm may also be treated as an output channel, permitting an alarm
group to toggle the virtual alarm.
WAN (Wide Area Network) – a computer network that connects computers across a large area,
usually interconnecting numerous office locations and their local area networks (LANs).
Web Interface – the web browser-based user interface provided with Eltek controllers that
facilitates power system monitoring and configuration through a computer without requiring
installation of Eltek software.
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
Index
359
Acronyms
A – ampere (amp)
A/D – analog-to-digital
AC or ac – alternating current
Ah – amp-hour
AOG – Alarm Output Group
DC or dc – direct current
DOD – Depth of Discharge
ENU – Eltek Network Utility
LAN – Local Area Network
mA – milliamp
MIB – Management Information Base
mV – millivolt
NMS – Network Management System
SMTP – Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
SNMP – Simple Network Management Protocol
SOC – State of Charge
SOH – State of Health
SP - Smartpack
SP2 – Smartpack2
SPS – Smartpack S
SSL – Secure Sockets Layer
TCP/IP – Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
V – volt
WAN – Wide Area Network
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
360
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Index
Alarm Group
description, 166, 167
Alarm(s)
event. See Event
group. See Alarm Group
logical groups. See Logical Groups
monitor types, 162
nag (recurring) buzzer, 203, 293
output channels, 202
output relay tests, 247, 324, 334
setting, 282
setup example, 289
Battery
alarm summary window, 58
bank, configure number of, 108
battery table, 109–13
boost. See Boost
command buttons, 323
discharge testing. See see Tests (battery)
disconnect voltage (Battery page), 108
disconnect voltage (System Voltages
page), 89
equalize. See Equalize charging
estimated Ah capacity, 264
reconnect voltage (Battery page), 109
reconnect voltage (System Voltages
page), 90
setting current limit, 267
Boolean Algebra. See Logical Groups
Boost
execute, 246
voltage (Boost page), 116
voltage (System Voltages page), 89
Buzzer
silence, 244
CAN Nodes
overview, 207
Commands
using command buttons, 322
Compack
alarm monitors, 198
Doc. No. 370035.013
Configuration files
download from controller, 340
upload to controller, 344
Control System
alarm summary window, 71
Controllers
compatible, 11
documentation, 10
Dc-to-Dc Converter
status window, 52
ENU (Eltek Network Utility)
description, 17
for IP address, 350
for logging in, 18
Equalize charging
description, 118
execute, 246
Event
description, 165
list, 166–67
Flexi Monitor
monitoring types, 216
names by monitor type, 230
setup, 310
Fuel Cell
status window, 50
Generator
alarm group assignment(s), 94
alarm summary window, 38
setting activation parameters, 297
High-voltage shutdown. See Overvoltage shutdown (OVS)
Home Page
overview, 28
I/O Monitor
inputs and outputs by Type, 221–23
output relays for Types 1 and 3, 224
Type 3, fan control settings, 129
Issue 1, April 2014
Index
361
LED test
controller, 245
rectifier, 245
Load
alarm summary window, 56
group description, 106, 187
how to make LVLDs appear, 106
Load Monitor
configuration page (Current Monitor), 132
monitoring types, 212
names by monitor type, 230
setup, 304
Logical Groups
description, 204
setup procedure, 315, 318
Login
procedure, 17
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), 13
Logs
download, 335
Low-voltage disconnect (LVD)
setup on Battery page (LVBD), 108
setup on LVBD alarm monitor, 172
setup on LVLD alarm monitor, 173
Mains
alarm summary window, 34
Naming the system
device (Network Settings), 140, 347
site (System Info), 84
Networking
controller IP address, 139, 348
Outdoor Inputs
alarm summary window, 77
Over-voltage shutdown (OVS)
set on Rectifiers page, 99
set on System Voltages page, 89
Parameters
identical fields (table), 90
Passwords. See User Accounts
PowerSuite
description, 17
unique functions, 81
Doc. No. 370035.013
Rectifier
alarm summary window, 40
current limit, 99
over-voltage shutdown (OVS). See Overvoltage shutdown (OVS)
setting current limit, 262
shuffle (rotation) feature, 101
startup delay, 100
suppress rectifier fail alarm, 99
Reference voltage
difference between Cell and Total, 88
set on System Voltages page, 88
set on TempComp page, 113
setup procedure, 261
Reset alarms, 244
Reset modules, 244
Smartpack S
alarm monitors, 196
Smartpack2
Basic and Basic Industrial alarm monitors,
195
Master alarm monitors, 195
SMTP
configuration, 141
SNMP
setup, 300
Solar
status window, 47
Statistics
download, 339
Symbols
alarm icons, 25
category buttons, 26
system overview buttons, 32
System Inputs
alarm summary window, 74
Temperature Compensation
setup, 272
temperature probe setup, 276
Test (battery)
test result details, 236
Issue 1, April 2014
362
Tests (battery)
execute, 246, 271, 334
setup, 268
Thermal Compensation. See
Temperature Compensation
User Accounts
"Illegal user" explanation, 242
change current password, 159
defaults, 14
permissions, 14
set inactivity timeout, 161
Doc. No. 370035.013
User Guide: Eltek Controller Web Interface
Virtual inputs
activate/deactivate, 249
Virtual Inputs
setup example, 329
Web Interface
features, 12
requirements, 15
supported browsers, 12, 16
unique functions, 12
Wind
status window, 48
Issue 1, April 2014
Index
363
Doc. No. 370035.013
Issue 1, April 2014
ww
ww.eltek.com
US Office:
Eltek, Inc.
o Pkwy, Plano, TX 75074,
7
USA
2925 E Plano
Phone: +1 (469) 330-9100 Fax: +1 (469) 330-910
01
Interna
ational:
Elltek AS
Gråterudv. 8, P
Pb 2340 Strømsø, 3003 Drammen, N
Norway
Phone
e: +47 32 20 32 00
0 Fax: +47 32 20
0 32 10